You are on page 1of 313

AFFDL-TR- 79-032 Volume I

-•

ADA086557
THE USAF STABIULTY AND CONTROL DIGITAL DATCOM Volume I, Users Manual

CQWCO gotoI19
MCDONNELL DOUGLAS ASTRONAUTICS COMPANY- ST LOUIS DIVSION ST. WUIS MISSOURI W166

t

v

APRIL 1979

:
TECHNICAL REPORT AFFDL-TR-79-3032, Volume I Final Report for Period August 1977 - Novmber 1978

•, \

IDT ELEt"
A

v7%,

2..980

1 8O

Approved for public relem;distrb•ution unlimited.

C.31 4 j

AIR FORCE FLIGHT DYNAMICS LABORATORY AIR FORCE WRIGHT AERONAUTICAL- LABORATORIES AIR FORCE SYSTEMS COMMAND WRIGHT-PATFERSON AIR FORCE BASE, OHIO 48433

80 7
Reproduced F:0111

7

____9

Best Available Copy

C

Nomrcr
Whn government drawings, specifications, or other data are used for any purpose other.than in connection with a deajnitely related government procurement operation, the United States /(?ernment thereby incurs no responsibility nor any obligation whatavever; and the fact that the government nmy have formulated, furnished, dr in any way s:pZied the aid dri•ings, specifications, or other d2ta, is not to be regardledby inplication or otherwise as in any nmaner licensing the holder or any other person or corporation, or conveying any rights or permission to manufacture, use, or sell any patented invention that may in any way be related thereto.

This report has been reviewed by the Office of Public Affaim (ASD/PA) and is releasabZe to the National Technical Information Service (NTIS). At NTIS, it will be available to the general public, including foreign -nations.

This technical report has been reviewed and is approved for publication.

B. F. NI ERA US

V. 0. 11087 Acting Branch Chief Control Dynamics Branch PZight Control Divfsion

FOR THE COAM44NDER

MORRIS A. OST AARD Acting Chief Flight Control Division If your address has chanqed, if you wish to be removed from our nz ling list, or if the addressee is no longer enpZoyed by your organization please notify APWAL/FIGC, W-PAPB, OH 45433 to help us maintain a current mailing list. Copies of this report should not be returned unless return is requiredby security considerations, contractual obligations, or notice on a specifi document.
AIR FORCE/567eo/24 June 1960 - *60

_

_

• _

/__

f

II°

UNCLASSIFIED
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION Of THIS PAGE (VillA 04*6 Eft4
__________________

PrAetGoE
II.EPW COR=LN OEFORE NAMPLENINGCFORM

AFFDLIO ICPEN-

1

rgT-Paterson- Ai Foc

IaBaseRI"NO

IL OITRIUTO

STATEMENT (

d.

kbpi

I

UPPEMN

TAR Y N.CNTATOTGEST

USPR

illsm John E.CO

IO

Steven R.ueic

361N)C-7ý

Compute

Progrct

219

{4

sAbiity

hoceFighlit Dyandiconrl and dynami deiAtire chrcersis9 or, adKahra.na capailiie ger Batttu, omety Wr76).t-ontigraton

con-

r

tr

NC NITm at Isusn

st AchI

es

z.

is o the Us#mu SE

p thid re CUIT CLSS (omfa lt)

%d~$
,fj~~~ASIIS&IO

DCifOF

AGE CTNIS (SMG INAI.

SCEDL

UNCLASSIFIED
S-Cu-TV C•.AMPICATIO.
OF THIS PAGE(Whm Does •--•_d)

program capabilities, input and output characteristics, and example problems.) Volume IJt-dis"Volume 11 describes program implementation of Datcom methods. cusses. aseparate plot module for -D. Datcom. ..... The program is written in ANSI Fortran IV. The primary deviations from standard Fortran are Namelist input and certain statements required by the CDC Core requirements have been mininizd by data packing and the use compilers. of overlays. User oriented features of the program include minimized input requirements, Input error analysis, and various options for application flexibility.\

..

I~ Ac.Ssioi.,in
INTIS

Par

~x

SCi
/ - -. __, h..

S...

s,,,.

:R[, .' ,•For

AFFOL-TR-3032,, Vol. I •, ,., the microfiche supplement for this
contacts AFWAL/FIGC, ATTNs Mr'. J. E.

..

Sdocument

... Jank~nis Wright Patterson AFS, OM

454•/33

S"
"
.... " "••' "•
1"

"
•"

" " "UNCLASSIFIED
'SIitCURITY
CL'ASSIFICATION

OF THIS PAGIE(WOI•

OJM& Ittered)

FOREWORD

This

report,

"The USAF Stability and Control Digital Datcom," describes and control, SecApril

the computer program that calculates static stability, high lift and dynamic

derivative characteristics using the methods contained in

tions 4 through 7 of the USAF Stability and Control Datcom (revised 1976). o o o The report consists of the following three volumes: Volume I, Volume II, Users Manual Implementation of Datcom Methods

Volume III, Plot Module of the program is provided as a microfiche supplement.

A complete listing

This work was performed by the McDonnell Douglas Astronautics Company, Box 516, St. Louis, MO 63166, under contract number F33615-77-C-3073 with the Wright-Patterson Air Force Base, OH.

United States Air Force Systems Command,

The subject contract was initiated under Air Force Flight Dynamics Laboratory Project 8219, in Task 82190115 on 15 August 1977 and was effectively.,6oncluded Whis report supersedes AFFDLTR-73-23 produced under which automated SeqibTns 4 and 5 of the USAF Staunder contract F33615-73-

November 1978.

contract bility

F33615-72-C-1067,

and Control Datcom; AFFDL TR-74-68bproduced

C-3058 which extended the program to include Datcom Sections 6 and 7 and a trim option; and AFFDL-TR-76-45 that incorporated Datcom revisions and user The recent activity gener-

oriented options under contract F33615-75-C-3043. ated a plot module,

updated methods to incorporate the 1976 Datcom revisions, user oriented features. These contricts, in total, Feb-

and provide additional

reflect a systematic approach ruary 1972. Mr. J. E. Jenkins,

to Datcom automation which commenced in AFFDL FGC,

was the Air Force Project Engineer B. F. Niehaus acted in this capa-

for the previous

three contracts and Mr.

city for the current contract.- -The authors wish to thank Mr. assistance, mentation, particularly in and verification.

Niehaus for his imple-

the areas ot computer program formulation, A list

of the Digital Datcom Principal Investi-

gators and individuals who made significant contrihutions to the development of this program is provided on the following page.
-

Requests for copies of the computer program should be directed to the

"Air Force

Flight Dynamics Laboratory (FGC).

Copies of this report can be

obtained from the National Technical Information Service (NTIS).
This report was submitted in April 1979.

4iiC

-.

.

f

"-•.

.

._

"• .

/

...

.

..-

PRINCIPAL INVESTIGATORS Jo E. Williams S. C. Murray
G. J. Meblick

(1975 (1973 (1972 (1972

-Present)

-1975)

-1973)

T. B. Sellers

-1972)

ODNTRIBUTORS

E. W..Ellison
R. D. Finck G. S. Washburn

(Datcom Methods Interpretation)I.
(Program Structure and Coding)7

iv

.o.5 5.6 4. . . . . . 3. . . 0 * . . .. o e Transverse Jet Control Effectiveness . ...*. . ... o .. * . . . . . .. .. 3. o o . * * . .2 2. 0 Static and Dynamic Stability Output Digital Daccom System Output . * .3 4..... ... .. *. . 2... . .a. . . . . Page . . . * e * . . 9. . . . . . Component Configuration Modeling . . . . ... .: . . ... . ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION MODELING TECHNIQUES o .0 . 2.0. .o. o 77 81 81 84 86 86 87 . . .. . .. .. .. . ..5 Group III Input Data . . Special Configuration Data ..o. . o . . o o .2 0 . . Operational Considerations o o o . . . ..... . .o...0..a. o .. ...*. I 5 5 5 13 14 PROGRAM CAPABILITIES 2... ...2 4.3 Input Technique . . o * . .o.a. DEFINITION OF OUTPUT . . . . . . . . f .. . .. . .a.4 5.. . . . # . . . ..*. . o o. . EXAMPLE CASES 7.3 5. o . . . . . . . .o. . . .. .2 5.. . . . 0 ..... 89 89 . . . .. ...o. . DEFINITION OF INPUTS o D -...t 7..%.. Flap Control Effectiveness at Hypersonic Speeds -. . . . . . Power and Ground Effects .5 6. - Low-Aspect-Ratio Wing or Wing-Body . . . .. 5.#. 7. . . Group I Input Data Group II Input Data . .. . .... .. 89 90 90 90 91 91 o101 107 107 . .. . .. . .. * Multiple Component Modeling Dynamic Derivatives Trim Option . .. . . . .0.. 4. .4 Representative Case Setur o & o o * * .*. . .4 Basic Configuration Data o 9 . . . . Title . . .. . .3 2. . ... . 5.. . . . . . High Lift and Control Configurations .*. . . .*. .. o o. . .. . .' 6. 3. .3 Example Problem I Example Problem 2 Example Problem 3 . . 4. . . . o o .. . . . . .2 7. .. . o . .. * .. . . .. . . . .. .. INTRODUCTION .. .1 Addressable Configurations . . . . .. .. . . o .. . . . o o ... . .1 4.TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1.... . . Group IV Input Data .2 3. . & o* o BASIC CONFIGURATION MODELING TECHNIQUES .-.1 3.. 110 113 v. a . .. .. a ..o... 3..1 Substitution of Experimental Data .*. . .4 3. . .1 6. . * * . . . .. .. 19 25 31 47 73 o.o.o. .. * . . * .

.. .3 * . 127 129 . .. .5 7. * . . . . . * . 0 ... . B NAMELIST CODING RULES . .d. .... . . ..*. . . .. .TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page .. . .8 7.10 7oll Example Problem 4 Example Problem 5 Example Problem 6 Example Problem 7 . .. . . .. • ° . . . . 138 149 155 . . . a . . . . .9 7. 155 158 160 . .. Input and Output Computational Data Blocks * Output Data Blocks .. • a . & o .7 7. . Example Problem 8.. . . . . .. . Limitations and Module Defaults Airfoil Section Designations . .4 Introduction . ... 1 31 135 135 135 AIRFOIL SECTION CHARACTERISTIC ESTIMATION TECHNIQUES . .... . 0 . . .0. .. . Example Problem 9 . ... ..6 7. .. . . Example Problem 11 . a . . . . . . .. .* 0 . ... Module Methods .... C STORAGE LOCATION OF VARIABLES IN COMMON C... . .. ... .. . . . o . . . .. •.. . . *. . .. 0 * . o 0. . .2 C. . . vi *J - • -- i - . e o. . • v . a• . o * * 0 & & .. . . o o. . . . 283 o o e a a * o 9 o e 0 0 * 0 0 317 * - . . . 125 Example Problem 10 .. .... . . .. .0 0 a 118 120 122 124. . D References USER'S KIT. . .• . . . . .. Flap and Trim Output Data Blocks . . 0..1 Bo2 B. .4 7. . Section Title 7.....3 B. • a 116 a .. . *. . . B. ... . . Appendices A. . . .*. .a. . . .. .. . .. . . . . . . .1 C.. o .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 0 o. .

Ground Effect Data .. . .. Example Auxiliary and Partial Output ...... * 10 11 12 13 .. * ... . o o * . ... .. ..... ... .. Typical Case Setup Typical Stacked Case Setup 79 92 100 Digital Datcom Static and Dynamic Stability Output . ....... .. * F 5 6 7 . ........... Jet Flap Input Definitions Input for Namelist ASYFLP Deflection Input .Body Geometric Data Input for Namelists WGPLNF..Reference Parameters Input for Namelist SYNTHS ..LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Figure S 2 3 4 Digital Datcom Modules Special Configura tions Title e... . .... vii >1 x \ *- ... Section Characteristics .Jet Power Parameters Input for Namelist GRNDEF . - . . ....... . ... .... ... ....... Wire . .. .... ...... a .. .. .. ... Flight Conditions . Control Input Input for Namelist HYPEFF . Planform Variables HTPLNF... ...... 61 20 Input for Namelist LARWB Body Input ....Propeller Power Parameters Input for Namelist JETPWR . .Experimental Data Input 45 49 51 53 55 Input for Namelist PR0PWR .. Asymmetrical Control ... Input for Namelist EXPRnn . .. ..... ..... Low Aspect Ratio Wing....... * 39 41 43 9 Primary Application Regimes for Subsonic Downwash Methods Transonic Experimental Data Substitution . ... ... ... 57 59 60 17 18 19 Symmetrical Flap Input Definitions .Transverse-Jet Speeds .... .. .... .... .Flap Control at Hlypersunic . ...... HTSCHR... ..... VTPLNF and VFPLNF 37 VTSCHR and VFSCHR o o a - 8 Input for Namelists WGSCHR........ ........... 0 .. .. . ..Twin-Vertical Panel Inputs Input for Namelist SYMFLP . ... .. . . page 2 12 27 29 33 35 Input for Namelist FLTC0N - Input for Namelist 0PTINS ... S14 15 16 Input for Namelist TVTPAN . 63 65 67 78 21 22 23 24 25 26 Input for Namelist TRNJET . ... .. . *. . ....Symmetrical Flap Deflection Inputs ... ....Synthesis Parameters Input for Namelist BODY ....

.. o. 126 128 #. .*e* . . . .. .. . Example Problem 2 Example Problem 3 Data . . ... . . . ... .. .. Example Problem 6 Data . .. a . .... . . . * . . .. .. 38 B-I B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 11 Data * . . .. * * * .. .. . Example Problem 7 Data Example Problem 9 Data Example Problem 10 Data Example Problem . . . . Airfoil Characteristic Variables.. ... a ... r 119 121 123 .. Lift 144 Effect of Position of Maximum Thickness op Section Maximum . . . .. .. 105 28 29 30 31 32 Body Modeling and Example Problem I Body Data . . * . .. .&. . 142 Airfoil Section Maximum Lift Coefficient of Uncambered Effect of Airfoil Camber Location and Amount of Section Maximum Lift. . 146 147 Graphical Solution for (t/c) Effective viii t /-• ..a a * 33 34 35 36 37 Example Problem 5 Data . * * .. . .. a "143 . . . . 130 Variation of Leading-Edge Radius with Thickness Ratio of Airfoils ..9.... 145 Effect of Reynolds Number on Section Maximum Lift ....... . 141 Variation of Leading-Edge Sharpness Parameter with Airfoil Thickness Ratio Airfoils .. . Example Problem 4 Data . * . . . ... . .. .. . . e aa * . . ...... ..... . . ..... & a .. . . . e 109 112 115 117 Example Problem 2 Wing Planform Approximations e *. .. . . ... ... . . . .. .. ... .. .. 145 146 Effect of NACA Standard Roughness on Section Maximum Lift Typical Variation of Section Maximum Lift with Free-Stream Mach Number ... .'. . * ... . .. . .. .. 0 * 0 * .. ....... . page ..a. . . . ... .. .. ... .. .. . .LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued) Figure 27 Title Extrapolation Message Interpretation . . . .. * . .... . . . ..

... . .. *** 6 o o o w . . . 14 15 102 103 . .. ..• .. o I 2 3 4 Addressable Configurations o o o o Speed Regime . • : .. ...•. . ..... ... . 5 6 7 8 9 Rejuired Namelists for Analysis of Basic Configurations Narelists Required for Additional Analysis of Basic Configurations . 22 23 0 .. .. ........ .. .... * 7 10 21 High Lift/Control Device Output Digital Datcom Input Summary . a .. .0 .. . Aerodynamic Output as a Fune-ion of Configuration and * .. .. e.. . . .. .. . . o... *.... .. 10 11 12 13 Input Parameter List Namelist C0NTAB .ao.•. 0 ... . . . ... .. .. . .. .... . . 132 134 I I I I A-2 I I . .. * . . ~ ____..... Aspect Ratio Classification .• -..... . ... . . . ... Equations for Rland R2 00NERRError Nessages Case ErrorHessages . . 0 0 * Required Namelists for Analysis of Srecial Configurations Input .. .. .ao .LIST OF TABLES Table Title Page . .. . . . lx . .. ... . ..o.. 24 24 41 Unit Options . ....... .. A-i Correct Namelist Coding Incorrect Namelist Coding .. .... ..... 72 76 Airfoil Designation Using the NACA Control Card & a. . a . . 69 70 Symbol Definitions for Namelist CONTAB .. . .

trade studies are flight conditions. The extensive application of complex automated estimation procei3res is often prohibitive in terms of time and computer costs in accompany hand-calculation such an environment. fles program development. Datctm is involved. treated in Section 5. procedures wdhich can Similar inefficiencies require expenditures of significant man-hours. high-lift and control ard dynamic-derivative characteristics using the methods contained irn The computer program also offers a trip and aerodynamic data for vehicle Sections 4 through 7 of Datcom. testing. option that computes control deflecLions trim at subsonic Hach numbers.-. Section 6 discusses the The appendices discuss namelit coding rules. Consistent and control characteristics with this philosophy. figuration geometry modeling techniques presented in special configurations are available output data. rapid and economical estimations of aerodynamic stability and control characteristics are frequently required. Section 4.. self-contained user's kit is the program. and a list of geometric and aerodynamic variables available as supplemental output. airfoil section characteristic estimation methods with supplemental data.r a range rf The fundamental purpose of the IUSAF StabiliLy and Control to provide a systematic summary of methods for estimating stability in preliminary desijn applications. is the development of the Digital Datcom ccmputer program an approach to provide rapid and economical estimation of aerodynamic stability and control characteristics. The program has been developed on a modular basis as illuattatqpin Figure 1. the Userts Manual for the USAF Stability and Control Potential users are directed to Section 2 for an overview of Section 3 provides input defin~tions. with basic conAnalyses of program capabilities. A included to aid the user in setting up inputs to .SECTION I INTRODUCTION In preliminary design operations. or if particularly If configuration estimates are desired c. and modification or expansion. This report is Digital Datcom. Digital Datcom calculates static device. *" in These modules correspond to the primary building blocks referenced The modular approach was used because it simpli- the program executive. stability.

MAIN PROGRAMS PERFORMS THE "EXECUTIVE"m FUNCTIONS OF ORGANIZING AND DIRECTING THE OPERATIONS PERFORMED BY OTHER PROGRAM COMPONENTS.... LOGIC SWITCHING.. TPERFORMS SE REXECUTIVE SUBROUTINES USER-ORIENTED NON-METHOD OPERATIONS SUCH AS ORDERING INPUT DATA. UTILITY SUBROUTINES SUBSONIC MODULE 1 CHARACTERISTICS AT ANGLE OF ATTACK MODULE II IN SIDESLIP TRAN SONIC MODULE III CHARACTERISTICS AT ANGLE OF ATTACK MODULE IV CHARACTERISTICS IN SIDESLIP SUPERSONIC MODULE V CHARACTERISTICS AT ANGLE OF ATTACK MODULE VI CHARACTERISTICS IN SIDESLIP CONFIGURATIONS MODULE VII LOW ASPECT RATIO WING-BODY AT SUBSONIIC SPEEDS MODULE VIII AERODYNAMIC CONTROL EFFECTIVENESS AT HYPERSONIC SPEEDS MODULE IX TRANSVERSE-JET COUTROL EFFECTIVENESS AT HYPERSONIC SPEEDS SPECIAL n SCHARACTERISTICS MODULE MODULE VII TRIM OPTION MODULE X DYNAMIC DERIVATIVES MODULE XJ HIGH-LIFT AND CONTROL DEVICES . . INPUT ERROR ANALYSIS.... & OUTPUT FORMAT SELECTION.. __V_____. PERFORMS STANDARD MATHEMATICAL TASKS REPETITIVELY REQUIRED BY METHOD SUBROUTINES. FIGURE 1 DIGITAL DATCOM MODULES 2 S• • • • • m- g .

Such is differences user-oriented between Datcom and Digital Datcom do exist. listing of the computer program is contained on microfiche as a supplement to this report. Direct Base. Implementation of Datcom Methods. all program inquiries 255-4315. recommended Volume II indicates which method or methods are employed in Digital Datcom. Through the use of overlay and data packing techniques. between Datcom methids and program formulaThe This volume also defines the program implementation requirements.000 octal words for exec-ttion on the CYBER 175 with the NOS operating system using the FTN compiler. computer program. Where more than one Datcom method exists. and limitations of Datcom methods as Volume Digital Datcom are discussed throughout the report. Users should However. number of and program options selected. III discusses a separate plot module for Digital Datcom. incorporated Modifications. refer to Datcom for the limitations of methods involved. written in the Fortran IV language for the CDC the core The computer program is CYBER 175. requirement is 67. Wright-Patterson Air Force OH 45433. the order of one to two seconds per Mach number.Even though the development of Digital Datcom was purcued with the sole objective of translating the Datcom methods into an efficient. in extensions. phone (513) 3 . Usual requirements are on flight conditions. which contains the correspondence tion. executed Central processor time for a case on the NOS system depends on the type of configuration. potential users are forewarned that Datcom drag methods are not for performance. to AFFDL FGC. the primary subject of Volume II.

SECTION 2
PROGRAM CAPABILITIES

This section has been prepared to assist the potential user in his decision process concerning the applicability of the USAF Stability and Control Digital Datcom to his particular requirements. Ing with method validity and limitations, For specific questions dealstrongly encouraged to Much of the flexi-

the user is

refer to the USAF Stability and Control Datcom document. bility

inherent in the Datcom methods has been retained by allowing the user

to substitute experimental or refined analytical data at intermediate computation levels. Extrapolations beyond the normal range of the Datcom methods each time an extrapolation is employed,

are provided by the program; however,

a message is printed which identifies the point at which the extrapolation is
made and the results of the extrapolation. Supplemental output is available via the "dump" and "partial output" options which give the user access to key intermediate parameters to aid verification or adjustment of computations. primary prog:am capabilities as well as

The following paragraphs discuss selected qualifiers and limitations. 2.1 ADDRESSABLE CONFIGURATIONS In general,

Datcom treats the traditional body-wing-tail geometries for a variety of high-lift/control devices. terms of the incremental effects &e

[

including control effectiveness

High-lift/control output is generally in to deflection. The user must

integrate these incremental effects witil Certain Datcom methods applicable to Therefore, the Digital Datcc-A

the "basic" configuration output.

reentry type vehicles are also available. addressable geometries

include the "basic" traditional aircraft concepts and unique geometries which are identified

(including canard configurations), as "special" configurations.

Table I suuuaarizes the addressable configura-

tions accommodated by the program.

2*2
i

BASIC CONFIGURATION DATA
The capabilities discussed below app y to basic configurations, i.e., A deta fled summary of output as a funcpresented in Table 2. Note that

traditional body-wing-tail concepts. Stion of configuration

and speed regime is

Stransonic output can be expanded through the use of data substitution (Sections 3.2 and 4.5). Section 6. Typical output for these configurations are presented in

5

TABLE 1 ADDRESSABLE CONFIGURATIONS CONFIGURATION BODY PROGRAM REMARKS PRIMARILY BODIES OF REVOLUTION, OR CLOSE APPROXIMATIONS, ARE TREATED. TRANSONIC METHODS FOR MOST OF THE AERODYNAMIC DATA DO NOT EXIST. THE RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE REQUIRES FAIRING BETWEEN SUBSONIC AND SUPERSONIC DATA USING AVAILABLE DATA AS A GUIDE. HORIZONTAL STRAIGHT TAPERED, CRANKED, OR DOUBLE DELTA PLA4FORMS ARE TREATED. EFFECTS OF SWEEP, TAPER AND INCIDENCE ARE LINEAR TWIST IS TREATED AT SUBSONIC MACH INCLUDED. NUMBERS. DIHEDRAL EFFECTS ARE PRESENT IN THE LATERALDIRECTIONAL DATA. LONGITUDINAL METHODS REFLECT ONLY A MIDWING POSITION. LATERAL-DIRECTIONAL SOLUTIONS CONSIDER HIGH- AND LOWWING POSITIONS. THE VARIOUS GEOMETRY COMBINATIONS ARE GIVEN IN TABLE 2. WING DOWNWASH METHODS ARE RESTRICTED TO STRAIGHTEFFECTS OF TWIN VERTICAL TAILS ARE TAPERED PLANFORMS. INCLUDED IN THE STATIC LATERAL DIRECTIONAL DATA AT SUBSONIC MACH NUMBERS.

WING, TAIL

BODY-WING, BODY-HORIZONTAL WING-BODY-TAIL

NON-STANDARD GEOMETRIES

NON-STANDARD CONFIGURATIONS ARE SIMULATED USING "BASIC" CONFIGURATION TECHNIQUES. STRAKES CAN BE RUN VIA A DOUBLE-DELTA WING. A BODY-CANARD-WING IS INPUT AS A WING-BODY-HORIZONTAL TAIL. THE FORWARD LIFTING SURFACE IS INPUT AS A WING AND THE AFT SURFACE AS A HORIZONTAL TAIL. LOW ASPECT RATIO WING OR WING-BODY CONFIGURATIONS (LIFTING BODIES) ARE TREATED AT SUBSONIC SPEEDS. TWO-DIMENSIONAL FLAP AND TRANSVERSE JET EFFECTS ARE ALSO TREATED AT HYPERSONIC SPEEDS.

SPECIAL CONFIGURATION

6

//

TABLE 2 AERODYNAMIC OUTPUT AS A FUNCTION OF CONFIGURATION AND SPEED REGIME
* OUTPUT AVAILABLE I OUTPUT OILYFORCOIFIGURATIONSSTRIIGT TAPERED ACES MTN S A OUTPUT OILYmIll EXPEIMENTA. DATA INPUT STATIC AEROOYNIMC CHARACTERISTIC OUTPUT
CONF1ICRATIION

.

, B'q,
_

DYMIC STMliUTY OUTPUT CL A

SPEED NEW STUmc TI ANTRMS0C

Co

~CO

-

lC.

-

CA Cw CiN-CY

-

-

-

CS%

000 00 IN00 0 A a0
_

_

~TRANSONIC 0£ A UPERSONIC
00 NYPERSOIICN 0 SIONIC IN 0 TRANSWNC 0 A SuPONSONIIN 00a NYPERSNCO 0 0 0 0 0 A
a

SUBPSONIC

00

0 0 0 00Q A A 00000 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 • 0 IN OA0 a a 000 a 00 0 0
a0000a

0 o 0 0 0

P • 0

0 0 I 0

ICOIZOITAL TAIL
___

0 a00 00 0000000000000000

VRICAL TAIL

SURSOMIC 0 TRANONIC 01

0 0 0

fRinTRL~

c

000

00 0 00010 00 0 0 000

0

u~w
R.ZONTAL

000 SUt£IC TRANSONIC 0 0 SUPERSONICO 00 NYPERSONIC 0 0 TRNSONIC0 SUBSONIC SUPERSONIC 0 0 a 0 0

~ONI

0 000 A £0 00 0000 0 001 0 00 0 000 00 0 00 £ 00 00o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

000 000 0 0 0

VERTICAL TAILVINTRAINF BODY

°"mi WM•*"O0.a a 0 a
TA o IOC 00 l UPRSONI 00 IN HYPERSONIC 1 0 STPERSONIC

10 : IN. a 10.
0

a a
-.

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

IN

a0 0 a 0 00

00000 0

-

00 0 a 0 0 0

0 0 00 0 00 00 00a AA 00
0 a

0 00 0 a 0 0 a. 0 0 0 a 0 IN

TAIL

SUPERSONIC

01101IN0000 0 TRANISONIC0£ TAIL. NTICAL SPERSONICo00 VIYAFIN IITPENSONICO 0 0

£

0000000

0

0
00 0 0
a

0
00

001
&00 a000300

wmT. a aSNI 0000 WIOi ..IIOP.Ts TRAISOIIC 0 £ A VIIAEAL- &SUPERSONIC0a 0 0 '0-TALF HYPERSONIC0 0

~0
0

0 0

00a 00 0 0

1000

0

0 00 0

0 0 a-

ITNE EFFECTS POWE. OF JET PROPELLER AND PWR. CROWD PROXIMTY K OBTAINED MAY FORT

IFa

THE RFQ

NANELISTS INPUT. EFFECTS POWER GROUND AME THlE OF AND EFFECTS INICLUDED 0 THESUISU11C ARE OILY LONOTUMIRA STAIRLUTY RESUTS. -OYNMIC STABILITY RESULTS THlE ARE SANIE NIIIG-IOy A% T TUNVERTICAL RE$ULTS Of OBTAINED THESE TAIL NAY FUR CONFIGURATIONS NEWE wMEur -t nU. If 111 fVNR1 EFFECTS INCOLUED INTHESUBSONIC ARE ONLY LATERAL STABILITY DATA. +L 1Y TO .ATCOMHANOBOOK METHOD FOR LIMITATIONS If OUTPUTNOT I O IgOI OTA AVAILABLE IN COMBINATION A ONLY TAIW ,NID 0R TAIL

__NYRA__

FI

NY__,

____lC O O

°

O

O _ •

O

°

O

....

...

-eN

rFfCSO

E

NABEISTSAREINFT TH7FFC•O . TAIIT ESLT .0IMIC ________ATi RSLT i•TH

~R.Pf)•UflPRR I ~E i0
4 W .A y8.0OA*E

f0IOfIOllYW • EFCSA[iIL00OL .G-00 ONIU• •

E0Mie

O

0••i4I1SI

H TI~~ WSL•

NT|SNmCL1mH1• .. I T/ IU

URTir

If.

4NPT

/

7

2.2.1

Static Stability Characteristics The iongitudinal and lateral-directional stability characteristics pro-

vided by the Datcom and the Digital Datcom are in the stability-axis system. Body-axis normal-force and axial-force coefficients are also included in the output for convenience of the user. the longitudinal coefficients CD, CL, Cm
,

For those speed regimes and configuraCL, Cm, CN, and CA, and the derivatives

tions where Datcom methods are available, the Digital Datcom output provides Cy¥, Cn( and C, Output for configurations with a wing and Subsonic data that include propeller power, are also available. jet

horizontal tail in power,

also includes downwash and the local dynamic-pressure ratio Power and ground effects are

the region of the tail. or ground offects

limited to the longitudinal aerodynamic characteristics. Users ara cautioned that the Datcom does not rigorously treat aerodynamics in the transonic speed regime, and a fairing between subsonic and supersonic solutions is often the recommended procedure. Digital Datcom uses linear and nonlinear fairings through specific points; however, the user may find another fairing more acceptable. niques are discussed in discussed in Volume 1I, The details of these fairing techThe partial output option, Section 4.

Section 3.5, permits the user to obtain the information necesThe experimental data Input option allows the

sary for transonic fairings.

user to revise the transonic fairings on configuration components, perform parametric analyses on test configurations, and apply better method results (or data) for configurat$on build-up. Datcom body aerodynamic characteristics can be obtained at all Mach numbers only for Sodies of revolution. shown in-Figure 6. Digital Datcom can also provide subsonic longitudinal data for cambered bodies of arbitrary cross section as The cambered body capability is restricted to subsonic longitudinal-stability solutions. Straight-tapered and nonstraight-tapered wings including effects of sweep, taper, and incidence can be treated by the prograa. The effect of linear twist can be treated at subsonic Mach numbers. are included in lateral-directional Dihedral influences Airfoil section Users are stability derivatives and wing wake

location used in the calculation of longitudinal data.

characteristics are a required input, although most of these characteristics may be generated using the Airfoil Section Module (Appendix B).

8

'

4-Y

-

-,t"•/ ..

/

:

".. .*

Sf//./

advised to be minJful of section characteristics which are sensitive to Reynolds number, small, particularly in cases where very low Reynolds number estiA typical example would be pretest estimates for mates are of interest. 100,000 are common. Users should be aware that the Datcom and Digital Datcom employ turbulent skin friction methods in the computation of friction drag values. require adjustment by the user. Computations of wing-body longitudinal characteristics assume, in many cases, that the configuration is of the mid-wing type. Lateral-directional analyses do account for other wing locations. Datcom for specific details. Wing-oody-tail configuratiorns which may be addressed are shown in Table 2. tions, These capabilities permit the user to analyze complete configuraComponent Using this including canard and conventional aircraft arrangements. option described in Section 3.5. Users should consult the Estimates for cases involving significant wetted areas in laminar flow will

laminar flow wind tunnels where Reynolds numbers on the order of

aerodynamic contributions and configuration build-up data are available through the use of the "BUILD" option, the user can isolate component aerodynamic contributions in a similar fashion to break down data from a wind tunnel where such information is of value in obtaining an overall understanding of a specific configuration. Twin vertical panels can be placed either on the wing or horizontal tail. Analysis can be performed with both twin vertical tail panels and a The influence of twin vertical tails is conventional vertical tail specified though interference effects between the three panels is not computed. included only in the lateral-directional stability characteristics at sub------

sonic speeds.
2.2.2 Dynamic Stability Characteristics The pitch, acceleration, roll and yaw derivatives of CLY, Cmq, CL•, Cm&, Cip, CYp, Cnp, Cnr, and Chr are computed for each component and the build-up configurations shown in Table 2. All limitations discussed in Section 7 of the USAF Stability and Control Datcom are applicable to Digital Datcom as well. The experimental data option of the program (Section 4.5) permits the Any improvement in user to substitute experimental data for key parameters involved in dynamic derivative solutions, such as body CL, and wing-body CL.. the accuracy of these key parameters will produce significant improvement in

9

..

1

••

• •

• •

TABLE 3 HIGH LIFT/CONTROL DEVICE OUTPUT
SPEED REGIME CODE Control Device Jet Flaps Pure Jet Flap Jet Flapi Mech. Flap IBF EBr Plain Single Slotted Fowler Slotted Double Slotted Split Leading Edge Krueger Slats Leading Edge ACL* ACm I - Subsonic AC o 0 2 a Transonic AC0min CW 3 - Supersontc C W C Ch* Ch
--

ACLmax (CLU)

I 1 1 1 1

1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 3

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1

12 3 1 12 1 12 12 12 12 12 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

12 3 1 21.3 1 2 3.

1

1

12 3 12 3 12 3 1 2.3 12 1 1 1 3 3

Spoilers
Plug Flap Slotted

Differential a Horizontal Tails 12 3 Wing Ailerons 1 2 3 123 2 )-I Notes: *In addition to straight-tapered planforms, output also available on non-straight-tapered planforms (e.g., e, :.. delta). Ailerons are identifieo as plain flaps in program. lOF - Internally blown flap EBF - Externally blown flap W Wing HT - Horizontal tail

10

"-1

".

A

•,I

• .. . ."----'•• - -

------/

and pitching-moment t&fects with flap deflection. trimmed stabilizer CL..4 Trim Option Trim data can be calculated at subsonic speeds.0).the dynamic stability this purpose is 2. drag.a. (static Cm tail. and maximum-lift increments along with For translatiag devices drag-polar increments and hinge-moment derivatives. the program provides or control device deflections at zero can also be treated. the incremental effects of high lift The majority of the ')igh-lift-device methods deal with subsonic lift. and hinge moment coefficients. output as a function of angle of atzack consists deflection (or incidence) angle required to trim. CD. Cm. double-slotted. accomplished by executing multiple cases with a variety of panel incidence angles. and total wing-body-tail CL 11 !. Use of experimental data substitution for strongly recommended. treats configurations with a trim control device on the wing or horizontal Output is presented as a function of angle of attack and consists of The second mode treats convenall-movable control deflection angles required to trim and the associated longitudinal aerodynamic characteristics shown in Table 3. control devices include lift. plain. High-Lift and Control Characteristics High-lift devices that can be analyzed by the Datcom methods include jet flaps. ~-- . Control modes employing all-movable wing or tail addressed with the program. 2. . and hinge-moment coefficients.3 estimates. *s i. . CD. This is surfaces can also b. or "flying. the lift-curve slope is a) i computed. The trim option is available in two modes. Control devices. In this case. angle of attack.% 4 4 . moment. fowler. - Digital Datcom manipuOne mode lates computed stability and control characteristics to provide trim output 0. and leading Vdge flaps and slats. such as trailing-edge flap-type controls In general terms. Asymmetrical deflection of wing conRolling trol devices can be anal . General capabilities or trailing-edge symmetrically deflected high-lift devices.ed for rolling and yawing effectiveness. for jet flaps. split. and spoilers.2." tional wing-body-tail configurations where the horizontal-tail is of horizontal-stabilizer untrimmed stabilizer CL. effectiveness may be obta ned for all-movable differentially-deflected horiThe speed regimes where these capabilities exist are shown in Table 3. zontal stabilizers.2. single-slotted.

LOW ASPECT RATIO WINGS/WING BODY COMBINATIONS HYPERSONIC FLAP Moo Me TRANSVERSE JET FIGURE 2 SPECIAL CONFIGURATIONS 12 rm 'I- ~1' .

These include hypersonic flap methods which The flap methods are restricted to Mach are incorported into Digital Datcom. addressed in Table 1. 13 S-- . In addition. and CA and the derivatives CL." Aerodynamic Control at Hypersonic Speeds The USAF Stability and Control Datcom contains some special control methods for high-speed vehicles. the method is invalid for altitudes where mean free paths approach the jet-width dimension.angles of attack between zero and 20 degrees and A two-dimensional flow field is determined and oblique shock relations are used to describe the flow field. Cy .3.2 Digital Datcom output provides longitudinal coefficients CD. 2. assuming that the nozzle is iocated at the aft end of the surface. Body-canard-tail configurations may be trimmed by calculating Treatment of a canard configuration is the stability characteristics at a variety of canard incidence angles and manually calculating the trim data. deflections into the wind. Cm.and CD. numbers greater than 5. and centerof-pressure location. Transverse-Jet Control Effectiveness Datcom provides a procedure for preliminary sizing of a two-dimensional transverse-jet control system in hypersonic flow. A favorable interaction will produce amplification forces that increase control effectiveness. CL. Cm. Data output from the hypersonic control-flap methods are incremental normal.3.1 SPECIAL CONFICURATION DATA capabilities discussed below apply to the three special configura- tions illustrated in Figure 2. 2. The analysis includes the effects of flow separation due to windward flap deflection by providin. CN. C and CL. associated hinge moments. These data are found from the local pressure distributions on the flap and in regions forward of the flap.and axial-force coefficients. The Datcom method is restricted to control jets located on windward Qurfaces in a Mach number range of 2 to 20.3. ..3 Users may specify laminar or turbulent boundary layers. The method evaluates the interaction * of the transverse jet with the local flow field.3 SThe S2. 2. Low-Aspect-Ratio Wings and Wing-Body Combinations Datcom provides methods which apply to lifting reentry vehicles at subsonic speeds. estimates for separation induced-pressures forward of the flap and reattachment on the flap.

2. Reynolds number. and continues for all the flight conditionsi: executed. temperature. The program may loop on speed reference and atmospheric conditions three different ways. and the atmospheric condiThe speed tions as either altitude or freestream pressure and temperature. 2.1 Flight Condition Control Digital Datcom requires Mach number and Reynolds number to define the flight conditions. altitude. the speed reference is referred to as Mach number. o LOOP .I . and continues until each altitude has been selected. at the first Mach number and first altitude. NMACH must equal NALT and NMACH flight conditions are This option should be selected when the Reynolds number is and must be selected when atmospheric conditions are not Vary Mach number at fixed altitude.Vary Mach and altitude together. LOOP . - the input data. With these data. and in Figure 3. conditions must be input for this option and NMACH times MAYLT flight 14 I o _____ ________________________________________________________________ / - . input. o The three options for program loopThe program executes In ing on Mach number riid altitide are listed and discussed below. velocity. number. input. The program executes using tka first altitude and cycles through each Mach mmber in the Atmospheric the second altitude and cycles through each Mach number. The speed referinput as either Mach number or velocity.2 input list. In this discussion. and atmospheric conditions as altitude.4 OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS There are several operational considerations the user needs to understand in order to take maximum advantage of Digital Datcom. ence is This requirement can be satisfied by defining combinations of Mach number.4. the second Mach number reference and atmospheric conditions are then used to calculate Reynolds and second altitude. conditions are executed. as given by the variable LOOP in Figure 3. and pressure and The input options for speed reference and atmospheric condi- tions that satisfy the requirement are given in Figure 3. the minimum jet plenum pressure is then employed to calculate the nozzle throat diameter ana the jet plenum pressure and propellant weight requirements to trim or maneuver the vehicle.The transverse control jet method requires a user-specified time history of local flow parameters and control force required to trim or maneuver.

4 and the hypertonic flag is set (±!ee Figure 3) ever.6 < STMACH < 0.o LWP . methods are valid up to a Mach number of 0.4 H > 1. conditions are executed. Digital Datcom logic determines the configuration being analyzed by identifying the particular Input namelists that are present within a case (see Section 3). and continues until each Mach number has been selected.6 0. The program executes Mach number and cycles through each altitude In the Atmospheric the second Mach number and cycles through each altitude. the range is exceeded.2 Mach Regimes conditions must be Input for this option and NMACH times HALT fligbt Aerodynamic stability methods are defined in Datcon as a function of vehicle configuration and Mach regime.7 or 0.3 . able to be in the range: then defined as followa: Mach Number (M) M < STMACH STMACH < M < TSMACH M > TSMACH H> TSHACH and the hypersonic flag Is set the limits of each variable if 1.Vary altitude at fixed Mach number.2.4. determined according to the following criteria: Mach Number (H) H < 0. 2.4 HM> 1. described in Section 3.40.99. Hach Regime Subsonic Transonic Supersonic Hypersonic The Mach regime is nominally These limits were selected to conform with most Datcom methods.01 < TSHACH < 1. can be reduced using the variable TSMACH.8. some methods are valid for a larger Mach number range. Mach gReime Subsonic Transonic Supersonic Hypersonlc 15 . range: How-- Some subsonic The user has the option to increase the subsonic Mach number limit using the variable STMA1C The program will permit this variable to be in the In the same fashion. the supersonic Mach limit The program will permit this varlThe program will default to The Mach regimes are 0.6 < M < 1. using the first input list.

4 Airfoil Section Module The airfoil section module car. so the user must determine whether the results are applicable Five general characteristics of the module to his particular situation. The airfoil section is assumed to be parallel to the free stream. or hexagonal airfoils).. An airfoil section designation (for NACA. 2.•-2) data. the module computes the airfoil subsonic can be considered accurate Mach number.4. page 4.1. Section mean line and thickness distribution.lts for Mach numbers less than the crest critical crest critical Mach number. For subsonic Hach numbers. insert a Digital Datcom will attempt to execute all cases as input by the user even if errors are detected. In addition a 5Z correlation applied to bring the results section module methods are line with experimental discussed in Appendix B. input airfoil. defined by one of the following methods. 2. namelist termination if it is not found.4. given and any errors are flagged. and checks for legal control cards. Near section characteristics and the re. This module substantially simplifies the user's input preparation.2. 3. ct. Skewed airfoils can be handled by supplying the section coordinates parallel The module will calculate the characteristics if any to the free stream. This module does not "fix up" input errors. oouble wedge. inputs for syntax errors. circular arc An airfoil section is I.1. or The airfoil calculate section module uses Weber's method (RefeLences 2 to 4) to the inviscid aerodynamic char2cter'sticse curve slope. namelist and control cards are described in Section 3. It input daca is checks all namelist checks the The cards for correct numerical namelist name and variable name spelling. Section upper and lower cartesian coordinates.. be used to calculate the required geometric and aerodynamic input parameters for virtually any user defined airfoil section. The airfoil is A viscous correction is applied to the section lift factor (suggested in in Datcom. however. flow mixing due to the upper surface 16 IJ . should be noted: I.3 Input Diagnostics There is an input diagnostic analysis module in Digital Datcom which A listing of scans all all of the input deta cards prior to program execution. It will.

003. Considering that Datcom procedures are preliminary design methods. . the user should insure.shock will make the boundary layer correction invalid. Compressi- The module also computes the required geometric variables at all speeds. o The forward lifting surface is always input as the wing and the aft lifting surface as the horizontal tall. interactions are present such as with supercritical airfoils.4.001. . equals zero data are always supplied. This can be accomplished by supplying section ordinates at nondimensional chord stations (X/C) of 0. Accuracy will also diminish when the maximum airfoil or large viscoun thickness exceeds approximately 12% of the chord. o Twin vertical tail methods are only applicable to lateral stability parameters at subsonic speeds. If input. and 4. 5. These limitations are listed below without extensive discussion. . Operational Limitations Several operational limitations exist in Digital Datcom.5 rately define the airfoil geometry. Therefore. When section cartesian coordinates or mean line and thickness distribution coordinates are specified.0. Mach Because of the nature of the solution. 3. Some pertinent operational techniques are also listed. 17 S- • *• .that the input data contains no unintent~onal fluctuations. The computational algorithm can be sensitive to the "smoothness" of the input coordinates. .002. . This convention is used regardless of the nature of the configuration.or justification. user must specify a zero leading edge radius. and for transonic and supersonic speeds these are the only required inputs. the leading edge radius is not specified in the airfoil section the user must insure that the first and second coordinate For sharp nosed airfoils the points lie on the leading edge radius. it Is at least as important to provide smoothly varying coordinates as it is to accu- 2. bility corrections also become invalid. the user must adequately define the leading edge region to prevent surface curve fits that have an infinite slope. predictions for an airfoil whose maximum camber is greater than 6% of the chord will lose accuracy.

Jet and propeller power effects cannot be applied simultaneously. limitations on the use of a Datcom method has probably been exceeded. to be symmetrical high lift and control The methods are only applicable to the longitudinal stabil- ity parameters at subsonic speeds. the coordinate information will take precedence. "o The program uses the input namelist names to define the configuration components to be synthezized. For example. "o "o Ground effect methods are only applicable to longitudinal stability parameters at subsonic speeds. as shown in Table 2. "o If airfoil sections are simultaneously specified for the same aero- dynamic surface by an NACA designation and by coordinates. or an average for the panel. Shoull Digital Datcom not provide output for those configurations for which output is expected. "o Jet and propeller power effects are only applied to the longitudinal stability parameters at subsonic speeds. the presence of namelist HTPLNF causes Digital Datcom to assume that the configuration has a horizontal tail. the Datcom for method limitations. Only one high lift or control device can be analyzed at a time. In all cases users should consult 18 ."o Airfoil section characteristics are assumed to be constant across the airfoil span. Inboard and outboar-' panels of cranked or double-delta planforms can have their individual panel leading edge radii and maximum thickness ratios specified separately. of nigh lift The and control devices on downwash is not calcu- The effects of multiple devices can be calculated by using data input option to supply the effects of one the incremental the experimental device and allowing Digital Datcom to calculate effects of the second device. "o Jet flaps are considered devices. effect lated.

sibility of input errors and increases the utility of the program as follows: I/ Variables within a namelist may be input in any order. Namelist variables are not restricted to particular card columns.and hypersonic flaps. such as engines. Only required input variables need be included. control tabs. transverse Jet control.1 INPUT TECHNIQUE Two techniques are generally available for introducing input data into a Fortran computer program: namelist and fixed format. Group III inputs specify additional configuration definition. wing and tail surfaces and their relative locations. This input group also defines those "special" configurations that cannot be described using Group II inputs and include low aspect ratio wing and wing-body configurations. or to obtain extra output. o Group IV inputs control the execution of the case. and A variable may be included more than once within a namelist. and allow the user to choose some of the special options.r in complying with the general namelist rules. Digital Datcom employs is the Its use reduces the posthe namelist input technique for input Groups I.SECTION 3 DEFINITION OF INPUTS The Digital Datcom basic input data unit is the "case. Namelist rules used in the program and applicable to CDC and IBH systems are presented in Appendix A. included in Appendix A. The user should adhere to them when preparing To aid the usý. examples of both correct and incorrect namelist coding are 19 . o o Group I inputs define the flight conditions and reference dimensions. II and III since it most convenient and flexible for this application. o defining the body. Group II inputs specify the basic configuration geometry for conventional configurations. o o o o A "case" is a set of input data that defines a configuration and its flight conditions. flaps. but the last value to appear will be used. ground effects or twin vertical panels." The case consists of inputs from up to four data groups. inputs for Digital Datcom. 3. or job for multiple cases.

The user has the option to specify the system of units to be used. Specific input parameters. The J. for(1. Therefore.XXX). To aid the user in reading these figdefines the number zero and the character "0" the inches. and defines For clarity. Table 4 defines the namelists and control cards that can be input to the program. and supporting data are provided throughout the report. English or Metric. seconds. M. denotes units of force.5. Fortran variable names that are implied INTEGERS (name begins with I. Since not all namelist inputs are required to define a particular Tables 5 through 7.I All namelist input variables (and program data blocks) are initialized "UNUSED" used in inputs. or N) are declared REAL and must be specified in either 'E" or "F" mat (X. However.XXXEYY or X. A Deg F t denotes angular measure Rankine or degrees Kelvin. or temperature in degrees 20 - . 2 or centimeters denotes units of area. K. feet. in 2. or cm in degrees. m . the input data. pounds or Newtons denotes units of time. prior to case execution. L. 2 the case control card required to invoke each option. geometric illustrations. Group IV inputs are the "case control cards." a fixed format. the namelist variable description charts which follow have a column titled "Units" using the following nomenclature: t denotes units of length. ft 2 . omission of pertinent input variables may result in the "UNUSED" value to be the "UNUSED" value is often used as a switch for program control. those namelists required for various analyses are summarized in preparing namelist inputs for a specific problem. Tabl8 summarizes the systems available. meters.OE-60 on CDC systems) calculations. so the user should not indiscriminately use dummy the exception of the case termination card) they can be placed in any order or location in Descriptions and limitations of each of the available control cards are discussed in Section 3. Though they are input in since (with their use has the characteristic of a namelist. the character "0" fifteenth letter in the alphabet.- 7 . All Digital Datcom numeric constants require a decimal point. ures. Use of these tables will save time in problem or configuration.

- GROUPIII GROUP IV CONTROL CARD INPUT ADDITIONALISPECIAL CONFIGURATION DEFINITION NAMELIST NAME PROPWR JET PWR GRNDEF TVTPAN SYMFLP ASYFLP LARWB TRNJET HYPEFF CONTAS PAGE DEFINED 49 51 53 55 57 61 63 65 67 69 JOBCONTROL CARDS PAGE CONTROL CARD DEFINED NAME it NAMELIST SAVE DIM NEXT CASE TRIM DAMP NACA CASEID DUMP DERIV PART PAGE DEFINED 33 35 37 37 37 37 39 39 39 39 45 73 73 73 73 73 74 74 75 75 75 77 BUILD PL#T 77 77 21 "U /" .r.r TABLE 4: DIGITAL DATCOM INPUT SUMMARY GROUP I GROUP II NAMELIST INPUT REFERENCE DATA DEFINITION NAMELIST NAME FLTC$N *PTINS PAGE DEFINED 27 29 BASIC CONFIGURATION DEFINITION NAMELIST NAME SYNTHS BODY WGPLNF HTPLNF VTPLNF VFPLNF WGSCHR HTSCHR VTSCHR VFSCHR EXPR .

ii. Ica -l - a IL~' 0 0* ** ** * 0 F z oghZ z w 116 * 00 0J - 00 - 000W0 a oo ac asa 4> a wa i4 aA 3w > a ~ a 4 22 ~ a = . I0 7 a aa.'U 00 0 0 4c 0 x a ro 0. 0 00 ) .

0@ w ca 4 c +jL- 4 Lu 10 La go~~ z Z + a a a 2.3: to + 000+@ + z 0 LL +00 Z U cc z ~ u * -CCO + ala za4 .- -L -I0 j c4 w : 4M 0~ I'M -0 IL w.I 23 .ao j ! . 3 1- -.M > R ! w~t ~ I - .V2 z C3 wL -i ca E L = a caa u a -U -.- I z w. .

SECONO _____________________24 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .I-F-T) CONTROL GEOMETRY SURFACE ROUGHNESS UNITS CARD () RfIUGFC DIM FT DIM IN DIM M DIM CMi FOOT INCH METER CM INCH INCH CM. PER UNIT (DEB) (FIA) _________LENGTH FOOT-POUND0SECOND INCH-POUND-SECOND METER-NEWTON-SECOND CENTIMETER-NEWTON-SECOND lb/ft 2 OR OR OKI/M OK 1/FT 1/FT Ibmn2 N/M2 -N/CM2 1IM THE DEFAULT SYSTEM OF UNITS ISTHE FOOT-POUND. CM PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RYOD NUMBER T P.TABLE 7 REQUIRED NAMELIST FOR ANALYSIS OF SPECIAL CONFIGURATIONS REQUI REI-D- SECIAL .AMELIST FLTCON LARWB TRNJET HYPEFF CONFI:GU RATIO LOW ASPECT RATIO WING &WING BODY (SUBSONIC) FLAT PLATE WITH TRANSVERSE JET (HYPERSONIC) FLAT PLATE WITH 0 - ~ f 00 FLAPCONTROL (HYPERSON IC)- * - TABLE 8 INPUT UNIT OPTIONS UNITS SYSTEM (LENGTH.FORCE-TIMF.

The user may opt to provide Mach number and Reynolds number per unit length for each case to be iomputed. which user compute Reynolds number for each Mach number and altitude combination he desires to run. temperature inputs. Mach numbers (or velocities) and altitudes for each case and program computations will employ the atmosphere model to determine pressure. These parameters are of particular interest when using the The trim flight conditions are output as an Trim Option (Section 3.3.5).404 However. Also incorporated is temperature by the user. Reynolds number and other required parameters to support method applications.2 CROUP I INPUT DATA Namelist input data to define the case flight conditions and reference dimensions ar4 shown in Figures 3 and 4. temperature. card is used. from -16. or varing speed and altitude together. variables RNNUB and MACH. the provision for optional inputs of pressure and The program will override the standard atmosphere and compute flow condition parameters consistent with the pressure and This option will permit Digital Datcom applications such as wind tunnel model analyses at test section conditions. at fixed Mach number (or velocity) at varying altitudes. Nondimensional aerodynamic coefficients generated by Digital Datcom may be based on user-specified reference area and lengths. defines the case flight conditions. input preparation requires that the the program has a standard atmosphere model.296. The five input combinations which will satisfy the Mach number and Reynolds number requirements are summarized in Figure 3.588 feet. j Namelist FLTCON. Other optional inputs include vehicle weight and flight path angle ("WT" and "GAMMA*). that can be used to eliminate the The user may specify Reynolds number input requirement and provides the user the option to employ Mach number or velocity as the flight speed reference. accurately simulates the 1962 Standard Atmosphere for geometric altitudes feet to 2. In this case. Use of the variable LOOP enables the user to run cases at fixed altitude with varying Mach number (or velocity). These reference 25 o-" / . Figure 3. If the NACA control the Reynolds number and Mach number must be defined using the additional line of output with the trim data and the steady flight lift coefficient is output with the untrimmed data.

This wing area includes the fuselage area subtended by the edtension of the wing leading and trailing edges to the body center line. The output format generally provides at least three significant digits the solution when user specified reference parameters are of the same in If the user speciorder of magnitude as the default reference parameters.eter for the longitudinal and lateral reference lengths. some output data can overflow the output rare instances andr would This may happen in require readjustment of the reference parameters. The longitudinal reference length. if not specified in OPTINS. 26 . If the reference area is is set equal to the theoretical planform area of the wing. is set equal to the theoretical wing mean aerodynamic chord. fies reference parameters that are orders of magnitude different from the wing area or aerodynamic chord. not specified. cross-sectional area be used for the reference area and body maximum diar. the wing span when it The lateral reference length is set equal to OPTINS must be specified. for bodyis not user specified. format or print only zeros. it Figure 4.parameters are input via namelist OPTINS. Reference parameters contained in alone configurations since the default reference parameters are based on wing It is suggested that values near the magnitude of body maximum geometry.

DEFAULT TO 1. MAXIMUM OF 20 VALUES OF ANGLES OF ATTACK.. . MAXIMUM OF 20 VALUES OF GEOMETRIC ALTITUDES VALUES OF FREESTREAM STATIC PRESSURE VALUES OF FREESTREAM TEMPERATURE •.6 '<STMACH 40. VEHICLE WEIGHT FLIGHT PATH ANGLE PROGRAM LOOPING CONTROL "" VARY ALTITUDE AND MACH TOGETHER. DEFAULT a 1.4 IF NOT INPUT DRAG DUE TO UFT TRANSITION FLAG.0. ALT&t PIMF TINF ..i HYPERS STMACH 20 20 20 20 - ASCENDING ORDER REYNOLDS NUMBER PER UNIT LENGTHpV/U NUMBER OF ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS TO BE RUN.4). TABULATED IN NT UITS 20 20 20 I /t - DEG RNNUB4& NALT.BODY CONFIGURATIONS .8 IF NOT INPUT LOWER LIMIT OF MACH NUMBERS FOR SUPERSONIC ANALYSIS (1.dALE FLIGHT. MAXIMUM OF 20 VALUES OF FREESTREAM MACH NUMBER VALUES OF FREESTREAM SPEED NUMBER OF ANGLES OF ATTACK TO BE RUN.TRUE. F/A DEG TSMACH TR W GAMMA LOP &-- - _ F DEG FIGURE 3 INPUT FOR NAMELIST FLTC0N .FLIGHT CONDITIONS /2 / 27/- S•/ 1 .NAMELIST FLTCON VARIABLE NAME NMACH MACH VINF NALPHA ALSCHO ARRAY DIMENSION - DFNTO DEFINITION NUMBER OF MACH NUMBERS OR VELOCITIES TO BE RUN.4 UPPER LIMIT OF MACH NUMBERS FOR SUBSONIC ANALYSIS (0.0 FOR NO TRANSITION.0 FOR TRANSITION STRIPS OR FUL.01 4TSMACH 4 1. HYPERSONIC ANALYSIS AT ALL MACH NUMBERS •1. AT FIXED ALTITUDE a 3 VARY ALTITUDE. DEFAULT TO 0. DEFAULT 1 m2 VARY MACH.9U). FOR REGRESSION ANALYSIS OF WING . AT FIXED MACH h -' .

INPUT OPTIONS TO SATISFY THE MACH NUMBER,& AND REYNOLIJS NUMBER INPUT REQUIREMENTS USER INPUT PROGRAM COMPUTES,&

i MACH, RNNUB
MACH, ALT VINF, ALT PINF, TINF, VINF PINF, TINF, MACH PINF, TINF, RNNUB PINF. TINF, MACH, RNNUB RNNUB, MACH RNNUB, VINF

A REQUIRED FOR TRANSVERSE-JET CONTROL
EACH ARRAY ELEMENT MUST CORRESPOND TO THE RESPECTIVE MACH NUMBER/FREESTREAM SPEED INPUT. USE LOO*P - 1. UNITS ARE EITHER I/FT OR IIM AS DEFINED IN TABLE 8 A\REQUIRED WHEN USING THE NACA CONTROL CARD USER INPUTS FOR THESE VARIABLES WILL TAKE PRECEDENCE SATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS ARE INPUT AS EITHER ALTITUDE OR PRESSURE AND ,SEE TEMPERATURE SECTION 2.4.1, AND EXAMPLE PROBLEM 2 IN SECTION 7

/,

V

NAMELIST OPTINS

VARIABLE NAME

ARRAY DIMENSION

DEFINITION

UNITS

ROUGFC

SREF CBARR
-

BLREF

-

SURFACE ROUGHNESS FACTOR, EGUIVALENT SAND ROUGHNESS. DEFAULT TO 0.16 X 10- 3 INCHES, OR 0.406 X 10-3 cm, IF NOT INPUT REFERENCE AREA. VALUE OF THEORETICAL WING AREA USED BY PROGRAM IF NOT INPUT LONGITUDINAL REFERENCE LENGTH VALUE OF THEORETICAL WING MEAN AERODYNAMIC CHORD USED BY PROGRAM IF NOT INPUT LATERAL REFERENCE LENGTH VALUE OF WING SPAN USED BY PROGRAM IF NOT INPUT

P
A

I I

"*UNITSARE EITHER INCHES OR

CENTIMETERS AS DEFINED IN TABLE 8

ROUGHNESS FACTORS FOR USE INNAMELIST #PTINS TYPE OF SURFACE AERODYNAMICALLY SMOOTH POLISHED METAL OR WOOD EaUIVALENT SAND ROUGHNESS INCHES cm 0 0.02 - &08X 10-

6
3

0.0s1 - 0.203 X 10- 3

NATURAL SHEET METAL
SMOOTH MATTE PAINT, CAREFULLY APPLIED STANDARD CAMOUFLAGE PAINT, AVERAGE APPLICATION CAMOUFLAGE PAINT, MASS-POODUCTION SPRAY DIP-GALVANIZED METAL SURFACE NATURAL SURFACE OF CAST IRON

0.16 X 10-3
0.25 X 10-3 0.40 X 10- 3 1.20 X 10- 1 a X 11-3 10X 10-3

0.406 X19-3
0A36 X 10-3 1.011 X 1i-3 3.04 x 1@-34 15.240 X 10-3 25400 X 0"-3

FIGURE 4 INPUTFOR NAMELIST OPTINS - REFERENCE PARAMETERS

29

F~

:

J
3.3 GROUP II INPUT DATA shown in Figures Those "special" configurations (Figure 2) are defined using Namelist data to define basic configu-ation geometry is 5 through 8. Group III namelists. The namelist SYNTHS defines the basic configuration synthesis parameters. The user has the option to apply a scale factor to his geometry which permits full scale configuration dimensions to ie input for an analysis of a wind tunnel model. The program will use the scale factor to scale the input The variable used is "SCALE." defined using the namelist BODY (Figure 6). or data to model dimensions.

The body configuration is methods for body r.', Joergensen's method, attack. Cm

The variable METHOD enables the user to select either the traditional Datcom and CD at low angles of attack (default), which is applicable from zero to 180 degrees angle of

Joergensen's method can be used by selecting "METHOD-2" subsonically Users are encouraged to consult the Datcom for details Digital Datcom will accept an arbitrary origin for

or supersonically.

concerning these methods. at the fuselage nose.

the body coordinate system, i.e., body station "zero" is not required to be The planform geometry of each of the cerodynamic surfaces are input using the namelists WGPLNF, HTPLNF, VTPLNF and VFPLNF shown in Figure 7. HTSCHR, VTSCUJ The section aerodynamic characteristics for these surfaces are input using either the section characteristics namelists WGSCHR, (Figure 8) and VFSCHR Airfoil and/or the NACA control card discussed in Section 3.5.

characteristics are assumed constant for each panel of the planform. The USAF Datcom contains three methods for the computation of forward lifting surface downwash field effects on aft lifting surface aerodynamics. They are given in detail in Section 4.4 of Datcom, and their regimes of primary applicability are summarized in Figure 9. Figure 9. Method I is The user is cautioned not to apply the empirically brnsed subsonic Method 2 outside the bounds listed in recommended as an optional approach for the bw/bh By default, Digital Datcom selects Method 3 for bw/bh namelist WGSCHR, the user has the option of regime of 1.0 to 1.5.

less than 1.5 and Method I for span ratios greater than or equal tn 1.54 Using the variable DWASH in applying Method I or 2. and span ratios of 1.25 to 3.6. Method 2 is applicable at subsonic Mach numbers

31

I"

Aspect ratio classification is tapered wing solutions

required to employ the Datcom straight

for wing or tail lift in the subsonic and transonic The

Mach regimes.

Classification of lifting surface aspect ratio as either high which depends upon planform It also notes an overlap

or low results in the selection of appropriate methods for computation. USAF Datcom uses a classification parameter, taper ratio and leading edge sweep (Table 9).

regime where the user may employ either the low or high aspect ratio methods. Digital Datcom allows the user to specify the aspect ratio method to be used in this overlap regime using the parameter ARCL in the section namelists. High aspect ratio methods are automatically selected for unswept, untapered uings with aspect ratios of 3.5 or more if ARCL is not input. Transonically, panel lift several parameters need to be defined to obtain the Those.required variables are summarized in intermediate data may be available, for characteristics.

Figures 10 end 11 and are input using the experimental data substitution namelist EXPRnn. Additionally, example CtICL which requires experimental data to complete. experimental data input namelist EXPRnn, By use of the

data can be made available to

complete these second-level computations, as shown in Figure 10. The namelist EXPRnn can also be used to substitute selected configuration data with known test results for some Datcom method output and build a new configuration based on existing data. This option is most useful for theoretically expanding a wind tunnel test data base for analysis of nontested configurations.

___________________
32

NAMELIST SYNTHS

FORWARD HORIZONTAL LIFTING SURFACE MUST BE DESIGNATED AS AWING IN INPUT I I... .

ORIGIN FOR WING ALONE CONFIGURATIONS MAY BE ANY ARBITRARY REFERENCE POINT.

Lj\REGUIRED ONLY FOR ALL-MOVABLE HORIZONTAL TAIL TRIM OPTION. .4NIF HINAX ISINPUT. XH AND ZH ARE EVALUATED AT ZERO INCIDENCE (iw=O)
ENGINEERING VARIABLE ARRAY SYMBOL NAME DIMENSION DEFINITION UNITS

"XC,
c xw zW iW /•xH ,L•zH iH xV

XCG ZCG XW ZW ALIW XH ZH ALIH
XV

-

LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF CG. (MOMENT REI':. CENTER) VERTICAL LOCATION OF CG RELATIVE TO REFERENCE PLANE LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL WING APEX VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL WING APEX RELATIVE TO
REFERENCE PLANE

,I JI

-

WING ROOT CHORD INCIDENCE ANGLE MEASURED FROM
REFERENCE PLANE DEG I REFERENCE PLANE

LONGITUDINA•L LOCATION OF THEORETICAL HORIZONTAL TAIL
APEX

-

VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL HORIZONTAL TAIL APEX

SRELATIVE TO
-

I
DEG

HORIZONTAL TAIL ROOT CHORD INCIDENCE ANGLE MEASURED
FROM REFERENCE PLANE LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF THEORETI.,AL VERTIC/i.L TAIL APEX

-

I

xVF
zV

ZVF

XVF ZV ZVF SCALE VERTUP

S,X HG

HINAX

-

LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL VENTRAL FIN APEX VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEO RETICAL VERTICAL TAIL APEX VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL VENTRAL TAIL APEX VEHICLE SCALE FACTOR (MULTIPLIER TO INPUT DIMENSIONS) VERTUP •.TRUE. VERTICAL PANEL ABOVE REF PLANE (DEFAI2LT) VERTUP • .FALSE. VERTICAL PANEL BLEOW REF PLANELONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF HORIZONTAL
TAIL HINGE AXIS
-

I ft
-

ft SYNTHESIS PARAMETERS

FIGURE 5 INPUT FOR NAMELIST SYNTHS
e,

S~33

NAMELIST BODY

(-

N

-

IA.

-

-

'ST

_

POSSIBLE SUPERSONIC AND HYPERSONIIC BODY CONFIGURATIONS 'N IA- 0-0 dN I d - d2NOTES: < NOSE AND TAIL SEGMENTS MAY SE CONICAL (AS SHOWN) OR OGIVAL DIAMETERS dNAdl. AND d2 ARE COMPUTED FROM LINEAR INTERPOLATION OF AINPUTS xi VS R El

NOSE

dl -d 2

'N > :NOSE-AFTER BODY-TAIL I BT dN

'N 'ST dN-dl

FIGURE 6 INPUT FOR NAMELIST BODY

-

BODY GEOMETRIC DATA

35

--- NOTE: Z 0 ON DESIRE 0ODY CENTER-LINE REFERENCE PLANE .WHICHEVER ISTHE LARGEST RING IL VARIABLE NAME NX X 4 S 4 P 4R** itZU & ZL BNOSE BTAIL ARRAY DIMENSION - DEFINITION NUMBER OF LONGITUDINAL BODY STATIONS AT WHICH DATA IS SPECIFIED.0 FOR NOSE ALONE OR NOSE-TAIL CONFIGURATIONS NOSE BLUNTNESS DIAMETER.0 CONICAL NOSE. MAXIMUM OF 20. LONGITUDINAL DISTANCE MEASURED FROM ARBITRARY LOCN CROSS SECTIONAL AREA AT STATION xi PERIPHERY AT STATION xi PLANFORM HALF WIDTH AT STATION xi z .SWEPT WING. NO AREA RULE .LOCAL PLAN FORM HALF WIDTH. REQ '-•/S/ & al.2. STALL .0 CONICAL TAIL. R.1.0 OGIVE NOSE STAIL " 1.// .3. NO AREA RULE UNITS - 20 20 20 20 20 20 - I A I - BLN BLA us ITYPE* - I I a 2.AXIS OF SYMMETRY FOR AXISYMMETRIC BODIES RLY REQUIRED FOR suBsONIc ASYMMETRIC BODIES 3T REQUIRED INSUBSONIC SPEED REGIME fPERSONIC SPEED REGIME ONLY ILY ONE VARIABLE IS REQUIRED IF ONE VARIBLE IS INPUT THE OTHER TWO ARE COMPUTED FROM IT.. ZERO FOR SHARP NOSEBODIES 1.SWEPT WING./S'/" 2 PAND R INPUT.Z-COORDINATE AT LOWER BODY SURFACE AT STATION xi (NEGATIVE WHEN BELOW CENTERLINE) BNOSE w1. r xi !' N-J A I LOCAL PERIPHERY.3. AREA RULE SET TO 2.0 IF NOT INPUT METHOD - . USE EXISTING METHODS (DEFAULT) .s 'A-. DATCOM FIGURE 4.0 LENGTH OF BODY NOSE LENGTH OF CYLINDRICAL AFTERBODY SEGMENT A " 0.2.V/'iOR INPUT R. P = 27rR WHERE R . S wrR SAND RINPUT.Z-COORDINATE AT UPPER BODY SURFACE AT STATION xi (POSITIVE WHEN ABOVE CENTERLINE) z.ASSUMING A CIRCULAR CROS-SECTION IF TWO VARIABLES ARE INPUT.2. USE JORGENSEN METHOD I IN CALCULATION OF TRANSONIC DRAG DIVERGENCE MACH NUMBER. BNOSE . STRAIGHT WING.1-19 EQUIVALENT RADIUS AT TRANSONIC AND SUPERSONIC MACH NUMBER.5.0 OGIVE TAIL OMIT FORIBT . PA N . THE THIRD ISCALCULATED AS FOLLGWS: S AND P INPUT.

NAMELISTS WGPLNF. VTPLNF. AND VFPLNF FRONTU VIE r Ith -/2 %:b r INKI0 11-012 0 FRN.1E H~rnONTATAILEXPOSED ROOT CODI SNH FGrE7IPTORNELSWPNF CHORDN OTLF ADVPN Ax L HVARIZNABLES SIN-1 1 I 37 VIE I_______________ . HTPLNF.

/
/
INDICATES EXPOSED PARAMETER INPUTS NOT REQUIRED FOR STRAIGHT TAPERED PLANFORM ONLY REQUIRED FOR SUPERSONIC AND HYPEhSONIC SPEED REGIMES. ONE VALUE REQUIRED FOR EACH MACH NO. VALUES MUST CORRESPOND TO MACH ARRAY. IF NOT INPUT, PROGRAM WILL ATTEMPT TO CALCULATE. ZTA FOR V7PLNF VFPLNF ENGINEERING SYMBOL ct 0 1 1. • 0 • 1 0 0 0 VARIABLE NAME CHRDTP ARRAY DIM-N$10N -

DEFINITION TIPCHORD SEMI-SPAN OUTBOARD PANEL SEMI-SPAN EXPOSED PANEL SEMI-SPAN THEORETICAL PANEL FROM THEORETICAL ROOT CHORD CHORD ATBREAKPOINT ROOTCHORD INBOARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE OUTBOARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE REFERENCE CHORD STATION FOR INBOARD AND OUTBOARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLES. FRACTION OF CHORD TWIST ANGLE, NEGATIVE LEADING EDGE ROTATED DOWN (FROM EXPOSED ROOT TO TIP) SEMI-SPAN OF OUTBOARD PANEL WITH DIHEDRAL DIHEDRAL ANGLE OF INBOARD PANEL (IF]r %1ONLY INPUTni DIHEDRAL ANGLE OF OUTBOARD PANEL - 1.0 STRAIGHTTAPERED PLANFORM - 2.0 DOUBLE DELTA PLANFORM (ASPECT RATIO 43) - 3.0 CRANKED PLANFORM (ASPECT RATIO >3) PORTION OF FUSELAGE SIDE AREA THAT LIES BETWEEN MACH LINES ORIGINATING FROM LEADING AND TRAIUNG EDGES OF HORIZONTAL TAIL EXPOSED ROOT CHORD PORTION OF EXTENDED FUSELAGE SIDE AREA THAT LIES BETWEEN MACH LINES ORIGINATING FROM LEADING AND TRAILING EDGES OF HORIZONTAL TAIL EXPOSED ROOT CHORD Sext-SH +243 LONGITUDIPIL DISTANCE BETWEEN CG AND CENTROID OF SH(lla, POSITIVE AFT OF CG PORTION OF EXPOSED VERTICAL PANEL AREA THAT UES BETWEEN MACH LINES EMANATING FROM LEADING AND TRAILING EDGES OF WING EXPOSED ROOT CHORD AREA OF EXPOSED VERTICAL PANEL NOT INFLUENCED BYWING OR HORIZONTAL TAIL PORTION OF EXPOSED VERTICAL PANEL AREA THAT LIES BETWEEN MACH LINES EMANATING FROM LEADING AND TRAILING EDGES OF HORIZONTAL TAIL EXPOSED ROOT CHORD

UNITS

4
-!

1|

b#0/2 sN#P b*12 SSPNE b/2 SSPN %•CHROBP i cr CHROR (AX/c)i SAVSI (A•x/d), &SAVSo x/c CHSTAT e TWISTA

, DEl DES
-

DEG

"
*

(b/2)1;

r

SSPNOD OHOADI D. OHOAD4 TYPE

-

£
DEG DEG

*

0

-

SH1Gs

/,

SHIl

20

A

Sext

SEXT

20

A

l
* sV(WB)

/

RLPH SVWB

20 20

4,

A

* *

SV(B)
SV(HB)

h SVB & SVHB

20 20-

A A

I

-m

NAMELISTS WGSCHR, HTSCHR, VTSCHR AND VFSCHR

INPUTS FOR NAMEUST ENGINEERING VARIABLE ARRAt E

INPUTS PER SPEED REGIME

INPUTS FOR NAMELIST ENGINEERING

"")

U.
Li cc

SYMBOL

NAME

OIMENSIC'DENTN0
6n L

(aa

Z u

Z

"WT

.

SYMBOL
SYMBO

t/c

TOVC OELTAY

-

-

(x/c)MAX

XOVC

-

MAXIMUM AIRFOIL SECTION THICKNESS, FRACTION OF CHORD DIFFERENCE BETWEEN AIRFOIL ORDINATES AT 3.0ANO.15% CHORD, PERCENT CHORD CHORD LOCATION OF MAXIMUM AIRFOILTHICKNESS, FRACTION OF CHORD AIRFOIL SECTION DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT ANGLE OF ATTACK AT SECTION DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT, DEG AIRFOIL SECTION LIFT CURVE PER DEG.
-

*
t a

**
0
a a

XKlC

U

a
-

* *

Cli ai

CLI I ALPHAI

-

*

*

-),

*

0 CLd

SCLALPAz\

20

S~dý SLOPEdC
Clmax CLMAX/ CMO OR CMO LERI
_ _ __FRACTION _
-

20 -

* *

* *
*

Cmo (RLE)i ,__ (RLE)o * *

LER0• CAMBER-TRUE TOVCO

AIRFOIL SECTION MAX1MUM COEFFICIENT SECTION ZERO LIFT PITCHING I fOMENTCOEFFICIENT AIRFOIL LEADING EDGE RADIUS OF CHORD RLE FRACTION OF CHORD FOR OUTBOARD PANEL

-

*0LIFT

,

-

--

-

-

-

A

*
*

a

0

(t/co (Cmo) 0

'

* *
*

*

(x/C)MAXo
(CIMAXIM.0 (Ci)M=o

XoVC-o_.N 0
OR/3 CLMAXL M__ CLAMO OR CLAMO TF

-

CAMBERED AIRFOIL SECTION FLAG tc FOR OUTBOARD PANEL

a

* *

0 1

XcC

I(xlc)MAX FOR OUTBOARD PANEL
Cmo FOR OUTBOARD PANEL AIRFOIL MAXIMUM LIFT COEFFICIENT AT MACH EQUAL ZERO

0 0

0
o

0
-

*
aI

".

@00
U YL/C U 0 0 0

-

-

AIRFOIL SECTION LIFT CURVE SLOPE AT MACH EQUAL ZERO, _PER DEG PLANFORM EFFECTIVE THICKNESS RATIO. FRACTION OFCHORD

(t/c)eff 0 0

-

KKSHARP
0
__ _

-

WAVE-DRAG FACTOR FOR SHARPNOSED AIRFOIL SECTION, NOT INPUT FOR ROUND NOSED AIRFOILS AIRFOIL SURFACE SLOPE AT 0,20,40 60, 80, AND 100% CHORD, DEG. POSITIVE WHEN THE TANGENT INTERSECTS THE CHORD PLANE FORWARD OF THE REFERENCE CHORD POINT ASPECT RATIO CLASSIFICATION (SEE TABLE9) ( 0 U
--

YmUC •@ • tcJC

6n

SLOPE

6

*
____

U

0
t001

S

5

SARC[

i

0 REQUIRED INPUT

FIGURE 8 INPUT FOR NAMELISTS WGSCHR, HTSCHR, VTSCHR AND VF--CHR - SECTION CHARACTERISTICS

o OPTIONAL INPUT

0= REQUIRED INPUT. USER St
O OPTIONAL INPUT, COMPUT

i

i,, •

3,

-

_______________WAVE-DRAG

FACTORS FOR SHARP

PER INPUTS

NOSE AIRFOILS

REGIME SPEED
i VARIABLE

BSCWN SCTONKSHARP AIROI
AIRFOIL___SECTION

SECTION

ARRAY

NAME

DIMENSION

DEFiNITION

2.

2 0BICONVEX

1 16

XAC44&

20

-a

SECTION AERODYNAMIC CENTER, FRACTION OF CHORD (SEE VOL 11 FOR DEFAULT) SUBSONIC DOWNWASH METHOD FLAG
, I. USE DATCOM METHOD 2

-

0

0

OULEEDE -

I

c(c-x2)
-

, 1.USEDATCOM METHOD IHrYAC-ONAL
USE DATCOM METHOD 31. SUPERSONIC. USE DATCOM METHOD 2tIF OWASH - I OR 2 FIGURE 9) _____(SEE AIRFOIL MAXIMUM CAMBER, FRACTION -c
-

x I x3

4-

-3

3.

0

0______

-

-

io

TIEFF - PLANFORM EFFECTIVE THICKNESS RATIO. ROR STRAIGHT TAPERED PLANFORMS.TCEFF- TOVC. FOR NONSTRAIGHT PLANFORMS:
1 fo ot c

____________OF

CHORD

C a L /I,

CONICAL CAMBER DESIGN LIFT
COEFFICIENT FOR M 1.0 DESIGN.
-

-

--

bI2

~ i
jo

*

0

0

TCEF

TYPEIN

TYPE OF AIRFOIL SECTION COORDINATES INPUT FOR AIRFOIL SECTION MODULE , 1.0 UPPER AND LDWER SURFACE COORDINATES IYUPPER AND YLOWER)

-cdy

0 0 0 o0

t1
c(Ldy

* 2.0 MEAN LINE AND THICKNESS DIS.
TRIBUTION (MEAN AND THICK)
----

*1112c

=oc

NIFTS
_____MAX..S

-

NUMBER OF SECTION POINTS INPUT.
ABSCISSAS OF INPUT POINTS. TYPEIN - 1.0 OR 2.0. XCORO(1) - 0.0
- 1.0 REQUIRED----

ooooI
+ 0 0 0 0

L2000

i
CO 77

XCiRD
_________

50 50

TIKYPE

_______XCORD(NPTS)

YUPPER

ORDINATES OF UPPER SURFACE. TYPEIN -1.0 FRACTION OF CHORD. AND REQUIRES YUIPPERM1 - 0.0
- 0.0

0

0 0

0

E

_________

_______YUPPER(NPTS)

YLOWER

50

__________YLOWER(NPTS)

MEAN

50

_______MIEAN(NPTS)

THICK

50

ORDINATES OF LOWER SURFACE, TYPEIN - 1.0 0 C. 0 0 FRACTION OF CHORD. AND REQUIRES YLOWIERM1 - 0.0 - 0.0 ORDINATES OF MEAN LINE, TYPEIN -"2.0 0 0 00 FRACTION OF CHORD. AND REQUIRES MEAJ4W- 0.0 -0.0 THICKNESS DISTRIBUTION. TYPEIN - 2.0 FRACTION OF CHORD, AND REQUIRES 0000 THICK()- 0.0 THICK(NPTS) - 0.0
_______________________USING _______________________
-

SEE OATCDM SECTIONS 4.3.21 AND 4.23. (LINEAR REGRESSION METHODS) IF SET LESS THAN ZERO WILL BYPASS THE REGRESSION METHODS 1 INPUT ONLY FOR CONFIGURATIONS WITH AHORIZONTAL TAIL NOT REQUIRED FOR STRAIGHT TAPERED PLANFORMIS AR RAY ELEMENTS MUST CORRIESPOND TO THE MACNORN VINIF ARRAY (NAMELIS1T FLTCONI LARRAY ELEMENTS MUST CORRESPOND!TO THEXCORD ARRAY ONLY CALCULATED FOR SUPERSONIC AIRFOILS
& NACA CARD.

SEE SECTION 8.3.2 FOR INPUT RECOMMENDATIONS

WWPLIED OR CO PUTED BY AIRFOIL SECTION MODULE IFAIRFOIL DEFINED WITH NACA CARD OR SECTION COORDINATES CINMODULE IFAIRFOIL DEFINED WITH NACA CARD OR SECTION COORDINATES TED BY AIFI

TABLE 9 ASPECT RATIO CLASSIFICATION "ARCL" SORDER-UINE RANGE: 3 (C +1)COS ALE
A<

4

~

(C +1)COS ALE

'ARCL" CAN BE SET INNAMELISTS WGSCHR, HTSCHR, VTSCHR AND VFSCHR TO SELECT EITHER LOW OR HIGH ASPECT RATIO METHODS. WHEN "ARCL" IS NOT SET. AND -A- ISIN THE BOROER.LINE RANGE, THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA ARE USED: A < (C 1 35"LOW 1) COS A L " ASPECT RATIO"

A A ~ 1 1HIGH A LE (C+ ) i COS

ASPECT RATIO' SEE DATCOM SECTION 4.1.3.3

METHOD 2 (EMPIRICAL METHOD) 1.25<b

bwbw<.

KaHUUJ3

CANARD METHOD)

________

METHOD IN RANGE 1.0 <bw/bb <1.5 CAN BE SELECTED USING VARIABLE 'OWASHW IN NAMELIST WGSCHR

FIGURE 9 PRIMARY APPLICATION REGIMES FOR Sth3SONIC DOWNWASH METHODS IN DATCOM

41

!-

DEFINING THE TRANSONIC WING AND HORIZONTAL TAIL UFT CURVE

CLUAX

NON-LINEAR LIFT REGION

aMAX
d1ANGLE OF ATTACK

NOTES: 1. IF aoANO a ARE INPUT USING EXPR THE LINEAR LIFT REGION ISDEFINED.
-

2. IF aCLMAX ANO CLMAX ARE ALSO INPUT USING EXPR
IS DEFINED.

THE COMPLETE LIFT CURVE

3. IF THE COMPLETE LIFT CURVES FOR THE WING AND HORIZONTAL TAIL ARE DEFINED AND BOTH SURFACES HAVE STRAIGHT TAPERED PLANFORMS. ALL DATA DESIGNATED IN TABL" 2 THAT REQUIRE EXPERIMENTAL DATA INPUT ARE CALCULATED. 4. IF THE BODY LIFT CURVE IS INPUT AT TRANSONIC MACH NUMBERS, CONFIGURATION DATA INVOLVING THE BODY ARE SIGNIFICANTLY IMPROVED.

FIGURE 10 TRANSONIC EXPERIMENTAL DATA SUBSTITUTION

43/
63IVA

TRANSONIC DATA AVAILABLE wrTH EXPERIMENTAL DATA SUBSTITUTION

GIVEN

DATA CALCULATED VERT. Coo

"NONE

WIH-B

*CL
CL
&

W-S-H. W-S-V. & W-V -V COO
WING CL VS a WING C0. CN. CA. CIO

W4

CO- CN CA.-CI

W4V CO.CL.CN. CA

HORZ. CL VS

£

HORIZ. lpf :*CA.cf HCo.C. CA. CIO
CLCN,CA

BODY CL VS WI- CLVSa

•-V

HORIZ. CL & CD V$a

W-4-T CO

vs VS.& a
.. ° /

W-S'

CL VS
CL VS W.--T CL

"NORIZ.
qq

e, & deda VS a

--

"

-~

/
\ / !I

I PER DEGREE HORIZONTAL TAIL PITCHING MOMENT SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK.3 - "• ( /• ACLUW : - - L()ALPOH • ALPLH j (. .UFT. IN 3 EACH EXPERIMENTAL DATA NAMELIST REPRESENTS DATA FOR ONE MACU NUMBER.. ALL SIX CHARACTERS U THE NAMEUST NAME MST BE SPECIEu.)B " VARIABLE NAME CLAD CRAB COB ARRAY DIMENSION 20 20 20 BODY UFT CURVE SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK.) (CI IW (%)H (C)H (CO) (CL)H (C) 1%) (C) weCLAWB (C. PER DEGREE BODY PITCHING MOMENT SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK. PER DEGREE WING PITCHING MOMENT SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK. PER DEGREE WING-BODY DRAG COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK WING-BODY LIFT COEFFICIENT VSANGLE OF ATTACK WING-BODY PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK DOWNWASH GRADIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK DOWNWASH VSANGLE OF ATTACK. FIGURE 3.EXPERIMENTAL DATA INPUT 45 -z* * . DEG HORIZONTAL TAIL ANGLE OF ATTACK WHERE LIFT BECOMES NON-INUEAR.)W8 (CD)wW (CL)wB (iClo " qg/. EXPRO2 11E SECOND. . DEG WING ANGLE OF ATTACK WHERE LIFT BECOMES NOLI.UEAR. PER DEGREE BODY DRAG COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK DEFINITION "I (CjB (C. DEG HORIZONTAL TAIL ANGLE OF ATTACK FOR MAX.. EXPFS THE FiFTEENTH.) (CLaN. ETC. PER DEGREE WING DRAG COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK WING LIFT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF AiTACK WING PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK HORIZONTAL TAIL UFT CURVE SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK. NOTE: I A i ACLIMI CLU EXPERIMENTAL DATA PARAMETERS MUST BE BASED ON THE REFERENCE AREA AND LEXGTHS AS USED BY DIGITAL DATCOIL SEE FIGURE 4 FOR DEFINITION OF DIGITAL DATCOU REFERENCE PARAMETERS. DEu HORIZONTAL TAIL MAX.. DEGREES ANGLE RATIO OF HORIZONTAL TAIL DYNAMIC PRESSURE. UFT. ) (C.)w (CL.• ~ALPLW IAX. UFT COEFFICIENT (C. NAMIEUST EXPRO1 PROVIDES EXPERIMENTAL DATA FOR THE FIRST MACN NUMBEP. PER DEGREE WING-BODY PITCHING MOMENT SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK. THE USE OF THESE PARAMETERS ISSHOWN FIGURE 9.CL.)B CLB CMB CLAW CRAW COW CLW CU CLAN CUAN CON CLN COII CDV CMAWB CDWB CLWB CoWs DEODA EPSL*N IQQINF ALP" 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 - BODY UIFT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK BODY PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK WING LIFT CURVE SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK.NAMELIST EXPR ENGINEERING SYMBOL (. FIGURE 11 INPUT FOR NAMELIST EXPRnn. REQUIRED TO SUPPORT TRANSONIC SECOND LEVEL IiETHOK USED OPLY AT TRANSONIC MCH NUMBERS. PER DEGREE HORIZONTAL TAIL DRAG COEFFICIENT l'S ANGLE OF ATTACK HORIZONTAL TAIL UFT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK HORIZONTAL TAIL PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT VS ANGLE OF ATTACK VERTICAL TAIL ZERO LIFT DRAG COEFFICIENT WING-BODY LIFT CURVE SLOPE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK.TO THE FREE STREAM VALUE VS ANGLE OF ATTACK WING ZERO ULFT ANGLE OF ATTACK. DEG WING ANGLE OF ATTACK FOR MAX. UFT COEFFICIENT HORIZONTAL TAIL ZERO LIFT ANGLE OF ATTACK. THE LAST T!O DIGITS OF THE NAMEUST NAME CORRESPONDS TO THE MACH NUMBER SEQUENCE INNAMEIUST FLTCOA. DEG WING MAX.

GRNDEF. on the horizontal and a vertical tail specified. or 4. the eight flap types defined using SYMFLP (variable surface. defined by namelist TVTPAN. and TableSti•vthrough TVTPAN. 2. the mutual interference among the panels is not computed. For ASYFLP namelist inputs. optionally..! . Twin vertical panels. (STYPE of 1. FTYPE) In general. e•" . power effects are made through The number of engines allowable The inputs for propellor power or jet namelists is PROPWR and JETPWE. nal characteristics present are not calculated. will always be located on the wing. incremental aerodynamic to account effects due to power. " The configuration must have a body and a wing defined and."stand alone" configurations whose namelists are not. JETPWR. an0CNTAB AStTLPC the user to "build upon" the configuration defined tkrough G oup The remaining namelists LARWB. in Figures 12 through 22. the all-moveable horizonLal tail device. Since the Datcom method accounts for configuration changes requ~red (e. 12.used wl'th Group I1 inputs. respectively. the spoiler and aileron devices 3. a horizontal tail I.3. * 1 ' 47-. either horizontal tail or wing if Jet flaps. tail. ASYFLP and CONTAS. Control tabs (namelist CONTAB) therefore. Inputs for the high lift and control devices are made with the namelists SYMFLP.. one or two anu the engines may be located anywhere on the configuration. TRNJET and HYPEFF define. for proper placement of the engine(s) on the configuration pylons) are not taken into account..g. the namelists PR0PWR. tail. can be defined on either the wing or horizontal Since the method only computes the "end-plat2" affects on the longitudiIf the twin vertical panels are or ventral fin is incremental lateral stability results. I• for a control tab analysis namelists CONTAB and SYMFLP (with FTYPE-1) both be input.0) of a horizontal tail. are assumed to be mounted on a plain trailing edge fVap (FTYPE=I). of course.) are defined for the wing..4 GROUP III INPUT DATA The namelists required for additional or "special" configuration defl- nition are presented Specifically. horizontal tail and a vertical tail. must even with the presence of a horizontal tail. whereas even with the presence (STYPE-5. enable inputs. L.. also defined using SYMFLP. is. are assumed to be located on the most aft lifting a horizontal tail is not defined.

7SREF PHALdIC PHVLIC PRPRAD ENGFCT I BWAPR3 1 BWAPR6 BWAPR9) NOPBPE BAPR75 YP CRýT - AX. NUMBER OF ENGINES (1 Or 2)2 T THRUST COEFFICIENT -p.1 I - DEG I Al KN ISNOlT REQUIRED AS INPUT IF (bp)'s ARE INPUT AND CONVERSELY (bp)'s ARE NOT REQUIRED IF KN 1S"INPUT.75Rp Yp VARIABLE NAME AIETLP NENGSP THSTCP ARRAY DIMENSION - DEFINITION UNITS DEG _ j ANGLE OF iNCIDENCE OF ENGINE THRUST AXIS. (SEE SECTION 4.S/ Q/ ZT NAMELIST PRIOPWR / / .FALSE.75 PROPELLER RADIUS LATERAL LOCATION OF ENGINE .6Rp (bp)0.3 PROPELLER RADIUS BLADE WIDTH AT 0.3Rp (bp)0.TRUE.6.9 PROPELLER RADIUS NUMBER OF PROPELLER BLADES PER ENGINE BLADE ANGLE AT 0. ENGINEERING SYMBOL iT n x ZT Rp KN (bp)0.PROPELLOR POWER PARAMETERS -a I .1 OF DATCOM) FIGURE 12 INPUT FOR NAMELIST PR0PWR .AL LOCATION OF PROPELLER HUB VERTICAL LOCATION OF PROPELLER HUB PROPELLER RADIUS EMPIRICAL NORMAL FORCE FACTOR BLADE WIDTH AT 0. I I + x - R EFERENCE PLANE I ~ X'p -- - PROPELLER POWER EFFECT METHODS ARE ONLY APPLICABLE TO LONGITUDINAL STABILITY PARAMETERS INTHE SUBSONIC SPEED REGIME. COUNTER ROTATING PROPELLER .6 PROPELLER RADIUS BLADE WIDTH AT 0.. NON CGUNTER ROTATING PROPELLER I .v .gRp NB ()0.

- - •: -. S= XINIT it -_.VLSREF 21" AXIALLOCATION0OF ET ENGINEINLET VERTICAL LOCATION OF JET ENGINE EXIT AXIAL LOCATION OF JET ENGINE EXIT JET ENGINE INLET AREA I A 0 * 0 * * 0 JEANOL JEVEL$ - JET EXIT ANGLE JET EXIT VELOCITY T".. TJ I VT * P6 AMUTIP JESTMP JELL*C AMBIENT TEMPERATURE JET EXIT STATIC TEMPERATURE LATERAL LOCATION OF JET ENGINE DEG At DIG DEG - Jt*TP AMUSTP JETEfXITTOTAL PRESSU RE AMBIENT STATIC PRESSURE F/A FIA - S 0 11 AERAD - RADIUSOF JET EXIT " FIGURE 13 INPUT FOR NAMELIST JETPWR .. +l REFERENCE PLANE'-• ['1 -' •" j_. ...do • • •. JET POWER INPUTS ARE REQUIRED FOR EXTERNALLY BLOWN JET FLAP (ESF) CONFIGURATIONS.ITJ o JET POWER EFFECT METHODS ARE ONLY APPLICABLE TO LONGITUDINAL STABILITY PARAMETERS INTHE SUBSONIC SPEED REGIME. 0 0 0 0 0 * IN.. NOT REQUIRED PURE JET FLAPS OR INTERNALLY BLOWN FLAPS 08iF) ElF JET JET FLAP POWER IWtF/TS INPUTS ENGIMEERING SYMBOL S IT S • n NAME AIETL NENGSJ ARRAY DIMENSION - DEFINITION ANGLE OF INCIDENCE OF ENGINE THRUST yLINE UNITS DEG 0 Te 4 4g Al NUMBlER OF ENGINES (0 ORf 21- THnTC JEVLIC JEAL$C JINLTA ..NAMELIST JETPWR r T .JET POWER PARAMETERS III1 I 51 C ..JIALfC #j VJ - - THRUST COEFFICIENT -F.

GROUND HEIGHTS EaUAL ALTITUDE OF REF.NAMELIST GRNDEF REFER EN CEPLAN E . PLANE RELATIVE TO GROUND H -- GRDHT 10 FIGURE 14 INPUT FOR NAMELIST GRNDEF - GROUND EFFECT DATA 53 .i VARIABLE NAME NGH ARRAY DIMENSION DFNTO DFNTO NT NT NH ! * - *• NUMBER OF GROUND HEIGHTSTO BE RUN REFRENCEPLAVALUES OF GROUND HEIGHTS. ENGINEERING SYMBOL I.~ GROUND GROUND EFFECT METHODS ARE ONLY APPLICABLE TO LONGITUDINAL STABILITY PARAMETERS INTHE SUBSONIC SPEED REGIME.

.l• • . NAME BVP ev V BOV 3. m j A DEG SV VPHITE VLP Zp ZP - FIGURE 15 INPUT FOR NAMELIST TVTPAN . DIMENSIONUN - VERTICAL PANEL SPAN ABOVE LIFTING SURFACE VERTICAL PANEL SPAN FUSELAGE DEPTH AT QUARTER CHORD-POINT OF VERTICAL I I [ 2rI ! SE TE ".F I t I. .. AXIS BETWEEN THE CG AND THE VQUARTER CHORD POINT OF THE MAC OF THE PANEL. . POSITIVE IF AFT OF CG.-- - PANEL MEAN AEROOYNAMIC CHORD DISTANCE BETWEEN VERTICAL PANELS PLAN FORM AREA OF ONE VERTICAL PANEL TOTAL TRAILING.EDGE ANGLE OF VERTICAL PANEL AIRFOIL SECTION DISTANCE PARALLEL TO LONG.. .. POSITIVE FOR PANEL ABOVE CG. NAMELIST TVTPAN 2 bH I t I EFFECTS OF TWIN VERTICAL PANELS ONLY REFLECTED INSUBSONIC LATERAL STABILITY RESULTS r" ENGINEERING VARIABLE ARRAY I SYMBOL b. DISTANCE INTHE Z DIRECTION BETWEEN THE CG AND THE MAC OF THE PANEL.TWIN-VERTICAL PANEL INPUT 55 74 i! i I I I I I I I Ii 71.

NAMELIST SYMFLP "PLAINTRAILING-EDGE FLAP ilMlO I FLAP iiIf SINGLE4LOTTEo FLAP ELL IIOE FLAP Cf.SYMETRICAL FLAP DEFLECTION INPUTS .. IE01E C IUT I NMMh IIOPAL IN VAIIAILn CfC i I LEAIN -402C. . ~57 .•%--MON FLAP FIGURE 16 INPUT FOR NAMELIST SYMFLP . . bi PUT FLAP SMAIMUROE FLAP CLAOiACATIOU OF RAWB FLPMP INEIA C0 2 SLAT LEA1IN .LAP .

0 ELLIPTIC NOSE FLAP 3. MEASURED PERPENDICULAR TO VERTICAL PLANE OF SYMMIETRY SPAN LOCATION OF OUTBOARD END OF FLAP.0 LEADING EDGE SLATS 8 '. MEASURED PARALLEL TO • 0 0 0@ CPRME@ 9 0 0 0 0 0 CAPINB CAPOUT DOBOEF Oo0CIN 9 9 9 -1 I 0 O$BCOT SCLO SCMD Ca TC NTYPE -'1 9 S - INCREMENT IN SECTION LIFT COEFFICIENT DUE TO DEFLECTING FLAP TO TK.MaOL VARIABLE NAME ARRAY DIMENSION DEFINITION 0 z *I A PLAIN FLAPSs -2.0 EBF '=4. MEASURED PERPE1!OICULAR TO VERTICAL PLANE OF SYMMETRY TOTAL WING CHORD AT LATING DEVICES ONLY) LONGITUDINAL AXIS TOTAL WING CHORD AT LATING DEVICES ONLY) LONGITUDINAL AXIS INBOARD ENOOF FLAP (TRANSMEASURED PARALLEL TO 4v 0 0 - FTYPE - 0 0 0 0 • 0 " NOELTA DELTA 9 9 DEG * * * * • * 0 * 0 * • * 121 /2) PHETE PHETEP CHROFI CHROFI SPANFI SPANFO CPAMEI 0 0 • 0 0 0 0 0 0 . MEASURED PARALLEL TO LONGITUDINAL AXIS FLAP CHORD AT OUTBOARD END OF FLAP.0 DOUBLE SLOTTED FLAPS = 5.0 SINGLE SLOTTED FLAPS 3.1.2.0 PURE JET FLAP .0 ROUND NOSE FLAP 2.0 SHARP NOSE FLAP . MAX 9 FLAP DEFLECTION ANGLE MEASURED STEAMWISE TANGENT OF AIRFOIL TRAILINE EDGE ANGLE BASED ONORDINATES AT 90 AND99 PERCENT CHORD TANGENT OF AIRFOIL TRAILING EDGE ANGLE BASED ON ORDINATES AT 95 AND99 PERCENT CiORO FLAP CHORD AT INBOARD END OF FLAP.EANGLE 6f INCREMENT IN SECTICN PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT DUE TO DEFLECTING FLAP TO ANGLE bf AVERAGE CHORD OF THE BALANCE AVFRAGE THICKNESS OF THE CONTROL AT HINGE LINE * 1.0 IBF 3. 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OUTBOARD END OF FLAP (TRANS.0 COMBINATION MECHANICAL AND PURE JET FLAP TWO-DIMENSIONAL JET EFFLUX COEFFICIENT JET DEFLECTION ANGLE EBF EFFECTIVE JET DEFLECTION ANGLE 1 1 - * 0 - JETFLP - CMU OELJET EFFJET 9 9 DEG0 DEG 0 'IONAL FOR ALL FLAP TYPES CHAFIICAL FLA? TYPE IF JETFLP * 4 / . MEASURED PARALLEL TO LONGITUDINAL AXIS SPAN LOCATION OF INBOARD END OF FLAP.0 LEADING EDGE FLAP 7.0 KRUEGER NJMBER OF FLAP OR SLAT DEFLECTION ANGLES.0 FOWLER FLAPS 4.0 SPLIT FLAPS 6.

090 rogo v V99 599 i / I +c • /'/ .E/2) 1/2 Y95 - Y9o . • Y99 / tan[(7.DOUBLE SLOTTED FLAP €I / 6f .

TRAILING EDGE CAMBER LINE 6j P.) LINE7 FIGUR 18JEVFAPINUTDEINTIN 60 .URE JET FLAP JETT EFFLUX -TRAILING EDGE CAMBER LINE JET COMtBINATaION JET FLAP &MECHANICAL FLAP PARALLEL TO WING CHORD INTERNALLY BLOWN JET FLAP If ----.

• I 7I . i .NAMELIST ASYFLP c8 ( FLAP SPOILER cl CIO 5 Is@ PLUG SPOILER Yg _____-_ SP-ILER4LDEFLECTORO "#aTE/2) ff 1/2 Yee -YgoS4LE-]TOELC "d FIGURE 19 INPUT FOR NAMELIST ASYFLP .ASYMMETRI L CONTROL DEFLECTION INPUT ' _ _ _ _ _ _61 /' / .

MEASURED IN VERTICAL PLANE OF SYMMETRY AILERON CHORD AT INBOARD END OF PLAIN FLAP AILERON. MEASURED TO PERPENDICULAR TO VERTICAL PLANE OF SYMMETRY TANGENT OF AIRFOIL TRAILING EDGE ANGLE ASED ON ORDINATES AT x/c-. FLAP AND PLUG SPOILERS FRACTION OF CHORD DISTANCE FROM WING LEADING EDGE TO SPOILER HINGE LINE MEASURED PARALLEL TO STREAMWISE WING CHORD.. PLUG SPOILER AND SPOILERSLOT-REFLECTOR. FLAP SPOILER.. MEASURED PERPENDICULAR TO VERTICAL PLANE OF SYMMETRY SPAN LOCATION OF OUTBOARD END OF FLAP OR SPOILER CONTROL. PLUG SPOILER AND SPOILER-SLOT-DEFLECTOR CONTROL. AND OJM DEFLECTION ANGLE FOR LEFT HAND PLAIN FLAP AILERON OR LEFT HAND PANEL ALL MOVEABLE HORIZONTAL TAIL. l a 1. MEASURED PARALLEL TO LONGITUDINAL AXIS AILERON CHORD AT OUTBOARD END OF PLAIN FLAP AILERON.0. FRACTION OF CHORD • 0 @0 0 0 DEC @0 DEG • SR DELTAR S CHROFI CHROFt a OELTAO DELTAS C I I I - - 0 0 0 00 - XSC SXSPRME £' - 0 - • IL HS#C I 010-0 /. FRACTION OF CHORD PROJECTED HEIGHT OF SPOILER. . MEASURED PARALLEL TO LONGITUDINAL AXIS PROJECTED HEIGHT OF DEFLECTOR. FLAP SPOILER. FRACTION OFCHORD PROJECTED HEIGHT OF SPOILER MEASURED FROM AND NORMAL TO.. AIRFOIL MEAN LINE. REQUIRED FOR ALL B CONTROLS. . FRACTION OF CHORD DISTANCE FROM WING LEADING EDGE TO SPOILER LIP MEASURED PARALLEL TO STREAMWISE WING CHORD.. FLAP SPOILER.0 FLAP SPOILER ON WING • W6 I .0 DIFFERENTIALLY DEFLECTED ALL MOVEABLE HORIZONTAL TAIL NUMBER OF CONTROL DEFLECTION ANGLES. OF 9 SPAN LOCATION OF INBOARD ENO OF FLAP OR SPOILER CONTROL. .VARIABLES REQUIRED PER CONTROL TYPE o a mNGNEERING VARIABLE ARRAY SYMBOL NAME IMENSIO ° DEINITON UNITS -d .0 PLUG SPOILER ON WING STYPE a &0 SPOILER-SLOT-OEFLECTION ON WING 0 0 • - =4.. MEASURED IN VERTICAL PLANE OF SYMMETRY DEFLECTION ANGLE FOR RIGHT HAND PLAIN FLAP AILERON OR RIGHT HAND PANEL ALL MOVEABLE HORIZONTAL TAIL. PHETE DELTAL = 5.2.0 PLAIN FLAP AILERON S NOELTA 61 SPANFI SPANF* I m(qTE/2) 8L. PLUG SPOILER ANn SPOILER-SLOT-DEFLECTOR CONTROL. SPOILERSLOT-DEFLECTOR CONTROL. MAX.

EFFECTIVE WEDGE ANGLE OF SHARP LEADING EDGE WING. ABAND EFFECTIVE RADIUS OF ROUND LEADING EDGE WING. DEGREES Cr A. PERPENDICULAR TO LEADING EDGE ATcrI3 FROM NOSE. DEGREES A Cr A 900-L LE A AL A 3i 60 R WLE FIGURE 20 INPUT FOR NAMELIST LARWB .l00 A DSPA A 7 A ADGE A 44AA LEA-IN -I b LSj~ ROUND LEADING EDGE INPUT PARAMETERS: 3 LE V 8L ( LE L (NOT REQUIRED IFLEADING EDGE ISSH.ARN)..Sol NOT REQUIRED IF LEADING EDGE IS ROUND o.LOW ASPECT RATIO WING. WING4BODY INPUT 63/ .NAMELIST LARWB SHARP LEADING EDGE INPUT PARAMETER.ui 33 [A ROUN 9.l. PERPENDICULAR TO WING LEADING EDGE AT cr 13 FROM NOSE. DEGREES DIVIDED BY SURFACE SPAN LOWER SURFACE ANGLE OF ROUND LEADING EDGED WING. PERPENDICULAR TO LEADING EDGE ArCr/3 FROM NOSE.

TRUE. BLF . BASE LOCATION DESICNATOR . . .FALSE.FALSE.u. PORTIONS OF BASE ARE AFT OF NON-LIFTING SURFACE .BLF a • ' -. VEW X ROUNON '---4 Xb .POINTED NOSE PROJECTED SIDE AREA OF CONFIGURATION PROJECTED SIDE AREA OF CONFIGURATION FORWARD OF .TRUE. REFERENCE PLANE LB -1Lb ZERO NORMAL FORCE REF PLANE ENGINEERING SYMBOL Zbass S aD*I SF A (R1 / 3 LE)/b 61 JB Swet P Sb hb bb BASE LOCATION DESIGNATOR xm 8 NOSE BLUNTNESS DESIGNATOR SES (SB•I .ROUNDED NOSE ..~4 ROUNONPLNVE . l il 1 -\ .211 DISTANCE FROM NOSE OF VEHICLE TO CENTROID OF PROJECTED SIDE AREA DISTANCE FROM NOSE OF CONFIGURATION TO CENTROID OF PLAN AREA UNITS A DEG 7 A DEG I A I A I I - I DEG A A I - I .2 . TOTAL mV7 AFT OF LIFING SURFACE LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF CG FROM NOSE WING SEMI-APEX ANGLE . ]--CENTROID LOF BASE AREA .FALSE.TRUE.TRUE. EXCLUDING BASE AREA PERIMETER OF IASE BASE AREA MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF BASE MAXIMUM SPAN OF BASE USED AS LATERAL REF LENGTH .FALSE.8 Xcmntroids8xcentraidW VARIABLE NAME ZB SREF OELTEP SFRONT AR R3LE6B CELTAL L SWET PERBAS SBASE HB Be BLF XCG THETAD ROUNDN SBS SBSLB XCENSB XCENW ARRAY DIMENSION - DEFINITION VERTICAL DISTANCE BETWEEN CENTROID OF BASE AREA AND BODY REF PLANE PLANFORM AREA USED AS REFERENCE AREA SHARP LEADING EDGE PARAMETER PROJECTED FRONTAL AREA PERPENDICULAR TO ZERO NORMAL FORCE REF PLANE ASPECT RATIO IF SURFACE ROUND LEADING EDGE PARAMETER ROUND LEADINg EDGE PARAMETER LENGTH OF BODY USED AS LONGITUDINAL REF LENGTH WETTED AREA.h S• .

TRUE.NAMELIST TRNJET b Mae Mc Pao L ENGINEERING SYMBOL VARIABLE NAME NT ARRAY DIMENSION - DEFINITION NUMBER OF TIME HISTORY VALUES. DES - c 7. MAXIMUM OF 10TIME HISTORY TIME HISTORY OF CONTROL FORCE REaIUIRED TO TRIM TIME HISTORY OF ATTITUDE TIME HISTORY OF BOUNDARY LAYER.-BOUNOARY LAYER IS-TURBULENT AT JET SPAN OF 143ZZLE NORMAL TO FLOW DIRECTION INCLINATION OF NOZZLE CENTER ¶. 1 L cc GP LFP - - .1NE RELATIVE TO AN AXIS NORMAL TO SURFACE NOZZLE EXIT MACH NUMBERI JET VACUUM SPECIFIC IMPULSE NOZZLE DISCHARGE COEFFICIENT SPECIFIC HEAT RATIO OF PROPELLANT DISTANCE OF NOZZLE FROM PLATE LEADING EDGE - UNIT t Fc elm TIME FC ALPHA LAMNRJ 10 10 10 10 It IF DEG b SPAN PI4E ME IISP - . WHERE-. FIGURE 21 INPUT FOR NAMELIST TRNJET TRANSVERSE-JET CONTROL INPUT 65 /_ .FALSE.-BOUNOARY LAYER IS LAMINAR AT JET =.

- DEG FIGURE 22 INPUT FOR NAMELIST HYPEFF .Msr q af VARIARLE NAME ALITO XHL 7.V4Tl CF HNDLTA HOELTA LAMNR ARRAYuTIONuUNITS DIMENSION 10 ALTITUDE DISTANCE TO CONTROL HINGE LINE MEASURED FROM THE LEADING EDGE RATIO OF WALL TEMPERATURE TO THE FREE STREAM STATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL CHORD LENGTH NUMBER OF FLAP DEFLECTION ANGLES (MAXIMUM OF 10) CONTROL DEFLECTION ANGLE.•.•• • • •:": .-BOUNDARY LAYER AT HINGE LINE IS LAMINAR L ."••/ " .TRUE.FLAP CONTROL AT HYPERSONIC SPEEDS 67 S•:••. POSITIVE TRAILIfIr EDGE DOWN .FALSE.NAMELIST HYPEFF i~ IXHLI ENGINEER SYMBOL ALT XHL T.''' •.-BOUNDARY LAYER AT HINGE LIKE ISTURBULENT .

TRIM TAB OUTBOARD CHORD. x X X X X X X BITC BOTC CFITT CFOTT BITT BOTT BI 82 - - INBOARD SPAN LOCATION CONTROL TAB OUTBOARD SPAN LOCATION CONTROL TAB INBOARD CHORD. CONTROL TAB OUTBOARD CHORD. TRIM TAB A I A - - - x B3 B4 Dl - /DEG 1/DEG 1/DEG I/DEG I/DEG 1/DEG SEE TABLEl FOR DEFINITIONS X1 C2 03 Gcmax k RL 0 Ar 1 03 GCMAX KS RL DELR . THEN FREE STREAM DYNAMIC PRESSURE IS REQUIRED 69 / . CONTROL TAB (bi)tc (bo)to (Cfi)tt (Cb)n (bi)tt (bo~tt B1 93 B4 D1 02 .- 1/DEG - x X x 11 F/A-D EG X -GR - X X / IF THE SYSTEM HAS ASPRING. DEFINITION CONTROL TAB TRIM TAB UNITS = I TAB CONTROL TTYPE = 2 TRIM TAB X X =380TH (Cfi)tc Ctfo)tc CFiTC CFOTC X X X .NAMELIST CONTAB TABLE 10 INPUT PARAMETER LIST NAMELIST CONTAB ENGR SYMBOL VARIABLE NAME DIM. TRIM TAB INBOARD SPAN LOCATION TRIM TAB OUTBOARD SPAN LOCATION. INBOARD CHORD. KS INPUT.

surface mean aerodynamic chord (movable surfaces are defined by their area aft of the hinge line.2) (Cha)tc.1. 1/Deg (User Input) a (Ch6)tc. 6 tc.as .TABLE 11 SYMBOL DEFINITION •c tc Ac B1 Sca (Chch/a36c1tc.6tc.1. I/Deg (Datcom Section to.as. (Datcom Section 6. user input. Gc Ar).2) . /Deg.1. user input. 1/Deg 1)c. and the MAC is of that area) * a DI D2 D3 Fc G1 (aChtc/a6c) 6tc (aChtc/aStc)6c.6.6.1.1) 82 B3 84 c( ) (aChc/a6tct6c. k U/aMtc\ 1 tab spring effectiveness k-tc )spring Stc~tc 70 L *i• . 6 tc control-column force (pull force is positive) (7. max input Gtcmax and a r If RL " 0.as . I/Deg. 6 tt . 1/Deg (Datcom Section 6. In this case 1.6. 6tt a (Ch6)c.0 (Gtcax .1) (8Chtc/'aa ) 6c. 1/Deg (Datcom Section 6. Gcmax also is zero. as. (Ch = (aChc/a~tt)6c.8tt (aChc/aGs) 6 c.3 aXc\ maximum stick gearinq user input.6.

obtained from Table 12 aerodynamic boost link ratio.e.RI TABLE 11 SYMBOL DEFINITION (CONTD) q local dynamic pressure 1.0. or wing control tab trim tab 71 -* . horizontal tail. i. Deg 4 -. Whe RL 00- A SUBSCRIPTS main control surface surface to which the main control surface is attached. (RL Ž 0). vertical tail.tcmax/6 cmax for a maximum control deflection (the value of A r is positive because [ c I tc tt totalx an 6 Cmax Will have opposite signs). Deg RL S( ) as () • 81 ) Ar --.s with k " • control-tab gear ratio surface deflection. user input. posit. surface area (movable surfaces are defined by their area aft of the hinge line) angle of attack of the surface to which the main control surface is attached. SR R2 shorthand notation for tab and main surface hinge moments and key linkage parameters. To input RL -a set RL<0. user input 1.ve for trailing edge down or to the left.

(RL-0P RL ÷ A+D--4k/qD2)(RL + A) B2 I RL+ Ago qv.4-b) SPECIFIC TYPE .INKAGE OF SYSTEM GEARED TAB PURE DIRECT CONTROL RL so k 0 1 F a0 0 0 (RL + Ard ki (RLRL +At÷ 2 (RL+ *r) !2 k R TRL+_2-ICRL) 1 1 -(k/qD2)(RL+Ar) k -jO-.TABLE 12 EQUATIONS FOR RI AND R2 (DATCOM TABLE 6.(R1) GEARE SPRING TAB F F F SPRINGTAB F F 0 (RI + Ad) PLAIN LINKED TAD F 0 0 B2 A¢O2 Ar -(k/qo2) k " I -V "• GEAREO FLYING TAB 0 F F -+i 2A •r 82 AcO2 ÷il-)2 92 Ac02 -(k/4021 Atr SPRING FLYING TAB 0l F 0 Ar PURE FLYING TAB 0 0 0682 Ac02 * F DENOTES FINITE VALUE 72 .3.

name cannot contain any embedded blanks. they are then separated by a single blank. their usage are illustrated in 3. DIM FT DIM IN DIM N When any of these cards are encountered. if terminated of the same namelist. unless a SAVE card is presence of this card behind the last input case is optional. printed and the case is Note.) the input and the stated system of the default. SAVE When this control card is present in a case. input case. unless The control card the name consists of two All bu Le case. tion card (NEXT CASE) may be inserted anywhere within a case (including the Each control card is defined below and examples of middle of any namelist). the last case will be executed twice. Case data are present..t SAVE cases cannot exceed 300. the following case will update the saved data. when the SAVE option has been used. The 73 tA. teraminates the reading of input data and begins execution of the case.. data encountered in Values not input in the new case are preserved for use in the following case. no other control cards can beý sa•wed from affected by the SAVE card. (See Table 8. All Datcom control cards must start in card Column 1. DIM FT is DIM CM NEXT CASE . NAMELIST . if the 300 namelist limit the last both SAVE and NEXT CASE cards appear in The NACA.When this card is encountered. multiplL case jobs.When this card is namelist is dumped for the case in recommended if encountered. case will remain unchanged.. input data for the Thus. this includes multiple appearances An error message is is exceeded. DERIV and DIM control cards are the only control cards i. Use of the TA7E card allows minimum inputs for namelists in The total number of appearances of all consecuti. the program.5 GROUP IV INPUT DATA Case control cards are provided to give the user case control and optional input/output flexibility.e. . the content of each applicable This option is especially the input system of untas. case to case.3. there is'doubt about the input values being used. destroyed following execution of a case.5.terminat words. output data are specified in units.1 Case Control the example problems of Section 7.

Ventral Fin (F) 74 I. Figure 8. H. Wing (W). control section that if card is present or the variable TYPEIN is defined in iamelist (WGSCHR.This card provides an NACA airfoil section sonic airfoil in designation (or superIt is used definition) for use in the airfoil section module. V.- . The airfoil section module calculates the airfoil secand is executed if either a NACA the appropriate Note tion characteristics designated in Figure 8. -rm of this control card and the required parameters are given Card Column\ 1 thru 4 Input(s) 'YCA Purpose The unique letters NACA designate that an airfoil is to be defined Any delimeter 6 W. may be trimmed by deflecting a control device on the wing or horizontal tail or by deflecting an all-movable DAMP derivative The horizontal stabilizer. NACA . HTSCHR. or in place of. an NACA card to be recognized designated with this card will be used for both panels of cranked or doubledelta -lanforms. aerodynamic Therefore. and the NACA card are specified for the same coordinate specification will be used.2 Execution Control TRIM If this card is included in the case input. or F Planform for which the airfoil designation applies. Horizontal Tail or Vertical Tail (V). (11). section characteristics namelists. the airfoil conjunction with. a case will provide dynamicin addition to the stan- presence of this nard in results (for addressable configurations) dard static-derivative output (see Figure 25). option is if the airfoil coordinates have been specified in a previous case and the SAVE TYPEIN must be set equal to "UNUSED" for that aerodynamic for the presence of surface. The airfoil in effect. trim calculations A vehicle will be performed for each subsonic Mach number within the case. Sbelow.5.3. coordinates surface. characteristic airfoil VTSCHR or VFSCHR).

Section designation input restrictions inherent to the Airfoil Section Module are presented in Table 13. 5-digit (5). all the arrays (defined in Appendix C) the arrays are in the foot-pound-second system of that are used during case execution are printed prior to the conventional The values in This card is similar to the "DUMP CASE" card except that it similar to the "DUMP CASE" card except that all forces a dump of all input data blocks used for the case. if the control card read was "DUMP FLC. . are not in the vocabulary list will be interpreted as the number zer. DUMP INPT - present in a case. Any characters The vocabulary consists of the numbers zero (0) ".This card is similar to the "DULP NAV-EI.3 Output Control CASEID ..F . through nine (9). - . " control card.5. - named arrays in the foot-pound-second system of units. 6. 3. A " the flight conditions array FLC and the wing array A would be printed prior to the conventional If more names are desired than can fit in the available space on one card. and must appear in card columns 7 through 80. additional dump cards may be included. . 6-series (6)..This card provides a case identification that is part of the output headings. example. the letter inpu. The arrays that can For be listed and definition of their contents are given in Appendix C. units. S~75 ..7 8 Any delimeter 1. DUMP IOM .This card is the output arrays for the case are dumped. (0). 1-series (1). When this card is output.". DUMP CASE . 4. and "'-. 5. that {i • . columns are free-field (blanks are ignored) Only fifteen (15) "A".. and the characters characters are accepted in the airfoil designation. or supersonic (S) Input designation. output. [ 9 10 thru 80 Any delimeter Designation 4-digit (4). S Type of airfoil section. NANE2 printed as This identification can be any user defined This card is used to print the contents of the case title.. DUMP NAMEI.

6 43006-61 1--212 00 64-205 61AOS 612A215 6S2A215 i S-3-30. "-" DELIMETER MUST BE USED) 76 .6 (NOTE: THE PROGRAM DOES NOT DISTINGUISH BETWEEN A 64. LENGTH OF SURFACE AT CONSTANT THICKNESS.40.5 OR .% CHORD (NOTE: ALL PARAMETERS CAN BE EXPRESSED TO 0.40. 2-210 AND A 64 2.210 . TO MAX THICKNESS.9 X FOR MINIMUM PRESSURE MUST BE .--2. .3. ..8OR. % CHORD 4( FOR HEXAGONAL SECTIONS.30.6 A-0.30. THICKNESS.6 A-0.CIRCULAR ARC 3-HEXAGONAL ( DOISTANCE FROM LE.5-40. DIFFERENCE IN COORDINATES BETWEEN THE TWO DESIGNATIONS IS NEGLIGIBLE) @ SECTION TYPE I " DOUBLE WEDGE 23118 2406-31 S-DIGIT 4-DIGIT MODIFIED 5-DIGIT MODIFIED 1-SERIES 6-SERIES A-0. 50 OR 60% CHORD POSITION OF MAXIMUM THICKNESS MUSi BE AT 20.1%. 50 OR 60% CHORD X FOR MINIMUM PRESSUREMUST BE.25 NACA SERIES AIHFOIL 4-DIGIT 4-OIGIT RESTRICTIONS NONE NONE (NOTi: THICKNESS CAN BE FRACTIONAL ONLY FOR 4-DIGIT SERIES) NONE POSITION OF MAXIMUM THICKNILSS MUST BE AT 20. % CHORD 03 MAX.TABLE 13 AIRFOIL DESIGNATION USING THE NACA CONTROL CARD INPUT NACA DESIGNATION 0012 0012.1 SUPERSONIC ( 0 o0 2.4 .

control card are the same as the DERIV RAD card. even if not used for the case. Its use dumps all program arrays. card provider auxiliary and partial outputs at each Mach PART -This number in the case (see Section 6. This control card provides configurAtion build-up data.This control card causes data generated by the program to be written to logical unit 13. PLOT . The user's kit (Appendix D) has been designed to assist the user in eliminating many common input errors. 77 . DERIV DEG is the default.This card causes the static aad dynamic stability derivatives to be output in radian measure. DERIV RAD .DUMP ALL - This card is similar to the "DUMP CASE" card. DERIY DEC - This card causes the static and dynamic stability derivaThe remaining characteristics of this tives to be output in degree measure. and its use is encouraged.neglecting an important asuelist input. BUILD - These outputs are automatically Conven- provided for all cases at transonic Mach numbers.8).6 REPRESENTATIVE CASE SETUP Figures 23 and 24 illustrate a typical case setup utilizing the namelists and control cards described. which can be retained for input to the Plot Module (described in Volume III). Though namelists (anid control cards) may appear in any order (except for NEXT CASE). The form.. 3.1. users are encouraged to provide f inputs in the data groups outlined in this section in order to avoid one of the most common input errors . even if "NEXT CASE" cards are subsequently encountered. of this plot file is described in Section 5 of Volume III. The output will be in degree measure unless this flag is set. The flag remains set until a DERIV DEG control card is encountered. tional static and dynamic stability data are output for all of the applicable basic configuration combinations shown in Table 2.

SNOPV DUPIAS HIGUE2P YIALMAE 78 EU ..: LW . c.u ...

-_ ' _ _ _ __ MAC"_ AII ____ ____ __ - _______________________________ .Li IRIM II IGROUPIV II GROUP I ____ ____ .

I SECTION 4 BASIC CONFIGURATION MODELING TECHNIQUES 4.1 COMPONENT CONFIGURATION MODELING
Use of the Datcom methods requires engineering judgement and experience to properly model a configuration and interpret results. in the use of the Digital Datcom program. The same holds true As a convenience to the user, the The user can retrieve the values

program performs intermediate geometric computations (e.g., area and aspect ratio) required in method applications. Section 3.5. used for key geometric parameters by means of the PART and/or DUMP options, The geometric inputs to the Digital Datcom program are relabest representing a :me geometry modeling This section describes tively simple except for the judgement required in particular configuration. techniques to appropriately model a configuration. 4.1.1 Body Modeling The basic body geometry parameters required (regardless of speed regime) consist of the longitudinal coordinates, xi, with corresponding planform half widths, Ri, peripheries, Pi, and/or cross-sectional areas, Si. Sp a 2 R, dx). These values tale is used to are usually used in a linear sense (e.g., the trapezoidal
£en

integrate for planform area, such as (dS/dx)i, r

This friies that bodyProper model-

shape parameters are linearly connected..

Hnwever, geometrfc derivatives,

are obtained from quadratic interpolations.

ing techniques which reflect a knowledge of method implementation, when used in conjunction with.the PART and DUMP options, greatly enhance the program capability and accuracy. Body methods for lift-curve slope, pitching-moment slope and drag coefficient in the transonic, supersonic, and hypersonic speed regimes require The body the body to be synthesized from a combination of body segments.

segments consist of a nose segment, an afterbody segment, and a tail segment. However, in these speed regimes, lift and pitching-moment coefficients versus angle of attack are defined as functions of the body planform characteristics, and therefore are not necessarily a function of the body-segment

parameters. The program performs the configuration synthesis
described below. can reflect actual body contours.

computations as

The body input parameters R, P, and S (defined in Figure 6) Digital Datcom will interpolate the R 81

y ac

X - ZN,

X = ZN + -Za, and the last

input X for dN,

di,

and d 2 ,

-aspectively. an "equivalent" example, in

Using the shape parameters Bnose and Btail it

will synthesize For

body. from the various possibilities shown in Figure 6.

the center

body X = 9N to X = tN + Za will be treated as a ratio of 2Ia/(dN+dl), the nose will be the shape etc. Thus, it is up to

cylinder with a fineness

specified by Bnose with a fineness ratio of kN/dN, the aser to choose kN, Na, tion of the actual Lody. Digital Datcom requires synthesized nose-alone, nose-afterbody, Bnose,

and Btail to derive a reasonable approxima-

body configurations

to be either

nose-afterbody-tail, restricted

or nose-tail (see Figure 6). as follows: nose and tail

The shape of the body segments is

shapes must be either an ogive or cone, tails

afterbodies must be cylindrical while Additional body namelist inputs and tail-

may be either boattailed or flared.

are required to define

these body segments and consist of nose-

shape parameters BN0SE and BTAIL and nose and afterbody length parameters BLN and BLA. In the hypersonic speed regime, the effects of nose bluntness may

be obtained by specifying DS,

the nose bluntness diameter. and BLA (ZA) -s required in speed

For an example of inputs for BLN (ZN) regimes other than subsonic, ters at the various the reader

is directed to Figure 6. dN, ZBT, dl, is

Body diame-

segment intesections, The tail length,

and d 2 , are obtained from obtained by subtracting

linear interpolation.

segments ZN and 'A from the total body length. Most Digital Datcom analyses assume bodies are axisymmetric. obtain limited results for cambered bodies of arbitrary ZU and ZL cross This Users may section option by is

specifying restricted regime.

the BODY

namelist

optional stability

inputs

to the longitudinal other

results in ZU It is

the subsonic speed are ignored and

At speeds

than subsonic,

and ZL values

axisymmetric body results are provided.

recommended that the reference

plane for ZU and ZL inputs be chosen near the base area centroid. The body modeling example problem (Section specifically tions. o to illustrate 7, problem I) was selected

modeling techniques and relevant progrdm opera-

They include: Choice of longitudinal coordinates Xi that reflect body curvature and critical body intersections, JIf required. i.e., wing-body intersection, and body

segmentation, o

Subsonic cambered body modeling. 82

*71

-

o 4.1.2

Use of the DUKP option so that key parameters can be obtained with the aid of Appendix C. Wing/Tail Modeling

j

Input data for wings, horizontal tail, vertical tails and ventral fins have been classified as either planform data or as section characteristic data, as shown in Figures 7 and 8 of Section 3. input data is shown in Figure 15. Classification of nonstraight-tapered wings and horizontal tails as either cranked (aspect ratio > 3) appropriate lift or double delta (aspect ratio < 3) is In this speed regime, the relevant to only the subsonic speed regime. the lifting surface. However, if Twin-vertical panel planform

and drag prediction methods depend on the classification of Digital Datcom executes subsonic analyses according to

the user-specified classification regardless of the surface aspect ratio. the surface is inappropriately designated, a warning message is the lateral stability The direct effects printed. Dihedral angle inputs are used primarily in methods.

The longitudinal stability methods reflect only the effects of of horizontal surfaces are not defined in alone analysis requires the

dihedral in the downwash and ground effect calculations. of dihedral on the primary lift Datcom and are therefore not included in Digital Datcom. Digital Datcom wing or horizontal tail

exposed semispan and the theoretical semispan to be set to the same value in The input wing root chord should be consistent namelist WGPLNF and HTPLNF. with the chosen semispan. The reference parameters in namelist OPTINS should be used to specify reference paraueters corresponding to other than the theoretical wing planform. If the reference parameters are not specified, they are evaluated using the theoretical wing inputs and the reference area is set as the wing theoretical area, the longitudinal reference length as the wing mean aerodynamic chord, and the lateral reference length is set as the wing span. Horizontal tail input parameters SVWB, WVB, and SVHB, as well as vertical tail input parameters SHB, If SEXT, and RLPH, are required only for the the program will supersonic and hypersonic speed regimes. lateral-stability derivatives. They are used in calculation of

these data are not input,

calculate them, but will fail it any part of the exposed root chord lies off of the body; lateral stabilit7 calcuistions are not performed if this occurs. 83

S

*7

/
I

~/

\
S..

Two-dimensional airfoil section characteristic data for wings and tails are input via namelists WGSCHR, HTSCHR, VTSCHR, and VFSCHR, or may be calcu-

lated using the airfoil section module.

On occasion,

the section character-

istics cannot be explicitly defined because airfoil sections either vary with span 'an average straight airfoil section may be specified), or the planform is not In

tapered and has different airfoil sections between the panels. iuputs should be estimated after

such ,:ircumstances, airfoil test data.

reviewing existing

Sensitivity of progran rebults to the estimated section

characteristics can be readily evaluated by performing parametric studies utilizing the SAVE and NEXT CASE options defined in Section 3.5. Users are i.e., on

warned that airfoil sensitivities do exist for low Reynolds numbers, the order of 100,000.

These namelists can ilso be used to specify the aspect (Table 9). parameters, and synthesis The

ratio criteria using "ARCL" Planform geometry, dimensions

section characteristic

for twin vertical panels are input via namelist TVTPAN.

effects of such panels are reflected in only the subsonic lateral-stability output. tail. 4.2 MULTIPLE COMPONENT MODELING Combinations SYNTHS. However, of aerodynamic components must be synthesized in namelist the program makes no cross checks in assembly of components analysis. The user must confirm the geometry inputs to The panels may be located either on the wing or on the horizontal

for configuration

assure consistency of dimensions and component locations in total configuration representation. 4.2.1 Wing-Body/Tail-Body Modeling Body values employed in wing-body computations are not the same as bodyalone results but are obtained by performing body-alone analysis for that portion of the body forward supplied body data, of the exposed root chord of the wing. will be used in User

input via the namelist EXPRnn,

lieu of

the "nose segment" data calculated. ratio of body diameter i.e., the body diameter

Carryover factors are a function of the

to wing span, as obtained from the wing input data, is taken as twice the difference of the exposed the body radius Input in

semispan and the thaoretical semispan.

Hence,

namelist BODY does not affect the interference parameters.

84

.1

4.2.2

Wing-Body-Tall Modeling

A conventional "aircraft" configuration Is modeled using the body, wing, horizontal tail, and vertical tall modehng techniques previously described. Wing downwash data are required to complete analysis of configurations with a wing and horizontal tall. Subsonic and supersonic downwash data are calculated for straight-tapered wings. For other wing planforms, or at transonic though two alternatives are Mach numbers, the downwash data (qH/q., E, and dd/dci) must be supplied using the experimental data substitution option, suggested: a. b. Actual data, or from a wing-body-tall configuration which has an

"equivalent" struight tapered wing, or
Defining an "equivalent" straight tapered wing and substituting the wing-body results obtained from the previous Digital Datcom run to obtain the best analytical estimate of the confiuration. Body-canard-wing configurations are simulated using the standard bodywing-tail inputs. The forward surface (canard) Is input as the wing, and the aft lifting surface as the horizontal tall. Digital Datcom checks the relathe configuration tive span of the wing and horizontal tail to determine if Is a conventional wing-body-tail or a canard configuration. 4.2.3

Configuration Build-up Considerations Section 3.5 describes multiple case control cards which simplify inputs There are a few items to keep in

for parametric and configuration build-ups. mind.

The effect of omitting an input variable or setting its value to zero may not be the same, since all inputs are initialized to "UNUSED," I.OE-60 for CDC computers. However, the "UNUSED" value may be used to give the effect of an input variable being omitted. For example, if XSHARP" in namelist WGSCHR was specified in a previous SAVE case, a subsequent case
could specify "KSHtARP -, I.OE-60" (for CDC computers) which would res,,lt in

KSHARP being omitted in the subsequent case.

In many places Digital Datcom For example, the

Suses

the presence of a namelit for program control.

program assumes a body has been input if the namelist BODY exists In a case. The effects of a presence of a namelist, through case input or a SAVE card, cannot be eliminated even if all input values are set to "UNUSED. The only exception to this rule Involves high-lift and control input. list Either nameIn a case SYMFLP or ASYFLP may be specified in a case, but not both.

85

_

_

_

2

sequence involving namelist SYMFLP and a SAVE card, followed by another case
where ASYFLP is specified, the ASYFLP analysis will be performed and the previous SYMFLP input ignored. 4.3 DYNAMIC DERIVATIVES Digital Datcom computes dynamic derivatives for body, and wing-body-tall speeds. speeds. tives. In configurations for subsonic, wing, wing-body,

transonic, and supersonic

addition,

body-alone derivatives are available at hypersonic

, There is

no special namelist input associated with dynamic derivaSection 3.5 will initiate

Use of the DAMP control card discussed In If

computation.

experimental data are input, the dvnamlc derivative methods Dynamic derivative solutions are

will employ the relevant experimental data. provided

for basic geometry only, and the effects of high-lift and control

devices are not recognized. The experimental data option of the program permits the user to substiLute experimental data for key static stability parameters wing-body CL, involved etc. in Any

dynamic derivative solutions such as body CL, improvement in improvenent in

the accuracy of these parameters will produce significant the dynamic stability estimates. Use of experimental data

substitution for this purpose is 4.4 TRIM OPTION

strongly recommended.

Digital Dstcom provides a trim option that allow users to obtain longitudinal trim data. wing or tail Two types of capability are provided: control device on Trim

(Section 3.4) and the all-movable horizontal stabilizer. is

with a control 8evice on the wing or tail

activated by the presence of the in the same

samelist SYNFLP (Section 3.4) and TRIM control card (Section 3.5) case.

Output consists of aerodynamic increments associated with each flap similar output is provided at trim deflection angles. The trim

deflection; output is

generated as follows:

the undeflected total configuration moment

at each angle of attack is from SYMFLP input. deflection angle

compared with the incremental moments generated the corresponding

Once the incremental moment is matched, Is the trim deflection angle.

The trim deflection is then

used as the independent variable in table look-ups for the remaining increments, such as CL and CD 1 . The user should specify a liberal range of flap

deflection angles when using the control device trim option.

86

_

_

_

_.

_

_.

_

_4.

....

...

body data are used in wing-body and wing-body-tail calculations. and the "experimental" data required. configuration analyses. namelist EXPRnn. Datcom require user supplied data to complete the calculations. and CD can be calculated given. Experimental data are input via All specified parameters must be based on the same reference area and length used by Digital Datcom.g. The additional transonic data that can be are defined in Figure 10. 87 . coefficient is 2 although methods are supplied ubing experiat each angle of mental data substitution./CL and CDL/CL not available for CL. In the transonic Mach regime. methods are given that define wing Ck..5 SUBSTITUTION OF EXPERIMENTAL DATA Users have the option of substituting certain experimental data that The experimental data are the will be used used in in lieu of Digital Datcom results. attack for which CL is calculated.. If the wing lift C..4. some Datcom methods are available that For example. Figure 11. subsequent e.

89 ~j:~* . It effect output may be obtained at a maximum of ten different ground heights. on either If a wing or wing- the wing or horizontal tail. body case is However. gible when the ground height exceeds the wing span. jet power.SECTION 5 ADDITIONAL CONFIGURATION MODELING TECHNIQUES 5. and pitching moment Ground coefficients that include the effects of power or ground proximity. Multiple-device analysis must be performed manually Symmetrical and asymmetrical a wing-body-horizontal-tail case is input. respectively. Analysis is limited to either symmetrical or asymmetrical results in any one case. and ground proximity on the subsonic longitudinal-stability JETPWR. The required data are input via namelists GRNDEF and SYMFLP. may interchange symmetrical and Only one control device. The effects of results are input via namelists PROPWR. flap input automatically refers to the wing geometry.1 HIGH-LIFT AND CONTROL CONFIGURATIONS Control-device input data for symmetrical and asymmetrical deflections are contained in namelist SYMFLP and ASYFLP. asymmetrical analyses from case to case. with the exception Jet flap analysis assumes the flaps are on the wing and the increments are for a wing-body configuration. drag. No distinction is made between high lift devices and control For instance. trim data may be obtained with any devices within the program. may be analyzied per case. Multiple case runs involving SAVE cards. should be noted that the effects of ground height usually become negliThe effects of ground proximity on a wing-body configuration with symmetrical flaps can be calculated for as many as nine flap deflections at each ground height.2 device for which the pitching moment increment is output. flap input data refer to the horizontal tail. flap analyses (namelists SYMFLP and ASYFLP) are not performed in the hypersonic speed regime (hypersonic flap effectiveness inputs are made via namelist HYPEFF).~> \ . POWER AND GROUND EFFECTS Input parameters required to calculate the effects of propeller power. by using the experimental-data input option. 5. of leading edge flaps. Output consists of lift. power or ground proximity on the subsonic longitudinal stability results may be obtained for any wing-body or wing-body-horizontal tail-and/or verticaltail configuration. and GRNDEF. if run.

The free stream Mach number. and Cm and the A flat plate equipped with a transverse-jet control system and corresponding input data requirements for namelist TRNJET is shown in Figure 21.5 FLAP CONTROL EFFECTIVENESS AT HYPERSONIC SPEEDS A flat namelist plate with a flap control is HYPFLP. derivatives CL. CN. and pressure are defined via namelist FLTCQN.3 LOW-ASPECT-RATIO WING OR WING-BODY The Datcom provides special methods to analyze low aspect ratio wing and wing-body combinations Parameters (lifting-body vehicles) in the subsonic speed regime. f 90 4 --- - . necessary. Estimates for the required control force can be The calculated by the program and made on the assumption that the center of pressure is at the nozzle. Reynolds number. 5. predicted center of pressure location is obtained by dumping the JET array. Force and moment data are dimensional flow field. CA. required to calculate the subsonic longitudinal and lateral bodies are input via namelist LARWB. shown in Figure 22 along with input predicted assumming a two- If the calculated center of pressure a refinement of input data may be location disagrees with the assumption. Digital Datcom results for lifting output provides longitudinal coefficients CL. Oblique shock relations are used in describing the flow field.5.4 CMO. Cy6. 5.r . Figure 3. and Cy TRANSVERSE-JET CONTROL EFFECTIVENESS CD.

. tion angle. all results high lift related aerodynamic data: and control effectiveness at hypersonic speeds.1 Definitions of the output notations are given below. reference parameters. array dumps.. limlied symbolically. .. An example of this output is shown in Figure 25. ALTITUDE . . S• ia • m i ii i m . . and specific aero- dynamic characteristics as a function of angle of attack and/or flap deflecSeparate output formats are provided for the following sets of static. 6.SECTION 6 DEFINITION OF OUTPUT Digital Datcom results are output at the Mach numbers specified in namelist FLTCON. . 6. ness. .Altitude (if calculated.Mach at which output was calculated. and supple- mental user-specified case identification information if the CASEID control Reference parameters and flight-condition output are defined as follows: MACH NUMBER . related output sets are given. FLTCON.2 o Reference Parameters the type of vehicle configuration (e. . At each Mach number. . user-specified o in namelist FUTCON.1. user input) at which Reynolds number was This optional pa ameter is user specified in namelist This parameter is or calculated from the altitude 91 °A * . trim option. . output consists of a general heading. 6. the version of Datcom from which the program and consists of the following: or wing-body) card is used. .. and velocity inputs. longiti-dinal and lateral stability... derivatives. . . information is contained in the cutput heading body alone General Headings Case identification methodologies are derived. is input error messages. dynamic and control. . are presented in the stability axis coordinate system.. transverse-jet effectiveSince computer output definitions for the output symbols used within the The Datcom engineering synbol follows the Unless otherwise no:ed.g. .. . output symbol notation when appropriate. F for which aerodynamic characteristics are output.1 STATIC AND DYNAMIC STABILITY OUTPUT The primary outputs of Digital Datcom are the stazic and dynamic stability data for a configuration..1.

U I P to UP . *... j .j *. 3 a ).l If...-'i * ' UD WOW *00*r ..10 *0 00 1 110 ! 0 a I Ow * * " ""U uuu U 0dI Val' :W an le 2 j Igin C too - . . i.f..a m amt In Is.\' .. ~ too '1 3 :• a~ 6 IS--@d~Ai' ~ 92 . 4 a as. a . a vp ernef U.O .-.o.....

Freestream atmospheric pressure at which output was calculated (function of altitude). It is .o VELOCITY . OPTINS or is equal to the planform area of the theoretical wing. specified in namelist FLTC0N.LONG. .LAT. o REFERENCE LENGTH .Digit'' -bo user-specified (or computed) jatcom aerodynamic characteristics are based It is either user-specified in namelist rpfr:rnce area. output as XCG (HORIZ) o 6..i±n parameter is number per unit length anO is namelist FLTC0N. Aerodynamic characteristics that are available as output from Digital Datcom are presented in Table 2 as a function of vehicle configuration and speed regime. the user should consult the 93 --------r~ r.3 ALPHA .1. It is user-specified in namelist SYNTHS and user specified .-. - REFER"NCE LENGTH .This is In namelist FLTC0N.The moment reference center location for vehicle moments (and rotations). AREA .The Digital Datcom yawing-moment and namelist OPTINS or is set equal rolling-moment derivatives are based on this reference length.. which output was calculated (function of altitude). o MOMENT REF. o REYNOLDS NO.. This parameter can also be user specified in namelist FLTCON. fied in The Digital Datcom pitching moment coefficient is based on this reference length. CENTER . The angles are expressed in degrees.-v~.This flight condV.Freestream velocity (if' user input) at which Mach number and Reynolds number was calculated. either user-specified in to the wing span. I the angle-of-attack array that is Static Longitudinal and Lateral Stability Not all of the static aerodynamic characteristics shown in Figure 25 are calculated for each combination of vehicle configuration and speed regime. o TEMPERATURE . and ZCG (VERT). This optional parameter is user o PRESSURE . . Additional constraints are imposed on some derivatives. It is either user-speciequal to the mean aerodynamic chord namelist 0PTINS or is of the theoretical wing. o REF. because Datcom methods are not always available.-. This parameter can also the Reynolds in be user specified in namelist FLTC0N.Freestream atmospheric temperature a.

Vehicle (body axis) normal-force coefficient based'on the reference area and presented as a function of angle of attack. gravity. the value(s) define the aerodynamic-center location. is an up acting load. Xc.Derivative of lift output versus angle of attack. i. or for those cases where pitching moment (Cm)is not computed. value of CDo is o available to calculate CDo but not to calculate CD versus a. is a location forward of the center of output is given only for the first angle of attack. CD is positive when the drag is an aft acting load.CD Vehicle drag coefficient based on the reference area and If Datcom methods are the users option (see Section 3. is o positive when the normal force is in the +Z direction.Methods Summary in book. - Vehicle pitching-moment coefficient based on the reference Positive pitching moment causes a nose-up vehicle area and longitudinal reference length and presented as a function of angle of attack. rotation.Cm coefficient based on the reference area and CL is positive when presented as a function of angle of attack. The distance between Refer to Figure 5 for X-axis definition. CA .CA .Vehicle (body axis) axial-force coefficient based on the reference area and presented as a function of angle of attack. o Section I of the USAF Stability and Control Datcom Hand- The stability derivatives are expressed per degree or per radian at CD . CLA .Vehicle lift the lift o CM . these values correspond When a single value of curve. 94 // / . this oustput is the CLa is output at the first linear-lLrt-region derivative. CLa is based on the reference area. the printed as output at the first alpha.CL . coefficient with respect to alpha.p. o CN .5). is iZ. Figure 5 for Z-axis definition. Refer to CA positive when the axial force is in the +X direction.p.. CL . XCP the vehicle moment reference center and the center of pressure divided by the longitudinal refer- "ence length. is 0 C•. e dCm/dCL .p. - presented as a function of angle of attack.e. Xc.(XCG-Xac) o If CL.CL3 .CN . to numerical derivatives of the lift 4agle of attack. If Positive Xc.

o CMA respect Cm - Derivative of the pitching-moment coefficient with If Cma is output versus angle of attack. attack. See the Datcom Handbook. basea on the reference area and longitudinal reference length. is defined independent of the angle of angle of attack.1.Cna .4 Dynamic Derivatives Not all of the dynamic derivatives shown in Figure 25 are calculated for each combination of vehicle configuration and speed regime because of Datcom limitations. based on the reference area and lateral reference length. is When a single value of Cm. values correspond curve. When a single value of qH/q. Downwash angle has the same algebraic sign as the lift coefficient. Section 1. the freestream value presented as a function of angle of attack. Positive downwash implies that the local angle of attack of the horizontal tail is less than the free-stream angle of attack. Ratio of dynamic pressure at the horizontal tail to is output at the first angle of attack. the to alpha. to numerical derivatives of the pitching-moment output at the first angle Cm.Derivative of rolling-moment coefficient with respect presented as a function of angle of attack.*H . is this output is of attack. Aerodynamic characteristics that are available as output from Digital Datcom are presented in Table 2 as a function of vehicle configuration and speed regime. is sideslip angle. o CYB - Cy -. o output is When Cna is defined independent of angle of Cne is angle of attack. output is printed at the first based on the reference area. attack. o D(EPSLON)/D(ALPHA) )e/aa Derivative of downwash angle with respect D(ALPHA) to angle of attack. io EPSLON . Cy. o CNB . is output at the first When a single value of D(EPSLON)/ angle of attack. it corresponds to the linear-lift-region derivative.Downwash angle at horizontal tail expressed in degrees. this output is the linear-lift-region value. based on the reference area and lateral reference length.qH/qO- printed at the first CLB .Cia . to sideslip angle Ck o is Q/QINF . for additional 95 / . the linear-lift-region derivative. Derivative of side-force coefficient with respect to When Cy.Derivative of yawing-moment coefficient with respect to sideslip angle. 6.

Cn/)(pb/2V0 ) .CLq . users option (see Section 3.'A .Cyp = CNP . .5).Vehicle pitching derivative based on 0 the product of reference area and the square of the longitudinal reference length.C*.Vehicle rolling derivative based on the product of reference area and lateral reference length. o o CLQ . radian at the. o o CLAD .. -cp C/U(pb/2V o) . dCt/((rb/2V ) .Vehicle rolling derivative based on 0 the product of reference area and the square of the lateral reference V r 6.Vehicle rolling derivative based on the 00 product of reference area and the square of the lateral reference length.1CL/a(&c/2V 0 ) .restrictions.CI length.Vehicle pitching derivative based on reference length.Vehicle yawing derivative based on the 0 product of reference area and the square of the lateral reference length.aCL/a(qc/2Vo) the product of reference area and longitudinal "CQ . o CNR .Vehicle rolling derivative based on 0 the product of reference area and the square of the lateral reference o o CYP . CHAD . o CLR .C.Cmq = aCm/a(qE/2V o) .5 and/or control devices.) . Users are urged to conoult the Datcon for limitations and constraints imposed upon these characterlitics. and asymmetrical control surfaces.Cap = length. Dynamic stability derivatives are expressed per degree or per .Cnr = aCn/I(rb/2V o) .1. High Lift and Control This output consists of two basic categories: of high lift symmetrical deflection Cy/a(pb/2Vo. 96 K.Vehicle acceleration derivative based 0 on the product of reference area and longitudinal reference length.CL& . o CLP . obtained' from symetrical flap analysis are as follows.Vehicle acceleration derivative based on the product of reference area and the square of the longitudinal reference length.) .aCm//(&c/2Vo. The high lift/control data follow the same sign convention as the static aerodyAvailable output is presented In Table 3 as a function of speed regime and control type. Output namic coefficients.

L Left lifting surface streamwise control deflection Values in this array are Positive trailing edge down. surface deflection valid Based length. . the flap trailing edge down.ACL Incremental lift coefficient in the linear-lift anglesurface.r. Based on of-attack range due to deflection of control reference o D(CM) area and presented as a function 4 of deflection angle. Incremental maximum-lift coefficient. 97 . D(CL) .. ScCc.. . Values of this array are user-specified namelist SYMFLP.Ch 6 . aL.ACLmax - on reference o D(CD MIN) area and presented as a function of deflection angle.. Based . Positive in edge down.. o (CH)D . ACM - Incremental p tching-moment coefficient due to control in the linear lift angle-of-attack range.o DELTA trailing 6f - Control-surface streamwise deflection angle.Output obtained from asymmetrical 6 control surfaces are given below. Left and right are related to a forward facing observer: o DELTAL angle. Incremental minimum drag coefficient due to Based on reference area and presented as . o. user-specified in namelist ASYFLP. o D(CDI) . translated function of based on reference area and presented as a deflection angle. o (CH)A Cha Control-surface hinge-moment derivative due to angle of attack based on the product of the control surface area and the control surface chord. A positive hinge moment will tend to rotate the flap trailing edge down.ACDi Incremental induced-drag coefficient dt:e to flap area and presented as a function of deflection based on reference angle-or-attack and deflection angle. o D(CL MAX) on the product of reference area and longitudinal reference Output is a function of deflection angle. o (CLA)D surface (CLa)6 Lift-curve slope of the deflected. a function of deflection angle.'CDmin control or flap deflection.Control-suarface hinge-moment derivative due to control based on the product of the control surface area and the A positive hinge moment will tend to rotate deflection control surface chord.

Ct .1.q are input via namelist ASy. i.6 Trim Option Th.e.Incremental yawing-moment coefficient due to asymetrical deflection of control surface based on the product of reference area and lateral reference length.Incremental rolling . coefficients CD.ds/c . user-specified in namelist ASYFLP. "o XS/C 1ip. The trim calculations assume unaccelerated flight. - xs/c .. "o DD/C ASYFLP. "o DS/C . Positive yawing moment is nose right. CL. wing-body-tail CD and CL with stabilizer at___ trim deflection angl-. "o CN .Cn . and the hinge-moment coefficient. f•. Cm. pitching moment is set to zero without accounting for any contribution from a non-zero pitch rate. Digital Datcom trim option provides subsonic ionefrudhnal characteristics at the calculated trim deflection angle of the control evice.moment coefficient due to Positive rolling aoment asymmetrical deflection of control surface based on the product of reference area and lateral reference length. hs/c . and the hinge moment coefficient. Positive hinge moment will tend to rotate the stabilizer leading edge up and 98 •- "N :"__. trailing edge down. ASYFLP.Projected height of spoiler measured from and normal Values in this array are input via namelist "o HS/I - to airfoil mean line.Projected height of spoiler control. array are input via namelist ASYFLP. 6.Streamwise distance from wing leading edge to spoiler Values in this arr.FLP. Figure 19. Additional Digital Datcom symbols used in output are as follows: ao H1 . Cm.___ __ * I Il l' I Ir l l i r . stabilizer trim incidence and trimmed stabilizer coefficients CD. 6d/c - Projected height of deflector for spoiler-slotValues in this array are input via namelist Values in this deflector control.Right lifting-surface streamwise control deflection Values in this array are angle."o DELTAR - 6 R . "o (CL) ROLL . is right wing down.Stabilizer hinge-moment coefficient. Positive trailing edge down. CL. the stati. Trim output is also provided for an all-movable horizontal These data include untrimmed stabilizer stabilizer at subsonic speeds. based on the product of reference area and longitudinal reference length.

• say specify laminar or turbulent The transverse control jet method requires a user-specified time history of local flow parameters and control force required to trim or maneuver. and basic configuration geometric properties.. Typical output is shown in for transonic fairings and intermediate data that require user supplied Figure 26.o ALIHT - Stabilizer incidence tequired to trim expressed in degrees. With these data. 6. are transverse-jet control and flap effectiveness.g.g. boundary layers.8 Auxiliary and Partial Output Auxiliary outputs consist of arag breakdown data.1.ai.5 times the aft lifting-surface span do not explicitly provide estimates for either the downwash angle or gradiant. and center-of-prissure These data are found from the local pressure distribution~s on the regions forward of the flap. 6. location. is trailing edge down.:'. The canard effective downwash angle and gradient are defined as downwash data required to produce the correct wing-body-tall lift characteristics when applied to conventional 99 C /CL). Positive incidence. This minimum jet plenum pressure is then employed to calculate the nozzle throat diameter and the jet plenum pressure and propellant weight requirements to trim or maneuver the vehicle. flap and in associated hinge moments. However. The user. Partial outputs consist of component and vortex data Typical output interference factors. effect of geometric parameters (e. dihedral and wing twist) on static and dynamic characteristics.1. i *~* .estimates for separation induced-pressures reattachement on the flap.. The analysis includes the effects This is done by providforward of the flap and of flow separation due to windward flap deflection.1. jet plenum pressure necessary to induce separation is calculated. data to complete (e. the minimur. They Data output from the hypersonic flap methods are incremental n. can be seen in example problem 10. or deflection.and axial-force coefficients. canard effective downwash.7 The all-movable horizontal stabilizer trim output is Vesented as a Control at Hype. Digital Datcom provides effective" values fcr these quantities. function of angle of attack 6.9 Effective Dowrwash Datcom methods for configurations where the forward lifting-surface span is less than 1. in.sonc Speeds Two types of control analyses are available at hypersonic speeds.

~ 3.00 *755EVI0 QUARTER CHORD SIHAC) *. RODY-WI'dC-NORIZONTAL TAIL DATA FAIRING.B/CL 57E7 CDL/CtL4 FORCE BRE..4#.9 LAR .7d7E.4 (CLR/CLIMNY.0OS PRC . .74361-02 ICLA/CLIHPS *RWING-BODY OATA PAIRINfl ICLO/CLIN.NODYTCAL TAIL-NONIZONTAL TAIL CONFIGURATION CONEIGSRATIV1ONC PUILDup... .S I - .176900.I1.4 .73EY* INA)N.01 4s. LONG.4 .4.I.0" INTERPOLATION TARLE CL-ALPNA .CONFI URNATION AUXILIARY AND PARTIAL DOTPS? WINC-DODY-VERATICAL TAIL-HORIZONTAI..* 6.8RN7r.J66AE*0 4981.0M9 ZERO LIFE DRAG .ISRE-03 (CMA)M._CASE I -----REFE--E--E----MEN----Y CONDITIONS F..07L"1.34 5C-I .1337-I .)707E.-.5.OI OUARTER CHORD SWEEP 4).61. REYNOLDS TEMPERATURE PRESSURE VLOITY VERT NORI? LAT. I/.9E-02 K-I ).DI de.414 . FT FT* 4.I.00 &AS? ANON .7CC 1.-fij XCC RELATIVE TO THEORETICAL LEAVING EDIGE MAC- .I.CL .000 * j.C.0)I. .7)79C-04 APSE DRAG .5:1 C I AHR 1.IEY0 164E 1)0 X/CRW A/BR . APRIL 1976 VERSION OF DATCOM AUSI 1SRTON LIANY AND PARTIAL OUT .C .76 N INC DATA PAININO * -.2.00 ZERO tF? DPAý FRICTION COEPFICIFNT .6C '~7 ...Ron AUTOMATED STABILITY AND CONTROL METHODS PER APRIL 1976 VERSION OF DATCOO CrCNEIIGURATIONAUXILIARY AND PARTIAL OUTPUT NING-NODY-VERETICAL TAIL-HONIOONTAL TAIL CONFIGURATION CONEIGSNATION_ RUILDUP. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3.4 -.0 d*74901S VIMAC) .4967E.443E-03 CLA-RI'!).3J3 ASPECT RATIO .ZONTAL TAIL DATA PAtINING CL /CL * .l:.II FORC tRA 9AC CLRF (ITHSEP MACHIA) 1.06 ATTD r( FT.. .5 CLA A I : ..10C .C.*I..Aj6O .JNAE )1 .7^r j.O BASIC PLANPORM PROPERTIES AREA WING TOTAL THFORITICAL TOTAL EXPOSED MNOR2ONTAL TAIL TOTAL TREORITICI TOTL EXPOSED VErTICAL TAIL TOT AL THtMAITIrAL TOTAL EXPOSED .379-0. LONG..*81 3..0J49-01 MC ALITD RUNNERg FT .I*INE-711 CLAMR MACHIN) . CENT!R IiEEEREHCE LENGTH REYNOLDPIEP.C.428 .R.FT DEC A LR/rT--4 FT/SEc .Id4 CLAMA * 1307E-01 MACMIA) .609..4496C-03 CLB/CLIN. i7N12z VET Ft PT/AEC f. PRE'r.CIl -..E+00 .CL@/CLIM. -PICTION DRAG .O- . 1..6 . TEMPERATURE PRESSUPRE VELOITY VENT NONI? LAT. 4771E-C.60 ?Cc 0.0.5 1 4D.91E-C.6EI .600 J.1961f.0 .I : 30E*I +RD .... "RUpNERA E-I CLA-RIWI.4 *N* *** ORI."54 .. 6.9o.S78E-C* I..9 S8EII .I..777E-03 CLA-WIRI* CLA-NINI- 3.)I .05 .I1.4171E.I.100 d..600 0..147tt- IC4 C P0 NORIJONTAL TAIL-RODS DATA PARIMING * -.AEI -WB* 5NI.r CENTER PREfFRECE LENGTH RE.INNNE-c.331-03 .OCI 4. AREA FT FT FT FT FT--4 I/FT DEC N FT/sEC LA/FT--d O.1 TAPER RATIO .76detYc .4 1.1.41(SIE. 1.946-04 JI4- .0j DEC It I/F'T rT4FT FT El' FT .34EZ-13 .6 . CENTE REYNOLDS VEOIY PR/ECSURt TEMPtRATURE NUH ATIUE NUER mu~pp AREA LONG.100 ..150 4N.6 .SSREDRAG jg9o.1. LT.4 0 INTERNPOLATION TABLE CL-ALPHA . 478E.flI . AREA NURMNP FT FT FT.564 1..EIXARIIE PROBLEM 3I CASEI --.9039E-"..931 DRAG DIVERGENCE MACN NUMPER*C~ O M4ACN . 0lfCL6/CLIN."5)9t.AK MACH NUMBER DMAO SWEEP) . 9NRE-II CLR/CL *-.oI 0CC J. LIFE-CURVE-SLOPE MAC" 1.331E.66NE0 *379e:. .0 MA NA PRINTED WHEN NETHOD WR? APPLICABLE. (WITH SWEEP) :9730E*7 FORCF BREAK M4ACMNRUNNER ZUMER SWEEP) RO FORCE BREAK MAN . TAIL CONdFIGURATIO CoE P'GURATIOR @UILDOSI'. ._CASE 1 Os -----REFERENCE DINENSIO -----.1.01 ~ NA .14011-01 . ------F--:O~ CONDITIONS LIGHT MOMERT oRE.3. AOE7 LIFT-CURVE-SLOPE MACH 7-..-.6r. 9..* ..11971-ý'l .401 :171 E-OI 4l.400ce.77F-t..I 4. EtI *JE7 444E~f7I .0.'I FIGURE 26 EXAMPLE AUXILIARY AND PARTIAL OUTPUT 100 .4 KN(I 0.UT COF WIMG.0t.J984E-OI . 5SE0 CL.. ---orepC DImEr4ioH': ---tr REP FEIRENCE LENGTH P0MPH?1 REP.AUTOMATED STADILITY AND CONTROL METHODS PER AP'RIL I91ý V ERSION#OP DA1'IOM .3430.GOT MOMEHT EP. AUTOMATED STABILITY AND CONTROL METHODS PER.37t 00 5 MA UBR CDL/CL3.4 * I ICLS/.OFLICUT CONDITIONS .0(cC BASIC BODY PROPERTIES WETTED AREA .i7.nI .R/FT.*ECI . rxAMP LE PRORLEM ).71CN-14 CLP/CL *-..

CONERR the right of the card.input diagnostics This information falls into extrapolation and error analysis.2. The effective downwash angle. is found by equating the right hand sides of Datcom equations 4. and control cards and flags any errors. sis will abort only those cases missing an essential namelist.1.1. Additional output cards.5).5.1 An Input Error Analysis input diagnostic module (CONERR) checks all data in the input This module CONERR head- stream prior to execution checks all namelist of any other Digital Datcom module.1. are listed written and any cards containing immediately to All input cards errors have the appropriate message An explanation of the seven Table 14. the type of extrapolation that was used to generate 101 .5. listing of the case In addition to these available an optional input namelist data is by using the NAMELIST control card (see Section 3. 6.5.2-b. the resultant value of the dependent variable. ins 4. equating the right The effective downwash gradient.2 Extrapolation Messages This analyThe messages Extrapolation messages are produced when the independent variable range of the Datcom figures (nomagraphs/design mesages charts) have been exceeded. the independent variable values currently being used. 6. data blocks are output prior to the conventional aerodynamic characteristics output. additional input error analysis is conducted to insure that all namelists essential to the case are present. and Airfoil Section Module output. A list of the arrays and variables stored in each data block is presented in Appendix C. warning messages.1. outputs. that can be produced by this analysis are given in Table 15.1-a and 4.1-b. dE/d t. is found by hand sides of Datcom equat E.5.2. three categories: . messages that can be generated by CONERR are given in will not correct any errors and the program will attempt to execute each case using the data as input by the user. 6. Prior to case execution. may be obtained is by using the DUMP and PART control the contents of user specified When the DUMP option exercised. ings and error messages are designed to be self explanatory.2 DIGITAL DATCOM SYSTEM OUTPUT Execution of Digital Datcom will produce a series of messages and data in addition to the results previously discussed. the dependent variable.configuration equations. These identify the number of the figure involved.2-a and 4.

.JJi c9U z 0 LLJJWco CD -(J. <~ La >- < ý"u () La J 0 to -A LJ CD 0 La L _ ... ci 0L ()AW~' L.Q. w < - (.3 L = 00 . i 1 --- ~ 1/)) ..jL' C4 0 < '. 0 O O M 4 0 z1 Lli' 102 . L 0~ L/ ~ L~~*- <1WL L&. = U.

w~ -LI -j & < SLA ILuCl.. . LA.w Or. = = L C _________ca____________0___Lai_____________x_____3_ 4A z ~~ cl - .1 ci <U uC A . LA- -A ..L >#A - CL I.CA:c 0 z zX LuI 1-- LI 10.I - aa. - Ii.Lu C)LLA.ILL -- U.) I ( tA -i i W1.Zni w II -- m - I O z a aA Ica 0 0 xII LU -z W%0 z. - CL u a.j -wI CAl. L -CD #A -CD LuA CL Lcfl cn u< La2 Z 0.0 .0 4A u < 2)2 Lu- 4A -J. Cie. - ul -i Lu 9 -j uI <a ' 4A 4 z LuJ 0 0 - ~ w inCA m. .. W* a. LI. : =Zii.-~ I-- :)t. J ...>L In (4 4c IL Lu a's. :It - 0ui ainz >- cij LIzz vi L ? ~ a Lu LL ZILL. L.D LL0L rI.i w -0r 4A .~I us -L a wO.c 3 A zx LA 0 02 W Ln 4 Lu : <4 I~ ~ < 4A I AU 103 L. . a. ciLu I-L I-0< . 0 z Z CL.1 LuJ 44 .JLI =j LI: 41 (fl w :E LiZu 4. w Lui C. 0 uI wu cc:2 LIK 4 L zu w~j II u I. LuJL I--IA 0 LALI LA ILu z z zz z zz z zz< x -in th Ln 0 z I L u w = ua 4A La Lu ca w2 n LuA I- 0= - C---Lu LuLu) l I-J CfL in 4C in-L xD2 w ZN >I n0 Lu L 2I LL. 00 0: CD w .J Un CLC Lu XD ccW LII< u inJ Lu Lu X. -L- L. a ~ 1%1. < 4 LU Z V)1< Z2< -~ I--. Lu0 <za -j g. Li WL.tU co #A LIJ 44 4A Wu (A W =.0 4L uA 0l r. Ix z LI W zj LI. Ca.7 -c CA LA.

ierated.2.3 Airfoil Section Module The Airfoil Section Module is teristics are to be calculated. The messages are listed at the end of the case interpretation is illustrated in Figure 27. the program. 104 _____ . At the conclusion of the case they are read and sorted In this way all extrapolations module are output are not together for by figure number within each program overlay. of the table look-up routine and the subroutine that contains They are printed primarily to alert users when the normal limiý the user can determine the Datcom figures has been exceeded so that credibility of the results.and the name of the figure. executed whenever airfoil section charac- Output consists of section coordinates and a listing of the calculated section characteristics. extrapolation messages necessarily output in their order of occurance in 6. output. for a single figure Note produced that these in a method convenience. Extrapolation message The extrapolation mesages are written to a computer system "scratch tape" as they are ge.

o0 .4 (dl%) limits shown.50603E-O1 LINEAR QUADRTIC LAST VAL GUADRTIC I. l. 1. EXTRAPOLATION MESSAGE SUMMARY OVERLAY FIGURE NUMBER SUBROUTINES 5. . From Step 1 determine the variable that relates the sub-figures (a). Associate the Datcom figure X3. If 01. '][" -<7AA Step 2. Oft.II. N-.1.N - o "' 0 1 - 0 A.OOE+O0 0..*3ft 16A. 1. In this exaimple: - """0041 -- Xl corresponds to A X2 corresponds to A c/2 X3 X corresponds to X -0 N -• .31203E+00 8 Datcom figure 5.0OEO00 8. I. (b).002 .. . performed between figures (a) Extrapolate the variables the message..27. 5. ThusInterpolationis and (b). within the a -1 40 00 n limits. interpolation between two of the figures may be required. 1 -- - -- this variable lies. .The following example is a hypothetical extrapolation warning message created to illustrate the Digital Datcom technique. SUISO#IC wwED lower and upper limit values with the * ( ( ... X2. A or X3). on the Datcom figure. .559. 1 2. FIGURE 27 EXTRAPOLATION MESSAGE INTERPRETATION 105 . . 1W1?CS - -- according to the type of extrapolation given in WINUI§UTWoITC. In this exam- table X3 StepI. FINAL RESULT XI3 TYPF OF E6TRAPOLATION (LOWER UPPER) FIGURE LIMITS (LOWER UPPER) INDEPENDENT VARITALES LAST VAL LAST VAL I. by comparing Sp variables with the Digital Datcom variables Xl.on .OOEfO1 -2. and (c).e. only figure (b) extrapolation will be demonstrated.001 0 20 A.24200E+01 *8 I 0381SE-02 8.1-27 is used to aid the extrapolation message interpretation.2. o FtGIES.OOE+O1 6 OOEfOI 6. figures (a) and (b) are extrnpolated on variables XI(A) and X2(Ac/ Since the extrapolation technique is general. .:7 TLIN3X SUPLAT . In this example 2 ).

(b) illustrating the quadrat- extrapolated X1 variable to 8. type of extrapolation. .31.4.Figure (a) is extrapolated as outlined above. *"0 . 1 1 In"•-1 . The format is as follows: 23 3 3 L. lower limit.' 40 60 1 80 [ically Cutout A shows a dashed curve added to figure Next.A1/ 2 (d~j.' for figures (a) and (b) are then used the final result to interpolate yielding .' 80OOOE+-1.06 !/ .12. 0138. lower and upper. The extrapolated values 2 4. number 0f four character words for figure number. and number independent vwriables. Subroutines and figure number Extrapolation data for each indeperdent variable: Independent variable.000lo A00001 "0 "E O .:" 2. upper limit.OE ý0 t """4 . where -l = not required 0 = use last value 1 = linear 2 = quadratic Final result End of extrapolation messages mark (written from overlay 57 prior to dump of extrapolation messages). . the dashed curve is extrapolated quadratically with a solid line to the * -* - X2 value of 62.8'31.6 of -.103o1E. FIGURE 27 EXTRAPOLATION MESSAGE INTERPRETATION Line 6: Line 7: (CONCLUSION) 1.~4.01 999999999 I0000E+01 0 0 Overlay number. CUTOUT A This extrapolation informaticn is written to logical unit 12 for processing by overlay 57. S. 3 S L IN3X P1ol . Used to signify end of extrapolation messages for the case. St. 0 ": 60000[!02 1 2 / Line 1: Line 2: Lines 3-5: 55860L+00 0.

and the com- plete output is presented in the microfiche supplement to this report. analysis at all speed regimes. 7.5 analysis 4 *This od 25Hypersonic problem illustrates the use of the CASEID.9. The paragraphs below describe each of the example problems selected for illustrating the program setup of the configurations described in Sections 4 and 5. and NEXT CASE control cards..60 0. 1 2 3 Configuration Body Body Body Mach No. 107 . Notice the concentration of Configpoints used to define curvature and abrupt changes in body contours.4 and 2. uration (c) is chosen as the Problem I example to illustrate the body alone Subsonic body analyses are obtained for an approximate axisynmmetric body and for a cambered body.60 0. 1.SECTION 7 EXAMPLE PROBLEMS Eleven sample problems have been selected to illustrate the modeling techniques described in Section 4 as well as the use of the input namelist and control cards.1 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 1 Figure 28 shows three body configurations along with selected X coordinates where shape parameters would be specified. The input data for each example problem is presented. 0. SAVE.40. DUMP CASE. A summary of the four cases in problem I is given below: Case No.1.2.5 Comments Axisymtetric solution Cambered solution Supersonic analysis at Mach. No.

868.-.96E6.3.RNNUB(1)-6.RNNUB(l) -17. .34.595. 24.0. 20.O.1. 26.O.2.334.MACH(1) u2.3.CBARR-2.0.-.08.428E6$ SOPTINS SREFs8.8.0.1.595.032.-.1. 12.868.0. 1.323.71S.-. 1.032. 258.-.11.5. P (1) 0. CASE 4 NEXT CASE 108 .138.-. CASE 2 SAVE NEXT CASE $FLTCON NMACH-3.28S $SYNTHS XCGs4.372.1. . .BLN-2.343.0 .-4.-. 59.NALPHA.-.-.0. 2. S(l).200.MACH(1).$ $BODY DSwo.805.BLA-3. 59. 93.0.0.0 .U.8E6S SAVE CASEID ASYMMETRIC (CAMBERED) BODY SOLUTION.0S CASEID HYPERSONIC BODY SOLUTION.86E6. .343.0. CASE 3 NEXT CASE 5FLTCON NMACH-1.3.3.0 .-. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 1.0. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 1.TRUE.0. .589...939.90.868.0.160.60.0.0. 16.59.ZCG--0.-.M4ACH(l)n0.46.*01. 0.1.4.*3.BLREF.61 S $BODY BNOSE-1.$FLTCON NMACH. 0. ZL(1).0.080.26.44.6.67$ CASEID APPROXIMATE AXISYMMETRIC BODY SOLUTION.RNNUB( 1)s.-.-2. 57.HYPERS-.-. CASE 1 SAVE DUMP CASE NEXT CASE $BODY ZU(1)n-.9.2.754. 1~)-0.O. 42.4E6.0.85.868$ CASEID ASYMMETRIC (CAMBERED) BODY SOLUTION.2.0.4.61.3.1.0. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 1.14.343. 26.20$ $BODY NX010. 17.5.0.0.00.883.868. 4.0.476.868.751.40..032.ALSCHD(l)'-6.343.2.3. EAAMPLE PROBLEM 1.2.61.O.

343 0.868 -08Au 0.595 -4.42 2.59 =I"3. - .533 0Ili3 0..5m 0.0 0.939 0.595 -0.2d• LBT• '' 7 (b) d : . - .0 -0.868 -0.-- .138 4.67r REFERENCE-PLANE 44 _ -0-0 4.0 2..44 0.025 0..3043 Ls5 4. 805 -0.26 I 1.61 3.59 L293 0.01 3.751 0. .286 0.57 6.323 0.93 0.754 -.0 1.di dz (a) I c • •).61 0.100 0.26 K'2A S(FT1) P(FT) R(FT) " Zo (FT) ZL (FT) t0.0 1. (c) X(FT) .589 1.032 3.rr dN.2.032 1.0 0.5.86 -0.476 -m 4.533 0.868 FIGURE 28 BODY MODELING AND EXAMPLE PROBLEM 1 BODY DATA 109 * .08 334 3.14- x BODY INFORMATION (CONFIGURATION C.334 -0.06 -0.160 0.343 -0.533 0.533 0.715 -0.61 3.424 0.186 0.032 1.

99IIf*.12.II6.0.4. I Configuration Exposed wing Mach No.2SS SSYNTHS XWa3.*.*.5ILOOP'I.IDHDADOs.@COn.1.9PPALIW*2.CAMBERU.*DHDADIa.60 Comments Straight-tapered-wing dump A array Cranked wing Double delta This problem also illustrates the control of program looping using the variable LOOP in namelist FLTCON to obtain the flight conditions. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 2.18TV~f1POCn..9.CHRDR.1.IS *WGSCHR DELTATs2.ALPHAIm-6.55$ CASEID STRAIGHT TAPERED EXPOSED WING SOLUTION# EXAMPLE PROBLEM 29 CASE I SAVE DUMP A NEXT C~ASE *FLTCON NMACH.9*eSAVSlu55.9.CMO.1 .4.127.14* $WGPLNF CHRDTP. These input variables are also summarized in Figure 30. CASE 3 110 ..*. CLMAXII)uI. The configuration analysis consists of: Case No..LOOPu2.9.SSPNEuI .61iZW2-.9.ISSPNDD-.46.22 CASEID EXPOSED CRANKED WING SOLUTION.29.TRUE.6.*262.TWISTA'*.64..2.5 2 3 Exposed wing Exposed wing 0.7.*.71S $WGPLNF SSPNOPu1 * II CHRDBP-2.0elACH(I)'*.*134.I.4*.*.0eTYPEu3..FALSE.CBARP.e.*.24.1U5eTCEFF8.4.CI4STATu*.1Z3uCLALPA(I)u.4. SSYNTHS XWx2. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 2P CASE 2 SAVE NEXT CASE $FLTCON LOOPn3.9.*.$ SWGPLNF TYPEu2.I9M90.2.Z.Z2..4*iCLIu*.4.S5.6*.1335. SWAFP*9.XCG.*.Z9*I. priate.CLAMOS. therefore average values of section data are used where approCalculation and determination of section input characteristics are from the procedure and figures of Appendix B.NALTa4.59tCHRDRaZ.59tSSPN.6*.SAVSIu75. 11.9.0. . TOVCv9. I SAVSO55~.91 .0S CASEID EXPOSED DOUBLE DELTA WING SOLUTION. ALT(l)s*.4979ZWa.ALT(I)u*.tLRs~itEO.NALTm2.9TYPEuI.40 2.2 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 2 Wing alone models for straight-tapered and nonstraight-tapered planforms The root and tip airfoil sections differ as shown in are shown In Figure 29.9.LERtu.-.6.eALSCI4D(1)0....B5.195.9S SOPTINS SREF*B.99.4. Note that cases 2 and 3 use the same inputs to FLTC0I4.I.5.HYPERS.24. but LOOP is changed from 2 to 3.9.SS SWCDSCHR TO~. * * SFLTCON NMACH.MACH(1~z9.XOVCRI. 0.491*S. NALPHAll1.60 0.BLREF.9eS.I.Z..Z.S. in Figure 30.

..U :3 4 0.-. N 4 let.? INNM - -.-- - . 00 ýJ-J ac.

- = PA A o> i1x-u U u M j 30 Q I- -4 co x w U. 4 ca w im > 0 ui~ 0 3 LU oW = a b- CD~ -1I 0.V) w zm LLI ui C0 c. ~L C. -- 112 .4)d W 0 Ci w i WI.

Configuration Wing + body + vertical-tail + horizontal-tail configuration buildup 2 3 Wing + body + vertical-tail + horizontal-tail with body and wing-body experimental data Wing + body + vertical-tail + horizontaltail + twin-vertical-panels with body and wing body experimental data 4 Wing + body + vertical-tail + horizontaltail + twin-vertical-panel + propeller power with body and wing-body experimental 5 data Wing + body + vertical-tail + horizontaltail + twin-vertical-tail + jet power with body and wing-body experimental data i 11. The tail-vertical-tail problem consists of a wing-body-horizontal configuration analyzed at a subsonic and transonic Mach numbers. The remaining cases illustrate the use of the twin vertical panel. propeller power and jet power A summary of the various configurations analyzed is presented below. The second case utilizes experimental body and wing-body data to update subsequent Digital Datcom configuration inputs.7.3 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3 Pertinent data for Example Problem 3 are presented in Figure 31. Results are obtained for various combinations of the vehicle components by using the BUILD cntion.34 / . analyses. Case 1 No.

.0.0.CLALPA(1) uO.138$ $WGPLNF CHRDTPUO.105$ - $VTPLNF CHRDTPu..60. 9..0$ $HTSCHR TOVCoO.0598.Oo$ $SYNTHS XCGo2.TYPEU1.NENGSP-1.5.0.ZCGUO.0.SSPNEu.CMAWB(1)--.CHSTATUO.10.0.SWAFPsO.$ CASEID INCLUDES BODY AND WING-BODY EXPERIMENTAL DATA.136. JETOTP=5OOO.0..DHDAOI0O.O..8.1.105$ CASEID CONFIGURATION BUILDUP. 4 .97. CLMAX(1)=.760..16.09.SSPN-.019.0.SAVSl-45..00547.CLMwul *39.136. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3.CHRDR-.2.0023.2.0$ $VTSCHR TOVCu. CMB(1)o.0*78$ $HTPLNF CHRDTP.0.40.50.-.OLERIO.NALPHAII9.3..O.038..ALPHAI-O..OTWISTA.0.DHDADOO..1.26E6.O.OXHus3.60.O.e0.O.0025.016.322.SSPt~u.40.70.0. 0.125. CASE I SAVE NEXT CASE SEXPROI CLAWB(1)=.208.SSPN.02.0.SAVSlu2U.012.28E6$ $PROPWR AIETLP-2.002.PHALOC-.NOPBPE. CLNAX(2)=0.3 .28E6..DELTAYu1. SWAPeO.ALPHAIUO.3.0.OSSPNDDO.0.AMBSTP500O.4. . 10.0.$ $OPTINS SREFs2..ZP.0.6.CHRDRu1.TRUE.0833.67.28E6$ $JETPWR AIETLJ-2.. 40.ACLmwm12.O.010.6.CLAB(1)0..RNNUB(2)u4.CNOuO.BNOSEm2.SV-.CMOwO.0.3. CASE NEXT CASE 2 f 3 4 5 114 .. X(1).DHDA00oU.064. ALPOWuO.RNNUB(1)-2.0.. 0.CBARRuO.50. CASE SAVE NEXT CASE ~$TVTPAtI SVPsO. CASE SAVE NEXT CASE $rLTCON NNACH-1.BLNul.0.460.S2.02. X~uO.LERIO. 34.RNNUB(1)u2.1.-. 35.002S.0.1S..103.VLP. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3.1.93. S(1).0.060.0.JEVLOr'0. 40.0..131..0.04.XV-3.0.0.12.O1O.0..0417.MACH(I)uO.O.CHRORU1.04E6$ $FLTCON NMACN.0.0.PHVLOC-0.1..ALPLH=6.CMAB(1)=.0. 30.0..0.131.NENGSJ=1.208..THSTCPUO.012.0491.BLA.0$ CASEID INCLUDES BODY AND WING-BODY EXPERIMENTAL DATA..JELLOC=0.. ..0.XOVC-0.46.O.63..15. 302.24. ZNGFCTU70.2.O. 4 .OOSO.5.530.AMBTMP-500.42.40.1665.JESTNP=2000.DELTAYu1.0.JEANGL=1S..MACH(1)..O.JEALOC.0.7 CLNB(1)=-.ALSCHD(1)m-2.BH-1.4g6.0$ CASEID'INCLUDES SOOY AND WING-BOO! EXPERIMENTAL DATA..039.I.OeXW=1.S CASEiD INCLUDES BODY AND WING-BODY EXPERIMENTAL DATA.165.20.0.CLAMO...0.02..0. 25. 52.THSTCJ-.97..136.CHSTATUO.30V-.60.SSPNE-.60.57. CASE SAVE NEXT CASE $rLTCON NMACHs1....36.850.0.822.30.0. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3.XOVCuO.SSPNE-1.0 LERI-.0.0220.80.178..0.0.0.CLMN. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3.0.MACH(ljh'.06.0TYPENI.346.0.0.ZW.BUILD *FrLTCON NMACHo2.JEVELOU4000. CHSTATo.CLA4Om.0993.CLALPA(1)uO.0. CDWB(1).25.43.O.004.01.YPmO.ACLMHU10.420.PALSE. ..VPflTTEu20. ALPOHSO.CLIO0.10.. JERAD*2.0206. R(1)-.CLI-O.TYPE-1 .253.O.SSPNDDUO. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3.DHDADIsO..0872.1.208.BTAILU1..0075$ $WGSCNR CLMAXL=.0130.ALIWaO.2.BAPR75U1S. 96E6.CRtOT-.0.05.$ $EXPRO2 CLAWB(1)-.0..XOVC-0.BVO.SAVSXU45.BLREFm3.060.TWISTA=O.1..0.007.008.0. .141.0.60. SWAFPUO.25.1.25.29.82.RNNUB(1)-2.MACH(1)-.. JINLTAm3..0.015. 360.PRPRADuO.ALIHsO.49.VERTUP-.007.90.OCLALPA(1)u.TWISTA=0.$ $800Y NX1lO.JIALOCmO.0575.ALPLW-S. .O$ $WGSCHR TOVCu.115.0.17S.

60.65 0.060 0.012 -0.630 0.0.34 MACH 0.04 x 106 SCHEDULED ANGLES OF ATTACK = -2.80 (CL )B0.100 FIGURE 31 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3 DATA I 115 _______ .140 0.064 0.93 R 1.016 0. 12. (Cma)B= 0.410 (CL)WB -0. 24.42 3.01! 0.083 0.50 1.012 0.020 3.822 LATERAL REF.16 450 0.0039.016 0.012 0.00 EXPERIMENTAL DATA 0.0.014 0.0.013 -0.004 0."039.80 FLIGHT CONDITIONS: MACH NUMBERS REYNOLDS NUMBERS PER FT = 2.060 0.020 0.020 0. (CLWB= 0.28 x 106.216 0.038 -0.013 -0.020 -0. LENGTH .02 28.085 0.00 WING SEM. REF.90 (Cm)WB 0.76 0.115 0.70 'V AIRFOIL NACA 65A006 NACA 65A006 NACA 63A009 REFER TO INPUT DATA FOR BODY AND PROPELLER POWER DATA.0.019 0. LENGTH = 3.0. 0. 0.110 0.013 0.032 O.015 0.849 0.0.115 0. 16.002 +0.010 0.420 450 1.29 0.010 -0.0575. R -2.67 0.005 (CL)B (Cm) 8 -0.141 0.020 0.002.1 I 1X.047 0.52 0. 2.015 0.05c 0.346 0.47 0. (Cma) = 0.0 0.81 0.0078 0.0 REFERENCE PARAMETERS: REFERENCE AREA = 2.0.SPAN EXPOSED SEMISPAN ct HORIZONTAL TAIL VERTICAL TAIL 0.25 LONG.60 CG j MACH= 0.012 0.020 0.008 0. 3. (Cm )WB = -0.0 -0. 1 (CL )wO = 0.060 (CD)B 0.014 0.0.004 0.010 0.0.0.302 0. 20.012 0.0078 0. 8.030 0.002.23 0.253 1.165 (CD)WB 0.013 0.60 (CLA)e ALPHA -2 0 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 (CD)B 3.010 0.038 0.0 0. 4.

2.1138.752.ZCG-0.T.SSPNn2.4170$ CASEID BODY PLUS WING PLUS CANARD.229.35l.2.0.$ $OPTXNS SREr-64.CHRDRog. SWAFPSO. 40.2. CHROTPs3.21.3. R(lJ-0.6U6.30$ $BODY NX-19.SSPNOO.BTAIL-2.951. CASE 2 NEXT CASE 116 I _____________________________________________________________. .ZW-0.036.0.1.ALSC.52.22..DHDADI=. nonzero inpuLs.0ONALPHA-5.4.4.1. 15.32.8.2.BNOSE-2.22.87. 02.SSPNE"6.13.CHSTATuO.0.0.6.TWzsTA-0.5. 21.0oDHoADOx.NALPHA-.30.11. SEXT(1) -73.841.14. 1.0. factor.SAVSl. 6 SEXT(1)w6.05.37.0. 053.SSPNDD-.11.675.DHDADO.O.o0$ $WGPLNF CHRDTP-0.1.MACHC1)mO.. - SUAFPUO.0$ SWGPLNF CHRDTP-0.SCALE-0.5 6 1.48.052.SSPN-B.293.752.439.NALT-l.5.J1.0.229.O.auPEF. .1..13.C5.0.072.0.1.0.O.5044.oHOADOO.36d.0.01.451.1.33. 49.TYPC. 44.73.2.2.0.439.975..76.0.198.SSPN.$ $SYNTHS XW=8.19.14.074.0.0. 4.64.2 1 ..94.1.36. 53 .0U9..60.0.62. RNNUB(i)n3. . S.487.SSPNOD-0.ZCGO.420.89.293.9.13..613..60..0. 47..89.0$ $BODY NX.8913.4. 1 4 12.CBARRSS.801.$ NACA-W-S-3-30.o451. $FLTCON NMACHN.677.*5-20.4.4O(l)u0.2.SSPNEw... Airfoil Section Nodule airfoil vehicle supersonic ordinate.68. In this example a wing-body-canard configuration is analyzed in the subsonic Canard and wing section data are calculated using the (Appendix B).0O.0.1.BTAlL.82.20.15.0.15. and use of metric Note that since the NACA control cards are being used.4933.9111$ $SYNTHS XCG-12. 99.42.1.0.3.o351*.*0 NACA-H-S-1-50.0.15.0.22. 47.SAVSI-3B.0.4414.. CHROTP-1.0.36.811. X(1). option of scale the Airfoil Section Module. P(luO0.0.5.0.0. 1. 0.841.354.513.16oSSI.600.05o S$iTPLNF SSPNE.649.0.2s.36. R(1)ao.0..56E6..6.SHs(l)6. 360.2.089.4 EXAMPLE PRCBLEM 4 Pertinent information for Example Problem 4 is presented in Figure 32.13.0.97.ALT(1)-27400.10.CHRDR.1. .0..284.44.97.BLRCF-13.3.1.CHRDR-13..0.268.SAVSIu38. S(l)=O.12.2.310.OU.2. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 4.0.97. .BLAn.CHRDR-26.YPga. P(l[O0..1.18.49.0$ $SYNTIHs XW-3.TWISTA.76.9..O.l7.1...5.0.0.0.0.4.CHSTAT. 60...TYPEU1.2276.84.CBARR-18.0.9672.1.RLPII(1) -14.32.ALSCHO(1)uo.783.MACH(1)-2..0. CASE 1 NEXT CASE $FLTCON NMACHol. RNdNU8(1)a6.2.360.72.4..677.0-2.21.0..15.12.0.783.15.0$ 4HTPLNF SSPNE-21.13.60.0.618.11.2..1.2W-0.6.0. 54.l0.20.0$ $5YNTHS X14-29.34.SAvsz.1800.7.064.1.868.2. .26.368.07. 1.144. 52 .14.0~. 48i.SHB(1) .0.57..1. SWAFPPG. Case 2 illustrates the use of the body nose speed regime (Case-1).RLPN (1)n-17.6$ $SYNTHS XCrn36.1.689..02..10.TWISTA*. 0.0.6 0 0 .536.41.2.1.ZH.41.0.7. 205..2.19. 53.649.DHDADO.0.0.TWISTA.33.g.0.0.42.4579.613. 8263.840.249.3.536.O.072.0.$ NACA-W-6-65AU04 NACA-iI-6-6 5A004 $WGPLNF CHSTAT-0.49. X(l) .TYPEw.0. 1. 13.ALIH. 1582.5077.3.BLN-9.Os $SYNTHS XH09.0.9. 19.1.DHDADIa.0. RNNUB and MACH must be used to define the flight conditions.0.DHDADO.0.SSPN. 3$ CASFID BODY PLUS WING PLUS CANARD.951.SSPNOmO.0.2.7.062.67~.0-2. 12.ALIW.268.1.0.004. 51.BNOSEu2. SWAFP.736. 811.0.72.689.6.249.934.Oo.0.13.5.52. .94.ALIWa.17. .12.14.0.19o288. 03.8284.5.0.ZH-0.5 $WGPLNF CHSTAT*0.0.0~.0.22.561.47.DIIDADI*..1.45.BLN-10. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 4..0.7.1.4.2.0.0.085.4..51.1.9555.ALIH-.198.1E6$ $OPTINS SREF-694.BLA-.

ps • --29.97 1.60 REYNOLDS NO.0.293 0.42 2.36 19.0 R 0.94 14.0 2.64 FLIGHT CONDITION DATA MACH NUMBER = 0.98 26.76 1.04 -13.97 19.0.752 0.32 7.0 0.51 37.84 4.41 13.21 9.48 1./FT = 3. LENGTH = 18.72 1. 15.32 11.0 19A9 17.887 -.21 4.94 13.14 13. LENGTH = 45.36 P 0.53 44.0 S 0.0"• REFERENCE DATA REFERENCE AREA = 694.01 5.02 40.---.07 LATERAL REF. 10.42 36.36 12.72 7.05 9.91 22.13 2.48 1.0 33.97 2.25 2.20 21.22 2.03 47.52 57.0.33 7.64 17..84 0.02 54.89 7.22 2.0 1.15 1.0 WING AND CANARD DATA AIRFOIL NACA 65A)04 FIGURE 32 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 4 DATA 117 .0o a 0.47 22.36 13. 5.293 .42 11.1 x 106 SCHEDULED ANGLES OF ATTACK BODY DATA X 0.0 21.47 15.32 14.41 11.0 2.05 12.U8- // 8.0.76 1.15 0.90 21. t .64 11.8-+ 21 3.89 0.0 - 14. 20.752 1.49 21.2 LONGITUDINAL REF.49 8..13 1.49 30.975 12.99 60.53 51.

DHDADO-0.178.TYPEnI.0.XOVC-0.O.TCEFF*.30.97.40.BLA-1.0.CBw..8.2.0025..25.0.O.LERI-0.SSPN-1.0. used to illustrate ueitputs and dynamic derivative is as follows: A summary of Example Problem 5 analysis Case No. CLMNýX(1)-.?08.$ CASEID PLAIN FLAPS ON WING. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 5.ALIW-0..60.0.SSPNDD-O.0$ $FLTCON NMACH-1. CASE 2 DUMP FCM NEXT CASE i 118A -• - -- • • _ .25. '\V ' i ...97# X(l)-0..26E6$ SOPTINS SREF-2.. partidl problem is and output..1554.0.0417. 12.ZW-0.30.60.0.0.DEL-A(1)-0.0833.20.70.85.0.822. CASE 1 DAMP SAVE DUMP DYN NEXT CASE 94 .0. Comments DAMP.M0-0.0.BNOSE-2.346.7. • •"- " ".CBARR-0.0..3.1055 $WGSCIGS CLMAXLe.ALSCHD(1).ALPHAIWO.060.46. DIM FT PART $FLTCON NALPHAo9.O1125.SSPNEI1. I 2 Configuration Body + wiag Body + wing + plain trailingedge flaps Mach No.XW-1.TCo.0...O.29.0.. The flap configuration the microfiche shown in Figure 33.0.4.0.0.43. SWAFP-0. PHETEP-.138$ R(11-0. is are presented in including a dump of the DYN and FCM common supplement. ." .208..24.. 2 08.131.CHRDFI.SPANFIX.-2. $WGPLNF CHRDTP.20 CHRDFO-.SAVSI=45.00$ $SYNTHS XCG-2.BLREF-3..40..DHDADI-O.530.CHRDROI.60 PART.TWISTA-0.O$ SWGSCHR TOVC-.125.175.10.5 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 5 The wing-body portion of the configuration used in Example Problem 3 is This example input modified by attaching plain trailing-edge flaps to the wing.MACH(1)J0..0522.0e2.1.ZCC-0.16..0.0$ $BODY NX10.FTYPE-1.NTYPE£I.0.20.8.CNSTATe.50.82.50.PHETEm..0.46.BTAIL-1. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 5.0.60.CLI-0... $SYMFLP NDELTA-6.BLN-1.57.RNNUB(1)-4.0.0.0225.1665.4.208.322.208.0.CLALPA(1)u0.. 0. DUMP DYN DUMP FCM The Digital Datcom output data.60 0.03$ CASEID BODY-WING DAMPING DERIVATIVES.0. arrays.0391.16.0.DELTAY-1.CLAMO-.SPANPO-.3.

/ S~119 ---.0.25 LONG.208 - •T OCT"II PLAIN FLAP OETIL t 1•% x - ~CG.822 LATERAL REF.0.26 x 106 SCHEDULED ANGLES OF ATTACK = -2. ".0 REFERENCE PARAMETERS: REFERENCE AREA = 2. 12. 4. 24. 20.1554 h- 0.1 - .0.708 0.wt FLIGHT CONDITIONS: MACH NUMBER = 0.00 0. 0.0. 4. 8.0. REF. LENGTH = 3.60 f -_____.60 REYNOLDS NUMBERS PER FT .0. -2. 2.-__ '7 - FIGURE 33 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 5 DATA 4 11.0. LENGTH = 0.0. 16.

SPANFO-1. CLMAX(l) -.208.60...RNNUD(l) .C522$ CASEID PLAIN FLAP AILERON.0.$ $OPTINS SRE?-2.1162.82.55.0.063.0.DHDADI-0..322.12S..20. X(1)nO.0.108.25.346.0. NDELTA-5.0513.SPANPI-1. XSOC ( )n..97. . EXAMPLE PROBLEM 6. R(l)-0.BLREFm3.075.CLI-O...0261...43.0692...25.1665.ALIW-0.XSPRMEw.0. CASE 2 NEXT CASE 120 .O.0.6456.0. DELTAS(l)-.131.0.60.BLN-.0.OoS $SYNTHS XCG-2.CBARR-0.. .0.3O.0.tused to illustrate aileron and spoil~er input and output data. .0357.6 EkAMPLE PROBLEM 6 The wing-body configuration of Example P.50.0..CLALPA(1) '0..6955.530. .138$ $WGPLNF CHROTP.HCOC(1)=.0. .0.O. F.16.CLAMO-.0.Z14-0.57.46. ..0833.'-ure 34 rhows the geometry.4.175. .6638.ALSCHDu-2.0710.ALPHAI-nO.50.0. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 6.038.0.O.0380.*13 59$ CASEID SPOILER-SLOT-DErLECTOR ON WING.40.0$ $BODY NXu10.4.BNOSE-2.:b-em 3 .i3LA-1.1.0. SWAFPP0. .1.TYPESI.208.CHRDFlu.0417. 70. .4..2.0.0.0.0$ $FLTCON NMACII-1.16.SSPN-1..97.TWISTA. .0750.0.DHDADO-0.8.CHRDR-1..46.. .0956.0. XOVC-0.69 80.PHETEU.0025.oELrAY-1.DELTAD(1).105$ STYPE-4.SAVSX-45.0630.SSPNDD.6880.060.208.0$ $WGSCHR TOVCo.0XW-1.LERI-0.2.85. .CniOsO.SSPNEuI.0.BTAIL-1.0261.0.50. $FLTCOM NALPHA -9.013.CHSTAT-.0130.i4ACH(1) -0.. CASE I SAVE NEXT CASE $ASYFLP STYPEs3.178.7...62S0. .24.ZCG-.822.29.0513. 3. .0.26E6.CNRDFO..1116.0.1365. 12.3.

0 REFERENCE PARAMETERS: REFERENCE AREA z 2.FLIGHT CONDITIONS: MACH NUMBER -0.00% FIGURE 34 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 6 DATA 121 A "' '•"i i . 12. REF. 2. 0.50 PLAIN FLAP AILERON DETAIL z.26x i06 SCHEDULED ANGLES OF ATTACK .0. LENGTH = 3.1. 20.0.0.0. 24.0. LENGTH = 0. 4. 8.0.0..00 Solo . 16.-2..822 LATERAL REF. .•o [ II- _CG 3.60 REYNOLDS NUMBERS PER FT -4.25 LONG.0.

I.0.62CNO-0..1.0ALZWSO. R(l)o..TRUZ.52.Q..o.176. the effect of plain trailing-edge flaps on the wing (see Example Problem 5) Is included via experimental data input to illustrate a procedure for mu~ltipie high-lift and control device analysis..SAV5X*2S.0833.0.. ..0.50.0.ALPHAlsO.67.-20.40.NDELTAu9.25.OELTAY-1.60.ZHSO.141.118$ $WGPLNF CHROTP=0. 34.CHRDR.175.42.LERI-0.0$ SWGSCNR TOVC-..30.0.7 EXAMIPLE PROBLEM)7 The wing-body-tail configuration of Example Problem 3 is used to illuIn addition.0.3.670.TWISTAUO. 78$ $VTPLNF CNROTPu.CLALPA(1~s0.60.S22.. The geometry is sketched In Figure 35.ZW*.208.12S.051.L70.420.NTYPEu1.3.DHOADI-O.24.O.0.-10.0.0S SVTSCHR TOVC-..0.O.40.TYPE01.46. CLMAX(l)u0.0038.-40.0.TYPEUI.CHSTATS..4.SWAFPPO.XOVC.0.57..43.0.a.2S.O.29.O$ $SYNTHS XCG-2. $FLTCON NMACHU1.SPANFOu..SSPN-1.VEwRUPs.0.2.CLIm.0.SSPNOmO.1.208.CNRROIu..18.O.CLAM4Om.0'*TYPEuI.97.WISTA-. .20.7.09.TWISTA*O.ALSCHP(1).0076..DHDADOUO.16.S szXPmOI CLWU(I)u.XOVC-0.690.l..0. X(1~s0.O.HDADI=0.0.O.CNSTATmO.060.2.82.0.0$ SHTSCI4R TOVCaO.0..XOVCuO.BLRVFs3. .XWe.I.CNOm0.0.NALPNA.O 12.RNNUB(1)'2.OELTAY*1.. CHSTATS.0S22. .0.60.DHOADOOu.CB-.0417.O025.63.4i0.0.LERIu.ZCGUQ.0.XHIP3. SWAFPUO.0075S SHTPLNF CHRDTPu. .05$ SWGSCHR CLMAXLeO..30.i. The wing high lift increment output is used to update wing-body undeflected totals via namelist EXPRnn.PHETEP.0.ALPHAX.0025.CLAMOu.131.SPANFXU.S1..0.O.16.iO 20.174$ * I TRIM CASEID INCLUDES HIGH LIFT EFFECT ON WING.20H.93.25..CHRDRu.PHETEU... CHROFOu..SSINEw.OU XV-3.1665. SWAFPs.C8ARR=O.204..0.075.40.28E6$ SOPTINS SRE~u2.0..346.SSPNEU.SAVSln45..0..SSPNe.CLALPA(1)0O.DELTAf1)--6Q.CHRDFIS.O.49.0.450.SSPNW.-2..25.0.O.. CLNAX(1)*.0.4.105$ $SYMFLP FTYPtu1..695.09.SSPNE-I.070.TCu.ALIH..CLIuO.CLALPA(Il).S30. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 7 122 1 .$ $BODY NXSIO.330.MACN(1[.LERI=.0.060..253.O.322.50. straze trim control with an elevator on the horizontal tail.0523.0.85.Q.9.SAVSIu45.SSPND~oO.131.O2.

. 20.70 NACA 65AO06 NACA 65A006 NACA 63A009 PLAIN FLAP EFFECT ADDED AS EXPERIMENTAL DATA SUBSTITUTION R-- .00 WING I HOR'ZONTAL TAIL VERTICAL TAIL 0. .0.52 0. . .630 0.0.0 REFERENCE PARAMETERS: REFERENCE AREA = 2. .0. 16. \\ .°..• .. ' i" . -. . B.346 1. REF. ..0..29 0.253 3.28 x 106 SCHEDULED ANGLES OF ATTACK = -2. LENGTH = 0.... " i x I'i I I .. .420 450 SEMISPAN EXPOSED SEMISPAN 1.822 LATERAL REF.849 0. . LENGTH = 3.0. .. 12.60 FLIGHT CCNDITIONS: MACH NUMBER REYNOLDS NUMBERS PER FT = 2.50 1.93 I ct cR A c4 AIRFOIL 1. .02 28. 24.16 450 0. 4. 0. -~ _.. * ..00 3. ..0. 260 CG i 3.C. . •t.34FIGURE 35 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 7 DATA 123 ..67 0. 2.. .. •.0.0..1 3..25 LONG.42 1.

1665.060).cMOa.8 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 8 The all-movable horizontal tail trim case .U5.530.0...175. CHSTAT-.1.40..0.CBARR.0O. CLMAX(1I.0.0HDADIm0.CL-ALPA(l)UO.ZW-0.0..ALSCND(l)u-2.002SCLAMOU.LERI-.2....0TWISTA-.50.O.0 .0.SSPN0DuQ.322.822.CLIO.0.40.O.$ $SYNTHS HINAXo4.42. 28E6S $OPTINS SREF.253.60.138$ $WGPLNF CHRDTP.67.O.0.SSPNE. XVw3..SAvSlu45.0417.0.CMO=0. CLMAXII)-.O$ $HTSCHR TOVC.CHRDRU1.70.16.SAV51=28.0.46.TYPE1l..0TWISTA0. SFLTCON NMACH.MACH(1)=0.XaVC~O.208.SSPN.40.ALIHOO.XOVC.BLREF-3. 105$ EXAMPLE PROBLEM 8 CASEIO ALL MOVEABLE HORIZONTAL TAIL NR.SSPN-.. O.0.SSPNDO.5O.. X(l).CHiRDR.2..1.25.Xovc-0.SSPNE=.13l. 24.105$ SWGSCHR CLeqAXL-0 *78$ $VTPLNF CNRDTPem.208.VERTUPs..ALIWoO.271$ $800Y NX010.57.ZCG.0. St. is-'present in the rase.0.0075$ $HTPLNr CHRDTP-. 20..XT CASK 4 124 ..NALPHAa.0.. 14.LERIs.7.0.CLIsO.DIlEAIAOI.0.1. 34.CHSTAT-0.060.30.52.CHSTATo.O.TwISTA-0..s illustrated using the :hinge-axis distance is Note that configuration of Example Problem 3.420.XW.DELTA~u .TYPE1I.25. R(1)sO.346.141.CLALPA(1)-Ii.O.0. specified in namelist SYNTHIS and a TRIM control card.0S $VTSCHR TOVC-.0. SWAFP*. RNNUB( 1) 2.CLALPA(1)0..0.0.82.0833.O 12.ALPHAI-O.1.0.3.O.O.1.1.02.0.2fl8.114u3.SSPNEs. .29..0.DHONADOO0.00$ SSYNTHS XCG.2.O.DHDADO-u.025.0.131.97..2.25.0.0.SWAFP-0.0. 30.178.ALPHiAI.CHROR'.O.93.O..CLAM~o.9.849.43.LERI-.ZHOO.0.0$ $WGSCHR TOVC.4.0.0.3..TRUE.0.O.60.SAVSZU4S.63.TYPE-1 .0.09.O.1.#Arpo..U.0.125.82.SSPN-.DELTAY. 25 . .O.0.

IO. $FLTCOW Nr4AcHo.1.989.16E6$ $LARWI 25o. .ILru. .NALPHAaE.0.XCZNW-1.38. and syimmetrical diamond cross section* data for this problem are'shown In Figure 36.FALse.8.O ROUNDOW. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 9 NEXT CASE 125 .EIB-. sharp leading edge.o ACH (1)u.7.THEtTAOZ5.078.9 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 9 Problem 9 consists of a lifting body configuration with a delta planPertinent form.8551. 20.O.Sv3T.AL8CND(I)a-S.XCGuI.glS.03.307.@.sFRONTm..O.595.0.AR.57. 277$ CASEID LIFTING BODY WITH SHARP LEADING EDGE.SBASE.FALSE.0.44. 307.-1.RNNUU(1)w1..SBSM.1.0.z.DELTEP=90.o.0228*XCENSB.3a5.OO.26. 0sREFs.277..O.5.Bou1.IS.O. IPERDASn2.I .

0 ROUNDN = FALSE R3LEOB = NOT REQUIRED SHARP LEADING EDGE DELTAL = NOT REQUIREL.595 FT-- ZD= 0.915 FT SWET= 2-.0 1.595 BB = 1.57 FT SBSLB = 0.o FT 3 L1 5 260r0 1 . .277 FT FIGURE 36 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 9 DATA 2 126 1 * .0 2 SREF = SPLN = 0.076 L = 1.38 FT HB = 0.1. ..2 FT2 PERBAS = 2.44 FT- 7.44 THETAD = 15.00 2 SFRONT = SBASE = 0.00 C.307 FT AR = 1.0228 FT XCENSB = 1.989 FT DELTEP = 6+ 6 L 1= 30.0 + 60.915 FT -- 0. XCG = 1.0 = 90.5' 2 aL 30.277 FT XCENW = 1.03 BLF =. SHARP LEADING EDGE 2 SBS = 0. .FALSE.

NT-S.10 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 10 This problem demonstrates the analysis of the transverse control jet in as shown in Figure 37.TRUE...4..FC(l)-1000.HYPERS*.1000.ISP-225.NMACH-1..3.FALSE.5. FALSE• . SFLTCON MACH(1)-10. FALSE• .0.. ALPIA (l)-0• .2..$ $TRNJET TIME(l)-1. LAMNRJ ( )-.3•.13•.PINF(1)-10.$ CASEID TRANSVERSE-JET SIZING..SPAN-2......GP-1.0. w .0. * -•- .2.2000...90. hypersonic flow located on a flat plate..TRUE...9•.FALSE•.7..ME-2.RNNUB(I)-l.6• . / N- .CL..E7.200.. EXAMPLE PROBLEM 10 DUMP JET NEXT CASE 127 - .LFP-1O.PHE-30.39.500.

::x.39 .m"'c•"7.-- .1.o10 " .2 " 10.. *• - . -' *" 2. T"• '.0 300 FIGURE 37 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 10 DATA 128 t 1 * • -•.*•.

.po.ACH (1)'i010. PLATS WhTS FLAP IN hIFSfOUZC F&WW. UWNAC .10.O. . 15.122. 1 *iUPZrv AL1?D.. #.O1PTIZM The use of a hypersonic control flap is demonstrated in this example. .M1. .CF. EZ*NLS MG05W %I1 ~CASSID VIA? PUTn CAS.$ 1Lw6. Suratm. $FL=*o .. - J .I * j * 7.2..NDzLTA(1)a. 11 EuXAMPLE FOBLEM I1I Pertinent geometry data is shown in Figure 38. #20.1SOOOO..6.129 I . ALSCND(1) 00.4.TVO1'Zu3. AUMLPS. *CBARB.S.

0 a 0 .. 12.. FIGURE 38 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 11 DATA S130 .7 h = 150..0 M = 10. = 0. RN . 25... 20.. 1. 30. 20.8. 5..0.. 10. 10...06x 105 ... S. 15. 16. 4. 2..000 6 F .

Multiple occurrences of the same constant in a mamelist variable array can be represented in the form K*C. Namelist systems). follow are compatible is more The namelist coding rules that The input with both CDC and IBM computer systems.- i • /* i ::" • /.c. followed by a comma (no Namelist. c3. c. cj. vname is c 2 . data sets are Variable values are specified usiry. Not all namelist variables need be input.-- • •. aname is an array name. Each input constant must be immediately blanks) 6. Namelist names cannot contain imbedded blanks and must be preceeded The $ must appear in Column Z and the A blank must follow the namelis.variables may be In any order. K. terminated by a $ or $END (&END on IBM by a $ (& on IBM systems). c2. or where: aname W cl.:.. must be an unsigned integer followed by an asterisk. 9.. .. 131 ... successive tion factor. occurrences and C is where K is the number of The repeti- the numeric constant. 7. . 4. a variable name." . and must not contain imbedded blanks. -- I • / :. 1 cannot (control cards are the only exception to this rule). in Column 3. <'/' •. The last value will be used. 8. are numeric constants Variable names cannot contain imbedded blanks. Namelist variables may appear more than once in a namelist data set. but it the input and flags any Digital does not correct Input errors. 1. name begins 3. . Namelist Column the data as input by the user regardless of the input data may appear in be used any card column from 2 to 80..i APPENDIX A NAMELIST CODING RULES Digital Datcom utilizes the namelist input technique because it convenient and flexible than formatted input. one of the two following forms: vname . and C. 2. c3.t name. Datcom will always execute errors sensed by CONERR. . tests all of Jiagnostic analysis module (CONERR) violations of these rules. 5..-6 .

(N) V) LA Li Ma t-- 0 C3 co (n ULA C14r * 0 e'.Iu-j ca. CIO LA i 0 LUI* < -. C.Ln UN-% * (N4 LI(N I. Li 0 -1 CC m -' It.J132 .

All Digital Datcom numeric constants should specify a decimal to be continued mu-t end with constant followed by point.. Ci+*. namelist rule is designated by its number. Cn.e. anare to Cf index corresponding Array dimensions for all namelist variables in Digital Datcom are specified for each namelist name in Section 3 of this report. "REAL".10. On CDC systems. with the index for the first (i)-Ci. if all the elements of an array are not specified.... where the array name must be subscripted element i is the to be filled. Each 133 V * . All variables. except logical variables are declared type Examples illustrating these rules are shown in Tables A-I and A-2. 11.. 12. i. Each card that is a comma.

Uc *0 0 It 40 L LAi in*-~O C. 4 ..3zI Z C1 In0 N1 z LL ui e LU z C LU oo Cul Ii Z NN -J 0 . 0 ) C o- 03. 0- * . 0. i -.J L 0r -A 0) N)4 5. U 0A W0 W- 134 .)~~~V - . LL nLU LL- a.00 >.I- oL U. ci zL I- 4r Lr% -( -1 o3 Z 9-. 0.

2. . either by NACA designation or airfoil geometry coordinates (see Sections 2. horizontal tail.APPENDIX B AIRFOIL SECTION CHARACTERISTICS ESTIMATION TECHNIQUES B. vertical tail. (Datcom Figures 2. the variable is stanaard airfoils.2 B. and is calculated internally for MACA to calculate the Digital Datcom namelist input variables hy. The user can supply data for any section characteristic and utilize the module to supply the remaining parameters.5). calculated in incomInviscid flow by the method of singularities (References 2-4). VTSCHR. The module was written to maintain user flexibility. The leading edge radius (RLE) These coordinates are then used (x/c).'nputs. (t/c)max. the module will calculate RLE using the input section coordinates if not input. This module can calculate unlimited number conventional shaped airfoils. The use of this module can eliminate the need of defining most of the airfoil section characteristics for the namelists.1-8) and presents RLE and Ay for several The distribution of the singularities is derived from a conformal transformstion of thirty-two fixed points on the airfoil to points equally spaced 135 *1 * . whereas.4 and 3.1-7 and 2. and has been left as a user Input for other sections. are used to calculate the airfoil upper and lower surface cartesian coordinates. HTSCIHR. B.WGSCHR.1 MODULE METHODS Geometric Properties User . and/or ventral fin airfoil section characteristics by either specifying the NACA designation or the section coordinates.a.2.2. and thickness and camber line distribution. Figures B-I and B-2 are reproduced from Datcom However.1 INTRODUCTION The Airfoil Section Module enables the user to specify the wing. B.2 Aerodynamic Section Characteristics The pressure distribution about the airfoil is pressible. the section characteristics of virtually an. User supplied data will always take precedence.- . and VFSCHR.2.- "I.-. specified sections. Reference 5. Datcom methods exist for only a limited number of airfoil sections. Surface coordinates are determined from the NACA designation using the methods of Kinsey and Bowers.

They are also used to calculate the The viscous correcLion to remaining section aerodynamic parameters at the zero-lift angle of attack for "the user fpecified Hach and Reynolds numbers.2T ':9 9/2 * V . and finally a right-hand parabola. ./2)1 Re .. ' " .785 TAN(Ta/2)-2... section lift follows: SCL. The velocity and pressure distribution derived from the conformal trans- "formation analysis are used to calculate the airfoil section ideal aerodynamic parameters for Digital Datcom.99c Ti Tr.about a circle in a transformed plane. is given as + 1. from Kinsey and Bowers (Reference 5). This curve is constructed by fitting the This technique yields a function which is overall geometry by a left-hand parabola joined to a series of cubic curves.. the velocities about the airfoil are calculated by an inverse transformation (back into the physical plane).rThi. In order to adequately define the airfoil shape and ensure a smootla continuous geometric interpolation for the transformation..ckness at X .__ (Ct )Theoretical a+ (5/2) TAN(Ta/2) I-[Ln(Re/105)ln{. about a circle Is Since the solution for inviscid flow known. •• I i " .232 curve slope.~I /• .9ec T99 M Thickness at x .. • " '" ' ..Reynolds Number T90 . .: _A\ 136 I . continuous and has continuous derivatives everywhere. a curve describing the airfoil surface is constructed.0' - - *1.95 TAZ2(7._ ' '.•.

a. .. located at a position other than 30 is at 30 percent chord or A1 ctmax is percent chord (if zero. . presented in Figure B-5. (cY max)base is obtained from Figure B-3 as a function of Ay and position The Ay parameter for a cambered airfoil is the same as of maximum thickness. is calculated using the is: The equation for c.. Datcom method (Datcom Section 4. . in Figure B-6.2-2) is a 5% correlation factor (sug- applied to bring the results in line with experimental data... ness. l •k.. fore.4).tained from test data of similar airfoils when Figure B-8 shows representative effects on selected airfoils.1.. in Datcom... function of percent camber and maximum camber location.. . . due Zo Mach number should be o!. this case is gives the lift increment due to roughthe standard NACA roughness and is 8 percent of chord. this parameter is not calculated. 137 ii . / \ / .r.. The The roughness presented by 0. The airfoil section maximum lift. that is.... shown in in Figure B-7. that of the corresponding uncambered airfoil. V . result. and the effects may be quite different from those shown. available..2.)base + A1 CLmax + A 2 Cemax + A 3 CLmax + A4 ctmax + A5 C.. the uncambered airfoil having the same thickness distribution. page 4. • . thereincrement The lift this parameter is not calculated by Digital Datcom. gives the list increment due to presented Reynolds number for Reynolds numbers other than 9 x 106. Actual roughnesses vary As a considerably.. .. •:-----------------------------------------..011 inch grit applied over the first curve is only an indication of roughness effect. A1 CLmax accounts for the effect of camber for airfoils having the Figure B-4 gives this parameter as a The (c~ ax)base value is for uncamwith smooth leading edges at 9 x 106 Reynolds number and low maximum thickness at 30 percent chord. Individual terms are discussed below. A 2 cl max amounts to an increment by which A 1 ctmax must be adjusted for airfoils with maximum thickness maximum thickness zero). cLmax..1.1. is a correction for Mach numbers greater than approximately A5 cimax 0.1. . A 2 Cimax is A3 Clmax. bered airfoils speed conditions. A4 c€max.In gested addition to the viscous correction. C Imax (c . No generalized charts for Mach effects are available in Datcom. :.

2 Limitations on Geometry When specifying the airfoil geometry by cartesian coordinates or tLick).1. the user should input data near the airfoil leading edge to prevent the surface curve-fits from calculating an infinite slope. and 0.4.As a possible alternate to the above procedure. surface crest on the assumption of shock free flow. for Reynolds number.ess/camber distribution. Reference 6).003.3.3. founded on its relation to the drag rise Mach number. This Is easily accomplished by supplying data at X-stations 0. The crest critical Mach uumber is precisely defined as that free stream Mach number for which local sonic flow is first reached at the airfoil Its significance is LIMITATIONS AND MODULE DEFAULTS These coefficients need be corrected only and Mach number. 0. 0. the transonic crest critical conditions are computed (Niedling.1. cambers greater B.20 and a Reynolds number of nine million are given in Datcom Section 4.3. 138 _ _ _ . increasing camber or thickness. B.. roughness. CREST-Airfoil surface tangential to free stream direction z Vx X If the user requests data for subsonic Mach numbers greater than the airfoil section data at the crest critical Mach crest critical Mach number.4• _ / . number are used.1 Crest Critical Conditions When calculating the airfoil section characteristics of user defined or NACA airfoils. Cpmax for standard airfoils at Mach numbers < 0. accuracy may deteriorate for :han 6% chord or maximum thickness greater than 12% chord.002.001.. geometry inputs. The user should note that results degrade with Generally.3 Transonic and Supersonic Airfoils The inputs for transonic and supersonic airfoils consist primarily of If an airfoil is defined by coordinates or the NACA card.3 B. B.

is tail is tion of the upper-surface slopes should be used if the tail above the wing and conversely lower-surface slopes should be used in the below the wing. 1 -j -.e local tangent at chord expressed SLOPE is Values of KSHARP for the angle between the chord plane and the at 0. Procedures for computing specific section data are given below. • '. regimes. For cambered airfoils. . B-9. 40. For wings with vari- thickness ratios. several sharp-nosed airfoils are presented in Figure 8.. Configurations with wing and tail located at the If the combinao'detached and Mach number results in 139 same z-location should have lower surface values specified. . . KSHARP should be defined for the section at the mean This parameter is used to calculate wave drag for sharp-nosed air- foils in the supersonic and hypersonic speed regimes. SLOPE parameters are used to calculate supersonic downwash effects and thus are required only for configurations which have a horizontal tail. Namelist variab. the mean thickness ratio. 20. thickness ratio by b/2 t (2b/2dy 2c For nonstraight tapered planforms. Namelist variable KSHARP is a wave-drag factor for sharp nosed airfoils and should not be specified for round-nosed airfoils. able chord. angle of attack. 60. it TCEFF is the straight-tapered planform obtained by extending the edges of the outboard panel into the vehicle centerthe supersonic and hypersonic used to calculate wave drag in A graphical procedure for determining TCEFF la summarized in Figure is assumed to be (t/c)EFF of the planform by the ASM if Section (t/c) A is not user defined. Namelist variable TCEFF is the effective thickness ratio of the planform For straight tapered planforms it equals expressed as a fraction of chord. surface Angles are positive when the local tangents intersect the chord plane ahead of the reference chord point for the tangent. 1- . the effective is given is defined in terms of the basic planform and 1/2 t )2 1/2 TCEFF o b/2 o c dy _ o f 0 S The basic planform is leading and trailing line. 80 and 100 percent the airfoil in degrees. SLfPE.all of the required inputs execpt for TCEFF are computed. .

either by coordinates or use of the "NACA" card. . • .. I/ . . .:.• . automatically computed for a user specified airfoil. ...shock. results will be generated and an appropriate message This variable is "will be Reflexed trailing edges are not permitted.. .. .-. . 140 j .. no wing-body-tail output. .. - .. .

.02 04 0 12 16 20 24 THICKNESS RATIO (MOF CHORD) FIGURE B-1 VARIATION OF LEADING-EDGE RADIUS WITH THICKNESS RATIO OF AIRFOILS 141 ...05 a U• S0. A-"-"''': "' . -• .04 .0.03 : ~0. l . S0.06DATCOM FIGURE 2. J.1-7 K 0.- i--i " . .

2.08 THICKNESS RATIO 01 2 FIGURE B-2 VARIATION OF LEADING-EDGE SHARPNESS PARAMETER WITH AIRFOIL THICKNESS RATIO 142 .1-a 4 Ay- CHORD 2 00.04 0.5 OATCOM FIGURE 2.12 0.

.1 FIGURE 4-3 5 6 AIRFOIL SECTION MAXIMUM LIFT COEFFICIENT OF UNCAMBERED AIRFOILS 14. 2 3 Ay-%CNORO 4 [K . 7- 47 ..1 :. POIINO A I I fL 1.1*2 3 .tI r 1. 0 - . 7/ O PREDOMINANT LEADING-EDGE STALL II PREDOMINANT rTRAILING-EDGE SSTALL HCNESVCOD (LONG BUBULE I(SHORTBUuBLE).2 THICKNESS 1%CHORD) .-- / CH.

1.1.9 X lo6 S1Cimax 0.4 _ 4___&__6.1.CMBRAT4%H0R0 -X0 4 ~~Cimax 0.4 ______N9 4 DATCOM FIGURE 4.1.4 2 0 O 1 2 Ay-% CHORD 3 4 5 FIGURE B-4 EFFECT OF AIRFOIL CAMBER LOCATION AND AMOUNT ON SECTION MAXIMUM LIFT 144 . CAM BE R AT 30% CHO0RD0 % x 106 ~~~~1~~ A -I mx0.8MAX.8 3 4 5 CAMBER (%CHORD)MA.(a) . CAMBER M% CHORD) ICAMBER AT 15% CHORD R -.4-8 ol A-CHORD 0.8 CAMBER M CHORD) 6 fMAX.4-6 2 0 0 1 2 AV-%CHORD 0._ DATCOM FIGURE 4.

1.45 UACMFGR .% CHORD 4 ETO MAXIMUM 5 LHICNES EFFECT OF 5 REYOLSITINUME ONF 0.4 EFFECT OF AIRFOIL CAMBER LOCATION AND AMOUNT ON SECTION MAXIMUM LIFT (CONCLUDED) 0.V. (d) 2 2 3 AV.1.OSTIO7O MAXIMUM T HICCKNESS 0.-bRYOOIIME 26 X 0 ox/ A3 I~ 8 o .40 O0 FIGURE B- 2 3 AV.11.4-4 0' 0 5 FIGURE B-.CHORD)I A1 14axI 6 0.CHORD 4 CAMBER AT SOY&CH4ORD I Rwe X lag A1LUFIGURE 4.31 1MAX.CAMBER (V. MAXIMUM ~ ~ OR A-V CHORDT50 OSTONO DAMFIGURE 8-5EFFCTOF.

41 -08 DATCOM FIGURE 4.5 0.1.4 DATCOM FIGURE 4.5 FIGURE B-7 EFFECT OF NACA STANDARD ROUGHNESS ON SECTION MAXIMUM LIFT 1.1 0.6 FIGURE B-8 TYPICAL VARIATION OF SECTION MAXIMUM LIFT WITH FREE-STREAM MACH NUMBER 146 .4-ga sDGTAROL 0 1 2 Ay (%CHORD) 3 4 .0 NAICA 64-2 10 0.0.8 NACA 64-009 0 0.1.1.1.2 1.4-8b 1.61 SMOOTH LEADINGEDGE CONDITION R .6X 106 1.4 0.3 MACH NUMBER 0.8 0 4-DIG IT AND 6-SERIES AIR FO ILS U___mgx_ -0.2 0.

.04 T . THICKNESS DISTRIBUTION (ACTUAL PLANFORM) " FIGURE B-9 GRAPH CAL SOLUTION FOR (t/c)effective 147 .I-I r02 2 2 __ __- 62. I\ Si € I I T bw 7 2 &bw .C bm Sbw t 46. 8.1 RATIO &.-.- /.6 1 SO IN.IN. 0i 02 ! 4 6 8 - 10 12 " SEMISPAN STATION y.- ---.-tic S SECTUAA INTHICKNESS STATIO BAI WIIN.

.024 0... ~dy ___j__ 0.220Oeq in.020 Cw0..0548 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2 024 6 SEMISPAN STATION y(in.) CHORD DISTRIBUTION (BASIC WING) f(-)c 0.004 s0.12_ _ _ CHORD Cbw 0 2 4 6 8 t0 12 SEMISPAN STATION y(in.) FIGURE B-9 GRAPHICAL SOLUTION FOR 8 .6) -..012 0.0. - ~ 10 12 (tic EFFECTIVE (CONCLUDED) 148 XI .2 0 [2(146.0030 0.. . .

and the NACA designation scheme (reprinted from Datcom Section 2.4 AIRFOIL SECTION DESIGNATIONS This section has been included to acquaint the user with the section geometric definitions.B.2. tion scheme are described in Section 3.1). 149 *-. closely The airfoil section module has been written to conform as Exceptions to the NACA designa- to these designations as possible.p •I" .5.

through iLe. a bootio* lift ooefficient thickness distribution of airfoil t s . maximum thickness of airfoil at ILc. measured normal to and from the mesan line for c ambered airfoil*) i'( N N enln enx hp o estiton of maximum **=ber Ws lope of l..n of nroximum thicknesso -leading-edge radius ein eto it ofiin = trail 1mg-edge sanle (included "anle between the tangents to the upper * and lower surfaces at the trailing edge) 150 Si1 .3.O. equals the slope of the mesa line at tp ILe.a USmaimum T...e. BASIC SYMMETRIC AIRFOIL c= chord of airfoil section ordinate of mean line x .DIGIT SURE INVERTED CUBICI..E. - Yc~ CHORD LINE - at L.Y()asaeo y a ordinate at some value of 7 0 N (measured normal to and from the chord in* for symmetric airfoils. 'TC = poslti-.r.distance alone chord moasured from I.PARABOLA (4-DIGIT SERIES) CUBIC (-DIGITSERIES PARABOLA (4-DIalT 853I138) on }5. AIRFOIL SECTION GEOMETRY CAMBER MEAN LINE (y).

-Dash" onshore (aumbera followlmg a dach plosed after tb. SO I CHOCRD FOR -so FL AT---- NACA 4*DIOIT 853138 AIRFOILS MACA 1 4 42-3 4 mae 1. (. (IS CHORD) 12(it CHORD)4 151 . &ad/*# x we difforest from'mormal.Soo Tab[* t CX CHORD.4 1S IS.4 CHO0R03) S 9 j Normal Normal aSO(Noimal) 44 O8U9MAN NOTATION OF NACA 4-DI01T AND &-DIGIT SERUIS AIRFOILS - -__ MACA 1. SBCOND DASH NO. ousdard 2646410s) ang exprodood *air whos I.AIRFOIL SECTION DESIGNATION CLARK T" AIRFOIL (NOT PROGRAMMED IN DIGITAL DATCOM) X.V.18 - II 8 (po) CM CR00 x.*. I1.1. FIRST DASH NO.

(if unsepoiflad. aL 1.#g 152 UOU Ce C X FlUJ I16If t2' ODDO ~~J4 %•:""1: ~I . e M CHORD/Ie Sam* as for 4-digit series (Soo Table) Aft portion of mean line.4 "Indicates 6- series Mean line to give uniform loading to x a a. pi&' . C- 1. CHORD) NACA I.-0. r.*.0) "x- z for min. (if unspecified.e.e. (0 indicates etraight line) I Indicates inverted cubic) t (V.MACA 5-DIGIT SERIES AIRFOIL MACA 2 3 0 12 -8 4 ye (• CHORD) of Of. then linear decre*&e to t. in tenths) ZIS PAGE IS BEST QUALMT.SERIES AIRPOILS NACA 6 4 2 12 -1.0) i for min preseure for'badic symmetric airfoil at zero lift (in tenths) t (• CHORD) Design lift coefficient (at. pressure for basic symmetric t CHORD) Si airfoil at nero lift (in tenths) Desigs lift ooefficlen* (c~ in tenths) NACA 6.Serie s Mean line to live uniform loading to a.SERIES AIRFOILS NACA I 5 -2 12 s0:4 Indlates I. then lInesart decrease to t.) Mt (actually 20 a i.

as before as before Snewlc original and t and t (linearly increased ordinates) NACA 64 (312) 214 an0.. NACA 64 3 * 212 as 0.4 ACA 643 A 212 as before Ts before " 153 Indicate.____ ---..4 0. before _ before Cý range for low drag (tenths above and below C1 NACA 643 212 a-0. Pressures at the nose are same as for the 443 -212 airfoil.so to i." (linearly invreased ordinates) .4 .- or decrease the airfoil thickness (NOT PROGRAMMED IN DIGITAL DATCOM) i4ACA 64 (212) 2.4 as before a before Of rtnie for ow drag with improved thickness distribution (tenths above and below Cji) To incr'.4 a. in 3 .4 as before as before original Xitd-t new C and t • I-4' .. modified thickness distribution and type of mesa line.e. Sections del-inated by Lettsr A are ubastantially straight on b-jtlt surfaces from about .

series (also 9.5 20.cseries) t (percent chord) x fnr favorable Design lift coefficient. (AS PROGRAMMED IN DIGITAL DATCOM) ýXt - X F- S-3 -30. gradient on upper im At design *urface (Oi in tenths) on hmor oradient profaurF asurface at densmn (to tentm'.0-2.0 SUPERSONIC TYPE OF SECTION 1 = DOUBLE WEDGE X (percent choard) F 2 = CIRCULAR ARC 3 = HEXAGONAL X (petcent chord (percent chord) 154 ./ * - -" " '/ -- "-3 \.SERIES AIRFOILS (NOT PROGRAMMED IN DIGITAL DATCOM) MACA ? 3 6 A 4 12 / Indicates 1.NACA I. prelsur. ff blSerial letter designatlio thlikness distribution and am SUPERSONIC AIRFOILS . "\ /' 'I " ..

These variables Section this may be obtained as output by utilizing the "DUMP" 3. . C. /- t/ . .\"' . The index that follows describes the types of variables stored in program common block.5. equation and figure references revised April 1976. refer to the USAF Sta- the program when the DUMP option is All page. section.APPENDIX C STORAGE LOCATION OF VARIABLES IN COM!ION Pertinent related variables are stored in data blocks.-" "-•--• / " .. / ... nition of the contents..'. Location of variables stored in option discussed in each data block are defined in Appendix. The data block names refer to the names output from used. * in Volume II. "bility and defines Control Datcom. - / ). and page numbers for a detailed defi- each dat-i block..-I. The column titled "Overlay" the program overlay where the particular variable is calculated and The common blocks and overlay structure are discussed set in the data block.. . - \ .1 DATA BLOCK A AHT AVF AVT B BD BDIN BHT C G-IT C D INPUT AND COMPUTATIONAL DATA BLOCKS PAGE' 162 166 170 174 178 179 182 183 184 187 190 192 194 196 198 PROGRAM COMMON BLOCK WINGD HTDATA VTDATA VTDATA WINGD BDATA BODYIN HTDATA WHAERO WHAERO WHAERO WHAERO WIAER WHAERO SUPDW DESCRIPTION OF VARIABLES STORED IN ARRAY Wing planform geometric parameters Horizontal tail planform geometric parameters Ventral fin geometric parameters Vertical tail geometric parameters Flight condition parameters and subsonic wing lift variables Subsonic body parameters Body inputs via namelist BODY Flight condition parameters and subsonic horizontal tail lift variables Subsonic wing pitching moment parameters Subsonic horizontal tail parameters pitching moment Subsonic wing drag variables Subsonic horizontal tail drag -variables Subsonic ventral fin drag parameters Subsonic vertical taf l drag parameters aDVF DHT DVT DWA Supersonic downwash variables 155 / i / •.

via namelist ASYFLP Transverse jet inputs via namelist TRNJET Hypersonic flap inputs via namelist HYPEFF Subsonic wing and horizontal tail parameters F 207 FLAPIN FACT FCM FHG FLA FLC FLP GR HB HTIN HYP JET LB LBIN OPTI PW PWIN SBD SECD SHB 212 213 214 216 217 218 220 222 223 225 226 227 230 231 232 238 239 242 244 WHWB SUPWH SUPDW P0WR FLGTCD P0WR SUPWH WHWB HTI BDATA SUPDW SUPDW POWER OPTION POWR POWER SUPB0D LEVEL2 SUPWB Subsonic high-lift and control pitching moment variables Subsonic high-lift and control hinge moment variables Subsonic high-lift and control asymmetrical deflection variables Flight condition variables input via namelist FLTCON Subsonic high-lift and control lift coefficient variables Ground effect variables Subsonic horizontal tail-body variables Horizontal tail HTSCHR inputs via namelists HTPLNF and Hypersonic control effectiveness parameters Transverse-jet control parameters Low aspect ratio wing and wing-body parameters Low aspect ratio wing-body inputs via namelist LARWB Case reference dimensional input via namelist OPTINS Power effect variables. . ....'\ .4 -. . . "-- J .- ... -. propeller power jet power Power effect variables input via namelists PR0PWR or JETPWR Supersonic body variables Transonic second level method parameters Supersonic horizontal tail-body variables 1 : 156 ..../ - ..---.' . / • .--. . Power effect variables. --. ! _. .. . . . . . ..-. .. . .DATA BLOCK DYN DYNH PACE 199 203 PROGRAM COMMON BLOCK POWR BDATA DESCRIPTION OF VARIABLES STORED IN ARRAY Dynamic derivative variables for all speed regimes and configurations Dynamic derivative variables for all speed regimes and horizontal tail and horizontal tail body configurations Symmetrical and jet flap inputs via namelist SYMFLP Asymmetrical flap inputs .

246 247 250 252 255 258 261 262 263 264 265 268 -PROGRAM COMMON BLOCK SBETA SBETA SUPWH POWR SBETA SBETA SUPWH WBHCAL SUPWB SYNTSS SUPDW SBETA SBETA DESCRIPTION OF VARIABLES STORED IN ARRAY Supersonic sideslip variables. horizontal tail and horizontal tail-body configurations Supersonic horizontal tail variables variables Supersonic wing body horizontal tail Supesonic wing-body variables Synthesis dimensions input via namelist SYNT1S Supersonic spanwise loading coefficient parameters and high-lift and control drag variables Transonic longitudinal and lateral directional stability variables Transonic longitudinal and lateral directional stability variables for horizontal tail and horizontal tail body configurations Subsonic trim variables for control device on wing or tail Subsonic trim variables for an All movable horizontal stabilizer Transonic high-lift and control variables Twin vertical panel inputs via namelist TVTPAN Ventral fin inputs via namelist VFPLNF and VFSCHR Vertical tail VTSCHR inputs via namelists VTPLNF and TRH TRM2 271 . -- __ . horizontal tail and horizontal tail-body configurations Supersonic wing variables Supersonic high-lift and control variables Subsonic sideslip variables.DATA BLOCK SLA SLAH SLG SPR STB STBH STG STP SWB SYNA TCD TRA TR PAGE 245 . all configurations Subsonic sideslip variables. all tions configura- Supersonic sideslip variables.272 POWR IOWR STRN 273 TVT VFIN 274 275 POWR VTI VTI VTIN WB WET 277 279 280 VTI WHWB WBHCAL Subsonic wing-body variables Subsonic wing-body-horizontal tail parameters WGIN 281 WINGI Wing inputs via namelists WGPLNF and WGSCHR 7 157 MINNOW .

depending upon the configuration.C. both.2 OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS The output data blocks contain the output results from the program. 17 i 158 ____/___--__________ . There exists an output array for each configuration summarized as follows: OUTPUT DATA BLOCK BODY WING HT VT VF BW BH BV BWH BWV BWHV 'PWR DWSH PROGRAM COMMON BLOCK IBODY IWING IHT 1VT IVF IBW IBH IBV IBWH IBWV IBWHV IF0WER IDWASH CONFICURATIONS/"ALUES Body Alone Wing Alone Horizontal Tail Alone Vertical Tail Alone Ventral Fin Alone Body-Wing Body-Horizontal Tail Body-Vertical Tail-Ventral Fin* Body-Wing-Horizontal Tail Body-Wing-Vertical. TailVentral Fin* Body-Wing-Horizontal TailVertical Tail-Ventral Fin* Power Increments Downwash values *Configuration can include (I) or (3) Vertical Tail Only. (2) Ventral Fin Only.

WING. BWH. BWHV 21-40 41-60 61-80 CONTAINS CV CL Vs a Cm vs U CN vs u 81-100 101-120 121-140 141-160 161-180 181-200 20i-220 221-240 CA Vs .. VF. VT.The arrangement of the output arrays is as follows: OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS ARRAY ELEMENTS BODY. BW.a CLa v a Cm. CL Cmq vs a 2'41-260 261-280 281-300 301-320 321-340 341-360 361-380 CL. vs a CM& vs a vs a Cy vs VS a Cn Cr a a Cn0 vs vs a POWR (Power Increments) 1-20 21-40 41-60 61-80 81-100 ACL vs a ACm vs a ACD vs a ACN ve a ACA vs A 101-120 121-140 141-160 ACL ACr ACY Vs a a a vs vs 1:9 . 1-20 BH. BWV. BY. vs C Vs vs . HT. vs a Cy vs a Cn.

"*..- . e.3 FLAP AND TRIM OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS When running flap or trim cases.-. the output results are stored in output control card. / . / .OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS ARRAY ELEMENTS 161-180 181-200 CONTAINS ACn vs a ACt vs a DWSH (Downwash Data) 1-20 21-40 41-60 q-H/q vs a f vs Ct atha vs a C. these results are stored in the dynamic derivative portion of the configuration data blocks. follows: The arrangement of these output arrays is as SYMMETRICAL FLAPS OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS BODY WING WING WING WING WING WING WING ARRAY ELEMENTS 1-200 1-10 11-20 21-30 31-40 41-50 51-60 61-70 CONTAINS ACDI v avs ACL vs 6 ACm vs 6 ACLmax vs ACDmin vs (ACLa) vs 6 Ch vs 6 6 6 6 Ch 6 vs CONTROL TABS OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS BW EH 5V BWH BWHV ARRAY ELEMENTS 1-10 1-10 1-10 1-10 1-10 CONTAINS CFC. data blocks which can be seen by using the "DUMP" To conserve . - .program core. FC vs 6 6 6 6 6 ChC vs ChC vs AChG vs Tt -s 160 /i .

CL v. H liT T 61-80 81-100--Cmrrin 101-120 CL1rim vs a ve -MTrla HT. '* CDi.T -HT | OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS HiT HT ARRAY ELEMENTS 1-200 1-200 1-10 11-20 21-31 TRIM WITH CONTROL DEVICES ARRAY ELEMENTS 1-20 21-40 CONTAINS C3 vao.ASYMMETRICAL FLAPS OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS BODY WING HT A .S 4 v friv' C~rri. vs vs vs 6- ChT Ch 6 ALL MOVABLE HORIZONTAL TAIL TRIM OUTPUT DATA BLOCKS liT ARRAY ELEMENTS 1-20 WrTAINS Hwuntrimed vS c HIT HT Tal Alone 21-40 41-60 6 Triv. I " vs 2 T VT ull )Conflguratlon 1-20 2140 C DXrwvs a vs CLWrrTr "161 - . 6 L-$R Ckvs Ca vs 6 6 CONTAINS Lutrim vs 6 vs 6 HT VT 41-60 1-20 C6ustrimed vS 6 6 Trin vs VT VT VT ' * VT VT VT 21-40 41-60 61-80 81-100 101-120 121-140 A% rm vs frjv 5 veI ...

4. 18 18 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 2. 21 2. 18 2. 4. 21 2.1 Effective exposed wing aspect ratio A(23)/A1(21) 4.1 . 18 2.1-5 Semi-span of inboard exposed panel 4. + .1 I l S~26 2I 27 28 TRTPE STRTPE TR0P ýw* Ag* "162 1 j . I1 2.4.4. 18 2. 18 4. 18 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 rb* LEFF b /2 4. C .sketch (a) 2. 18 2.sketch (a) Theoretical wing Inboard taper ratio Exposed wing Inboard taper ratio Exposed wing taper ratio Exposed wing outboard taper 2.1 . 21 CHRDRE GAMMA Print FLAG . 18 18 2. 21 2. 18 9 Semi-span of Inboard thecretical 2. 2.1 Exposed Inboard wing area Exposed outboard wing area Exposed wing area Theoretical wing area Exposed inboard wing aspect ratl Exposed outboard wing aspect ratio Exposed wing aspect ratio Wing chord station where A-O Wing maximum overall length Exposed wing root chord tan 1 (h /12) 4. 18 2..WING PLANFORM GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "A" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY I 2 ARIPE ARPE ROVAL ARREF ASPIPE SPOPE ASPOVL S*I S * S* Sr A* A * SA Aw* (Ac/x~w Lw Cr* y hH " I4. 18 2.4. 18 2.4.(DNPWBT) 14 15 16 Canard (logical) MACIPE MACE MACOPE NDTCP SPTIP SSPNB0 P3 SSPNEX b */2 12 TRATIP TRTIPE cl* €0* Exposed wing inboard MAC Exposed wing MAC Exposed wing outboard MAC 2. .4. 18 2. 2. 18 2. 21 p. / / .sketch (a) 2. . .1 .4. 18 2. 18 2. 21 2.

.. 2. 2. 0 0 )I (A (A ) (A (A 2 5 )0 Outboard panel quarter chord panel half chord sweep Outboard panel T. 2. • .E. 18 body to inboard MAC Exposed outboard panel Y-distance from body to outboard MAC Exposed wing LE sweep angle. 18 163 ____ - ____'______ . 2. degrees. 50% wing MAC Exposed wing Y distance from 2. - . -. 2. l.• .E. 2. 2. effective LE sweep angle for non-straight wings Angle in radians Trignometric sine of A * Trignometric cosine of A * Trignometric tangent of A 0 Test value used in Sub. Exposed wing half chord sweep 2. Exposed wing T. 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Exposed wing quarter chord sweep 2. 25 A* 5 0 A*i (A0 )I (AI 2 5 )I 00 2. ANGLES 2.0) (Am)I User specified inboard panel sweep 112-117 SAVSO (A )0 User specified outboard panel sweep 2. Inboard panel LE sweep nboard panel quarter chord sweep Inboard panel half chord sweep Inboard panel T. 18 35 36 37 38 39 0-45 46-51 52-57 SAE025 SAE050 SAEIOO SAI000 SA1025 SAI050 SA 1IIO SAO000 5A0025 0 Asweep A* SIN AO* COS A 0 * TAN A0 * (AO*)T A*.E. 18 2. 2. sweep sweep 2. 2. Outboard panel L. 2. sweep 94-99 100-105 106-111 SA0050 SASIO0 SAV1 )Outboard (A1. 18 body to MAC of total wing Exposed inboard panel Y distance 2."A" LtOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE CN S PL COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS Z9 30 31 32 33 34 LENGTH LENTHlength XCNTEX x-X YCNTEX YCNTIE YCNTOE SAEOOO y* -* Yo A" O Exposed wing maximum overall 2. 18 Sfrcn distance from wing apex to 2.50 1 (A 1 . 58-63 64-69 70-75 76-81 82-87 88-93 ) .E. 2. 2.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK. sweep 2.

4 4.2.1.4 Area of inboard panel Overall aspect ratio Inboard panel theoretical MAC Wing mean aerodynamic chord Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification 19 18 18 18 1E cos ALE 125 A(128)/A(124) (a0)om= (dCma) Lmax) M=O Aspect ratio classification Inviscid zero lift attack Inviscid max lift attack angle of angle of 2 0 0 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138-143 144 145 AOM0AO SWAFP (aOM)/aO AAF AaC£max CLmax/ C Emax CmaX 4.3. 4 -21a 146 max 15 (A(145)) 164 -.' .3.1. 2. -max Y0 O A angle of attack Change in a0 due to wing twist Y VRdistance from vehicle center line to total wing MAC Figure 4. 2 18 r SI A w cI cr C1 (l+C )x 4.1-5 Figure 4.1. 2.3. 2. 15 . 2. 15 15 2.1. 2.1 ALPHAO DAO0T CLALPA CLMAX RNFS Rf TI C AR classification factor Reynolds number of wing Y distance from vehicle centerline to MAC o) inboard panel User defined CL User defined Ca max Y distance from vehicle center line to MAC of outboard panel Zero lift 0 /6 2 0 2.3.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DAFA BLOCK "A" LOCATION VARIABI E ENGINEERING NAME SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLAY 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 Overall taper ratio ARIP CBARI CBARR Cl 2.3.4-21b Figure 4 15 15 .1.1 0 0 2.1.4 4.3.15 18 18 CSC.1. L" - .3.

18 2. 2. 31 15. degrees Figure 4. or total wing Wing sweep at the maximum thick.l.. 0 Cb' (S0 *)l (A *)1 X distance from wing apex to wing MAC quarter chord bb*/b* Inboard theoretical panel aspect ratio Geometric parame-ters for ficticious outboard panel of straight tapered wing.2.) IH 2. 15 2f 27 (tic)I (A) [(A). CNB nB AI AYl (b *12).-a0 ). 2.)I (CL) 0 AXCG T0VC SATCM SATCHO SATCMI Inboard panel lift curve slope Outboard panel lift curve slope 2. 15.4 degrees (Lmax0a) (a. 2. 18 21 cos (a. 2. LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OLAY 147-152 153-158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 ALCLMX AEJ (a'e) eCLma (ej C 2 (l+C2 )x AtanALE x L. 18 169 170 171 172 173 174 175-180 181-186 187-192 193 194 195 (X *) ' 0 n (CL. 18 ness chord station Outboard panel sweep of the max. 2. 18 "inboard panel. "- J ' . .VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "All.3.24 2.3. 18 2. 18 imum thickness chord station Inboard panel sweep of the maximum thickness chord station XH'Xw-Crw cos (C 1 ) A(193)+(X') _ZdRH max]0 [(A). 1H LH XR tIc max]I 2.. 15 15 15.4 4. taC User defined thickness ratio of 2. used to calculate wing pitching moments 18 18 18 18. .. 21 2.4-24b (ax-O).1. 18 2. 18.2.3.l. 18 X distance from wing apex to LE of total wing MAC 165 As& .

18 2.HORIZONTAL TAIL PLANFORM GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AHT" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING REFERENCE DATCOM SYMBOL COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS LAY I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-9 10 11-14 15 16 17 18 19 20 .T. inboard taper ratio 22 23 V SSPNEX 2. 18 2. 18 A UNUSED CA UNUSED c* TO 0* o• rb* UNUSED bb/ 2 UNUSED b */2 UNUSED Exposed outboard H. H. area Theoretical H.T.T.T.T.21 b ARIPE AR0PE AROVAL ARREF ASPIPE ASPOPE ASPOVL CHRDRE MACIPE MACOPE NDTCP SPTIPE SSPNB0 S* S0* S* r Sr A* A0 * Exposed Inboard H. 18 2. 18 2. aspect ratio 2.T. 1 2.T.T. 18 2. 18 2.T. 18 panel Semi-span of Inboard exposed pane I Theoretical H.T. MAC Exposee H. 1 24 25 : TRATIP TRTIPE TRTOE X A1* '* 26 27 Exposrt. aspect ratio Exposed H. aspect ratio Exposed H.T. Pax to 50 wing MAC 166 . aspect ratio AHT(23)/AHT(21) MACkl'Ec"* Semi-span of i'nboard theoretical 2.T.T.T. 18 2. 18 2. maximum verall lengthm 2. 1 2. root chord Exposed H. 1 -- Exposed H. 1 X distance from H.T. outboard MAC Effective exposed H.T. 18 2. 18 2. outboard taper ratio Exposed H.T.T. inboarc taper ratio 2. 18 2. 18 2. area Exposed inboard H. inboard MAC Exposed H. area Exposed outboard H. area Exposed H. 18 2. taper ratio 28 29 30 - TRT0PE LENGTH XCNTEX X~ 0 t* Exposed H. 18 2.

. 2. 2. . " ... 2. 2.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AHT" LOCATION VARIABI E ENGINEERING DATCOM COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVFRtAY NAmE SYMBOL REFERENCECOMN/DFNTOSVRA 31 32 32 33 34 YCNTEX Ybody YCNTIE YCNT0E SAEOOO * Exposed H. LE sweep angle... 2.. 2. 18 18 18 18 2. degrees. half chord sweep Exposed H.. 18 2. '..T.. •. 0 (Ao) (A 0 0 )1 2 5)0 94-99 100-105 106-11) 112-117 118 119 120 121 SA0050 SA0100 SAVSI SAVS0 (A 5 O)0 (A 1 .. 2..~-..... 18 18 18 18 18 18 181 181 18 18 18 18 18 18 SIN I0 * COS A•* TAN A (A0*)T SAE025 SAE050 SAEI00 SAIO0O SA1025 SA1050 SAII00 SAO000 SA0025 A* A* A*.... 2... 2. TE sweep 2. from body to inboard MAC Exposed outboard panel Y disfrom body to outboard MAC Exposed H. 2.. 2.. Inboard panel LE sweep Inboard panel quarter chord sweep 1 (A 2 5 ) (A 50 ) Inboard panel half chord sweep Inboard panel TE sweep Outboard panel LE sweep Outboard panel quarter chord sweep (A 1 . 2..T. 2.-.. effective LE sweep angle for non-straight wings Angle in radians Trignometric sine of AO* Trignometric cosine of AO Trignom-.. Exposed h. Y distance from to MAC of total H..T. 18 18 18 ARIP SI A CBARI C'I 167 _. 2.35 36 AO 0 2. 0 (Am) (Am) 0 A rOverall 0 )0 Outboard panel half chord sweep Outboard panel TE sweep User specified inboard panel sweep User specified outboard panel sweep taper ratio Area of exposed inboard panel Overall aspect ratio• Inboard panel theoretical MAC 2.. .. I. ..T° quarter chord sweep 2. .. 2.... 2. 0tance A ... 18 18 18 18 Exposed inboard panel Y distance 2. 2..T.. (AO) 25 50 0 1 37 38 39 40-45 46-51 52-57 58-63 64-69 70-75 76-81 82-87 88-93 t0 Exposed H..-_-.. 2.tric tangent of AO* Test value used in Sub.T.. ANGLES 2..

.4 4.3.1. .3. -.•. . .4 4. mean aerodynamic chord Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification Inviscid zero lift angle of attack 2.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AHT" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS )VERILA 122 123 124 125 126 127 CBARR Cl Tr C1 (i+Cl)X cos ALE AHT (028)/AHT (124) (a0O)M=O 4. Figure 4. 1S 16 16 16 16 // . 16 16 / 1. 18 0 0 2. / .4-24b 168 %. 2 2 0 0 2 0 2. -.3.1 Y distance from vehicle center line to total wing MAC Figure 4.T.T. ..1. 4 -21a (aC 1ma (cj - 0 ).3.4 H. 18 2.2g1 AaCa .1. (ac 1 a) Inviscid max lift angle of attack fLmax M-O 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138-143 144 145 146 147-152 153-158 159 160 ALCLMX AEJ AOMOAO SWAFP ALPHAO DAOOT AR classification factor RNFS Rf Y'I CLALPA CLMAX C.1.1...1!3.4-21b Figure 4 2. degrees degrees 16 16 16 16 aO).1. i!+K ...4 4..-i _+ .3.1.max Y-0 U0 AaO0 /0 Reynolds number of H.3.1-5 Figure 4.max CLmax/ CLmax Ca x max AHT(145) (aC ("e~j C2 (l+C2 ) x AtanhA 4. . Y distance from vehicle center line to MAC of inboard panel User defined CL User defined Citmax Y distance from vehicle center line to MAC of outboard panel Zero lift angle of attack Change in a0 due to wing twist 1S ' (aOM)/a0 A..3. C.3. .1...

. MAC 2.. K .. 18 2.. 18 X distance from H. 18 2.. 18 imum thickness chord station Inboard panel sweep at the max"imum thickness chord station 2. 18 !2.. .T. . t . or total wing H. . .. .~ .T...T.. pitching moments 2.T...i.2. . MAC quarter chord bb*/b* Inboard theoretical panel aspect ratio Geometric parameters for ficticious outboard panel of istraight tapered H.. 1 169 ''S // - N... 18 inboard panel. \.. . [ .. .. apex to H....2.. used to calculate H. . 18 ness chord station Outboard panel sweep at the max.. 1 2..*i.T. 18 2. . /. •. 18 33 Inboard panel lift curve slope Outboard panel lift curve slope 16 16 2. sweep at the maximum thick.. 1j 2.. 18 2. -. .T. I• . • . apex to LE of total H. 22 User defined thickness ratio of 2. .! VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AHT" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME HNGINEIING DATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/ OLfNTIONS LA 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175-180 181-186 187-192 193-194 195 TOVC SATCH SATC SATCMI CNB X nB AI AY' (b0 */2)a CbI (S*)' (A0 *)' (Al0*) n (CLQ)I (CLO) cG (t/c)l (A)t/c ma (A)t/c max] 0 l [(A)t/X max] 1 UNUSED XR X distance from H. 18 2..T.. ...

area Exposed inboard V. 18 2.P. 18 2. 18 2. area Theoretical V. 18 2. 2.F. 18 CHRDRE UNUSED C* r Exposed V. inboard taper ratio Exposed V. 18 2.F. area Exposed outboard V. 18 2. 2. 2. 18 18 2.F.* Exposed Inboard V. 18 2.F. co* 18 19 20 21 NDTCP SPTIPE SSPNBOG o* rb* UNUSED bb/2 Exposed V. 18 MACIPE MAC-E . panel Semi-span of Inboard exposed panel Theoretical V.F.F. outboard taper ratio Exposed V. 2j 18 18 b/ Semi-span of inboard theoretical 2. MAC 22 23 24 25 26 SSPNEX UNUSED bb*/2 UNUSED A 1 2.F. aspect rat io AVF(23)/AVF(21) 2. taper ratio Exposed V. 18 I8 18 18 2. MAC Exposed V. apex to 50% V. 18 TRTIPE TRTOE TRT0PE LENGTH XCNTEX AI* Xw* A* * Exposed V.1.F. aspect ratio 2.VENTRAL FIN PLANFORM GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVF" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS RLA I 2 3 4 5 £ 7 8-9 10 11-14 is 16 17 ARIPE AR0PE AROVAL ARREF ASPIPE ASPOPE ASP0VL SI* S * Sr * S r A* A 0* Aw ". 18 2.F. Inboard MAC Exposed V. aspect ratio Exposed V. area Exposed V.F.F. outboard MAC Effective exposed V.ACOPE UNUSED 7* "* AE. 18 27 28 29 30 •* 170 A // . root chord 2. maximum overall length X distance from V. 18 2.F.F.F. aspect ratio Exposed outboard V.F.F. inboard taper ratio 2.F.

1 2. . . half chord sweep2. ":.F. 0 )0 0 1 2. 1 2. 18 2. 18 Exposed V. 18 Test value used in Sib.p VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVF" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTr/01FNTIONS O :VERLm 31 32 33 34 YCNTEX YCNTIE YCNTOE SAEOOO * W Exposed V.F. . 18 Inboard panel LE sweep 2. quarter chord sweep 2. 18 2. 1 @"•"" + . •. 18 Exposed V. LE sweep angle.. 0 0 (A ) 0 1 (A 2 5 ) 1 (A (AII 0 ) (AO) 0 (A 2 5 ) 0 (A 5 0 ) 0 (AI... ANGLES 2..F. . 1 2. TE sweep 2.F.. 1 2. 1 2. 18 '1 V* AO* 2. . 18 2.. degrees. Y distance from body to MAC of total V. 1 Inboard panel quarter chord 2.. Angle in radians Trignometric sine of A0 ".F.1 '.F..1 .. 1 sweep Inboard panel half chord sweep 2. effective LE sweep angle for non-straight wings. 1 Inboard panel TE sweep Outboard panel LE sweep Outboard panel quarter chord sweep Outboard panel half chord sweep Outboard panel TE sweep User specified inboard panel sweep User specified outboard panel sweep Overall taper ratio Area of exposed Inboard panel Overall aspect ratio Inboard panel theoretical MAC 171 2. . 18 2. 1 2. . Trignometric cosine of A Trignometric tangent of AO* 2.. 18 35 36 37 38 39 40-45 46-51 52-57 58-63 64-69 70-75 76-81 82-d7 88-93 94-99 100-105 106-11 112-117 118 119 120 121 ARIP CBARI SAE025 SAEO50 SAEIO0 SAIOOO SAI025 SAIO50 SAI I00 SAA0O00 SAif025 SA0050 3A0100 SAVSI SAVS0 A0 * SIN A0 * Cos AO* TAN A0* (AO*)T A* A*5 0 A*1. 18 2.O (Am (Am) X SI Aw T - 2.2. 1 . 18 Exposed V.•'• -lie1 . .• a.2. " :• "" -" "•"" : '" " . Exposed inboard panel Y distance from body to inboard MAC Exposed outboard panel Y distance from body to outboard MAC Exposed V.

IE 0 0 2.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVF" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS EVERLAY1 122 123 124 125 126 127 CBARR Cl Tr C 1 (l+ci) x 4.3.. 18 2. .F. 4pex to V. mean aerodynamic chord Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification Inviscid zero lift angle of attack Inviscid max lift angle of attack AR classification factor 2.4 V. I1 2.ulate wing pitching moments 2 2.. 1I ticious outboard panel of straight tapered v.- _ • : " = .1.2 RNFS Rf yI Reynolds number of V.F.F. used to cal. 18 2 2 0 G cos ALE AVT (128)/AVT (124) (aO)M=0 (CL) Lmax 11=0 128 129 130 131 132 133 136 134-137 138-143 144-160 i 0 2. 1 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170-173 AI Inboard theoretical panel aspect 2.. 18 . MAC quarter chord bb*/b* 2. 2. 18 lC 11 I1 (b */2)1 0 C ' (Sc*)' (A *)' 0 (X UNUSED 2.F. 2.F. 1 172 t _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ I. Y distance from inboard panel line to MAC of vehicle center User defined CLa User defined Cjmax Y distance from vehicle center line to MAC of outboard panel CLALPA CLMAX Cza Ctmax Y0 7 UNUSED AAFI UNUSED SWAFP 161 162 CNB X n8 Distance from V. I ratio Geometric parameters for fic2. 18 2.

_ 174 TVC (tic)1 (^ti€.2.2.-. K t 181-186 187-192 193-194 195 SATCM0 SATCMI [(A) t mtx malx] 1 Outboard panel sweep at the max. MAC 2. apex to LE of total V. P___________________ .F. 18 ness chord r qtion'.ckness chord station X distance from V. (A)i~ max 17518 SATCM 175-180 SACH User defined thickness ratio of 2.F...F. lmax]I UNUSED X 2. V. 18 [(A)t/. 18 imum thickness chord station Inboard panel sweep at the maximum thi. 18 Inboard panel.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVF" LOCATION - VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL _ DATCOM REFERENCE _ _ _ COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS _ _ _ _ OVERLAY - . 18 -___ 173 . or total V.F. sweep at the maximum thick.

18 2. 18 2.T. 18 E. 18 2. 18 2. 18 _V.T. MAC Exposed V.T. apex to 50% 2. 18 SSPNEX TRTIPE TRTOE TRT0PE LENGTH XCNTEX AI* A * "w A* L* X Theoretical V.T.T. outboard MAC Effective exposed V.T. area Theoretical V.T. outboard taper ratio 2. 18 2. area 2. root chord Exposed V. inboard taper ratio 2. 18 2.T.T.T.T. area Exposed V. aspect ratio Exposed outboard V. 2. maximum overall 2. aspect ratio AVT(23)/AVT(21) Semi-span of inboard theoretical 2.T. 18 length X distance from V. inboard taper 2. 18 2. aspect Exposed V.VERTICAL TAIL PLANFORM GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVT" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLAY 2 3 4 ARIPE AROPE AROVAL ARREF SI* S* S * r Sr AI* A P "ratio A* W UNUSED Cr* UNUSED CI c"* o* rb* UNUSED 1b/2 UNUSED bb*/ 2 UNUSED AI Exposed Inboard V.T. taper ratio Exposed V.T. MAC 174 ___/__ _ _ _ _I . aspect ratio Exposed V. 18 2. 1 2. 18 Exposed V.T. inboard MAC 2.T.T. 18 2.'posed V. 18 2. 18 panel Semi-span of inboard exposed panel 2. Exposed V.T. 18 ratio.T. area Exposed outboard V. 18 7 8-9 10 11-14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 '27 28 29 30 MAC0E MACOPE NDTCP SPTIPE SSPNB Exposed V. 18 18 5 6 ASPIPE ASPOPE ASP0VL CHRDRE MACIPE Exposed inboard V.

half chord sweep 2. LE sweep angle.T._121 ARIP CBARI c *17 I • I * i " . 18 2.T. 5 0 ) 1 (A1.00 )1 (AO) (A (A. 18 2. Exposed V. sweep Inboard panel half chord sweep Inboard panel TE sweep Outboard panel LE sweep Outboard panel quarter chord sweep ae Outboard panel half chord sweep 2. TE sweep 2. Inboard panel quarter chord 2.T.Asweep i112-117 SAVSO (AM)I (Am) A SI Aw User specified inboard panel User specified outboard panel Overall taper ratio Area of exposed Inboard panel Overall aspect ratio Inboard panel theoretical MAC . quarter chord sweep 2.50)0 2.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVT" LOCATION S -n - VARIABLE NAME -i ENGINEERING SYMBOL -I DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/EINITIONS l I OVERLAY 31 32 33 34 YCNTEX YCNTIE YCNT0E SAEOOO w YI* Y A0 Exposed MAC of distance from body to V.T. Inboard panel LE sweep 2. 1 2. 18 2. 18 from body to inboard MAC Exposed outboard panel Y distance from body to outboard MAC Exposed V.T. 1 S~r 119 120 . Angle In radians Trignometric sine of AO* 0 Trignometric cosine of A TrIgnometric tangent of AO* 2.18 12. effective LE sweep angle for non-straight V. 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Test value used in Sib. Y total V.T. 18 2. 18 2. 18 2. Exposed V. I1 2. degrees.T.18 106-111 S~sweep r118 SAVSI .. Exposed V.2. 18 2.1 2. 2 18 Exposed inboard panel Y distance 2. 18 35 36 37 38 39 40-45 46-51 52-57 58-63 64-69 70-75 76-81 82-87 88-93 i94-99 AO* SIN A 0 COS AO0 TAN A (AO*)T SAE025 SAE050 SAEIO0 SAIOOO SA1025 SAI050 SAIl00 SAO000 SAY025 SA0050 A* A* A*1 0 0 (AO)I (A 2 5 )I (A. 18 2. ANGLES 2. 18 2.

1 2. used to calculate wing pitching moments 2.T.T.3. 1I 21 2 0 0 AVT (128)/AVT (124) (a O)M0 (0CLmax) M-0 Inviscid zero lift angle of ~ Inv-scid max lift angle of attack AR classification factor 128 129 130 131 132 133 136 134-137 138-143 144-160 161 162 CNB 2 0 2. apex to V. MAC quarter chord bb*/b* b Inboard theoretical panel aspect ratio Geometric parameters for ficticious outboard panel of straight tapered V.T. IE 2. ! 2.-1 2. 1 2. 2. Y distance from vehicle center line to MAC of inboard panel User defined C1 User defined Ctmax Y distance from vehicle center line to MAC of outboard panel 163 164 '65 166 167 168 Al AY' (bo.1. 18 2.T./2)s 0 Cb' (S *)0 (A0 *)I Distance from V. 1i 176 * F . I 1 2.2 UNUSED X R nB Reynolds number of V. 2.4 V.T.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVT"' LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS "LA 122 123 124 125 126 127 CBARR Cl Tr C1 (l+ci) x cos ALE 4. 18 RNFS Rf 1 CLALPA CLMAX CY Cma Y 0 SWAFP UNUSED AAF1 1. i1 0 0 2.. 1 169 170-173 (A*)0 UNUSED 2. mean aerodynamic chord Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification Aspect ratio classification -attack 2.

apex to LE of total V. 18 1St/c maV.T.T. 18 [' i 177 i *L }-/ .2.TCOM REFERENCE COMMEITS/DPIITIONS OVERLAY 174 175-180 T0VC SATC (t/c)0 (A).VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "AVT" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DA. ness chord station 2. or total V.2. 18 181-186 SATCHO 187-192 193-194 195 SATCMI [(A) mx)t/c [(A)t/c Outboard panel sweep at the max. User defined thickness ratio of inboard panel.T.T. MAC 2. m max] 0 max] sweep at the maximum thick. 18 UNUSED XR X distance from V. 18 imum thickness chord station Inboard panel sweep at the maximum thickness chord station 2.

.:... ...... .1. °-'.3 Increment in CI at CL.2 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Mach number Mach number parameter Incompressible wing lift coefficient cSCHD + a a Maximum lift angle of attack Maximum lift coefficient 4. Ref.' .: ' : ... 4 15 15 15 3 31 0 15 ALSCHD ACCLMX CCLMAX CNAARF cCL CLmay (CN)REF (C o)w 0 (Cmo) (CL)MO Ci Wing icompressible lift curve slope Wing zero lift angle of attack at Mach ALPH0M a0 / 178 7777 ':-.FLIGHT CONDITIONS AND SUBSONIC WING AERODYNAMICS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "B" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL OATCOM REFERENCE COAMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLA .- . .• -.3.-• • ."\ I MACH BETA M 8 [CLw)J] M-0 2 3-22 23-4.. Wing zero lift drag coefficient Wing zero lift pitching moment coefficient 0 0 0 2.

DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY I 2 3 4 5 XB Smaxare S 4.nose 6 7 8 9 I0 11 S 00 4.6.6 10.!..SUBSONIC BODY PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "BD" NAMEIENGINEERING SYMBOL.1 Body cross-sectional area at X X station where flow ceases to bi potential Figure 4.2.6 Sjnose .6 Body max. cross.6 4.)_ 0 UNUSED (LAF)H (CDo)B (LNF)H UNUSED 4.28 179 A.6 across section area Total body length / Body maximum cross sectional area 4.1.1. area Body base area Body zero lift skin friction drag coefficient based on S max Body zero lift base drag coef- I 4.2.ht)H K -K 2 1 (C.1-20a Body zero lift drag coefficient 6 6 J0 X° (X-.28 10.6 6 2. / " C I III II Ii I I / . .1.2.6 4$6 ficient based on SRef 61 62 63 64 L CDo (C ) o B (AXAc)H (ZAC)H C Body zero lift drag coefficient based on SRef Body zero lift pitching moment coefficient 4.l 6 6 12-29 30 31 32 X nose - X-station of body nose I 10 10 33 34-54 55 56 57 58 •59 60 XCG=XM UNUSED (k/R)B S Sb (AX)H (LJF)DB CD b XCG 4.28 4. 23 X distance from body nose to max 4.6 47 10.1 4.2.

2.2 sin (a Distance from wing apex to LE of 2.T.2.6 4.2.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "BO" lOAINVARIABI.6 2 6 AXH £BRf 91 92 93 94 NALPHA (Rt)B CfB SS Body skin friction coefficient Body wetted area -8- 4.2 40 I 4 •' 811 88 89 90 fX 4. apex to LE of HT exposed root chord 46 ' 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 cos (aQ) tan (ai)w sOL ZCG X0./4 (AX H (db)max db dB 8lb Cdcdx.1.4 Used defined ZCG I 0.2-a Distance from H.\ 4.2 E Max body diameter Base diameter Body diameter Eqn.2-35a User defined wing incidence 4.1. _ _ _ _ _ / .6 6 I 2 2 2 1.1.2.20 wing exposed root chord XcG-Xw-AXW 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 Body fineness ratio Figure 4 .1.E ENGINEERING DATCOM REFERENCE OMNSDFNIO )ERA NAME YMROL S65 66 • 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 X I Axw w AXcG ZWE XAC ZAC (AXAc)w LNF LAF ZW (zBs/dB) 4.6 6 4. 4.6 180.20 10.6 4.

6.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "BO" LOCATION VARIA& E ENGINEERING NAME SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS - OVERLA 95-114 115-134 !5-154 (CDo)wB (Cm ) (CdcJ (CLp)J -dS/dX (CLV)j (CDL)J (CmCNp)JBI aR Sp .6.I I / .(CDN)wB W (CLN)WB (CmN)wB 4.2.1. ..28 10.1. 19 7. CL and Cm of body-segment DoLNLHB from nose tip to leading edge of exposed H.2 Figure 4.. 5(CmN)HB 535 536-660 661-680 681-700 701-720 721-740 741-760 761 762 IF (b/2-b*/2) UNUSED (CNV)JBA X0L ZP0L ZP (CNp)JBA X/LRef Z'/LRef Z' (XAC)H ZHE 181 -• * I . 155-174 175-194 195-214 S215-234 6 4.7 "X.2-35b Potential flow lift term Vortex lift term 10 4 6 6 6 f .2 235-254 255-274 275 276-295 396-335 256-315 316-335 336-355 356-375 36-3LN)HB 1 Body Planform Area CD.6 4 2. CL and Cm of body segment of exoe win DC from nose tip to leading edge of exposed wing (CD. 19 4. 25 4.2.)HB CD.20.T.20 4 4 4 4 4 10.

S. P. I 1 62-81 82-101 102-121 122 123 124 RR ZU ZL BNOSE BTAIL BLN BLA DSd TYPE METHOD zu ZLi Z L 125 126 127 128 182 .BOnY INPUT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK WBIN" OAINVA21ASLE ON ~OCT NAME N0GIWREING SYMBOL DATCOM a!IRENCEI - CIMMENTS/OIFINITIONS OVRW I NX Input via NAMELIST BODY 2-21 22-41 42-61 X P .

19 .3 45 Mo)W (C (CLO N-0 C~M Maximum lift coefficient Increment In CM at CL.FLIGHT CONDITIONS AND SUJBSONIC HORIZONTAL.ref. TAIL AEMDYNAP.1. +sc I angle of attack 16 16 16 16 *43 44 Maximum lift f 4.ax CLMAX (CN 0 )w CICH a.2 ALSCHD ACCLMX CCLMAX CNAARF 6(clo 47 mCL~..3. NT zero lift drag coefficient zero lift fitching oet 14IT 5 3 47 48 49 ALPHOM ~~coeff'icientmont HT Incompressible lift curve slope HT zero lift !angleof attack at Mach 3 0 16 J.MICS L~AY OC1NVARIABLE NAME ENGIWEEIING SYMBOL REFER~~ENCEETSOPNSIN DAYCOOMCW"S/F"" 2 MACH BETA M 0 Mach number Mach number paramteter 0 0 0 0 3-2(cL)lincompressible HT lift coeffict' ant MaO 23-4.

3 4.1.3 4.1. 4.1.3-f at 90 degreei 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 F.3 4.1 User defined zero lift CI 31 2 3 4 C OTIP CmoM/Cmmcfo 4.4.c.2 4.1.4.3 4.1-7 31 31 31 31 31 31 Cmo/0 Cmo Xac/cr dC M/dCL Cma A 0 4.3-21b Figure 4.3 4.4.1.*::4.4.1.1.:/6 /tan A*: 0 Ai: tan jO tan AO/B A tan A00 a/tan A tan Ao 0 /B S/tan A00 (Xac /C) (Xac/C d (X.1.1.4.3-b 31 -22a 31 Wing normalized X angle of attack Figure 4.1.3 4.4.4.4.3-21b tan A.4.1 4.2-c 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4.4.4.4.1. CmoR 4.3 4.1.1.3 4.1. 4.4.4.4.4.1.1.4.4.gure 4.1. I Cm0.3 4.3 / (+c 3)A x tan A` 0 h(X cp/Cr) (Xcp/C ) (X p/Cr) 184 __________________ S.2 4.1.4.4.4.4.4.1.3 4.4.1./Cr) P= 0r C3 ) (Xad)/crI 4.3 tan A.3 4 1.1 CM1g change due to unit wing twist Cm Distance from wing apex to the a.1.1.4.1.1.1.1.3 31 31 31 31 Inboard panel Inboard panel Inboard panel Outboard panel Outboard panel Outboard panel Inboard panel Outboard panel Eqn.3 4.4.4. / il i i .4.3 4.. 4.1.SUBSONIC WING PITCIINIIG MOMENT PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA 3LOCK 'T" OC AT NJVAfBI E NAME S ENGINEERING4 REFERENCE OATCOM •YMBO COMMENTS/-EFINI TIONS QvfRL.4.3 4.1.1. 1.1.4. in root chords Eqn.4.1 User defined zero lift Cm of outboard panel Figure 4.3 4.3-21a Eqn.3 4.1.2 4.40.4.

3 4.3 QCLmax from 4.4.3 4.3 4.1.4.3 4.4. 4 . Figure 4.1.1.3 4.4.4.4.1.3.1.4.3 4.4.4.1..1.1.3 4. 4.1.4.3 4.4.4.3 4.1.4.1.1.4. .3 4.4. Figure 4. -.3 185 '.3 4#1.4.3 4.3-2 4 a 31 31 I Stability index.1.4.4.4. .1.1.3-c 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 37 38 39 40 A(Xcp/Cr) A(Xcp/Cr) 4.3-22b '31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 TEMP2 A(Xcp/Cr) Am A(XCp/Cr) (Xcp/Cr)J UNUSED tan *CLma.1.3 4.1.1.3 4.1.1.3 4.4 31 31 Eqn.4.1.1 . A .4.IO VARIABLE NAME .1.4. /tan a tan UCLa /tan C i/c r r (Xcp/Cr) aref (Xcp/Cr) a -ref 3 4.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "C" LOCAT -.3 Aspect ratio index.3 4.4.4. ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM .3 4.3 4.3 4.1..1. _ ___ ii _ REFERENCECOMENTS/EFNITONS RA 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 sinaCLmax tanoCLmax (X p/Cr) ref sin a cos ai tan ai A cos A* 0 Itany/ tanacLmax URef 4.

.1.4.3 31 186 -o.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "C" LOCAT ION VARIABLE NAME ENGiNEERINO SYMBOL IATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFiNI TIONS OVERIAY 51 (Xcp/C )4 Cref 4. >1.

. 4 .3 A tan A00 4.2 4.3-b £-22a 187 4.1.4. 4 . .1.1..3 (XCp/Cr)1 4.1.*1.1. 4 .4.4..4.3 Figure 4 .4. .1.1.4.1.1.1.. 4.4.1.1..1.1.3 tan A0 1/a 4.1.3 A* O •(Xcp/Cr)..3-21b Figure 4 .____+__X_.4.4.3 (XCP/Cr) 4.1 4.3 6/tan A* 11 12 13 14 15 16 li 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 A* tan 0 1 4.4.4..1.1.1 User defined zero lift C User defined zero lift Cm of outboard panel Figure 4.4.3 6/tan Ao00 (XaclCr)d (Xac/Cr)0 (X)•ICr d (XCP/Cr) a-90 C (I+C 3)Ax tan A 4. .1. _ .4. 4.' W _•__________-. in root chords Eqn.3 4.2-c 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 4.1.1 4.4.3 4.4. 4.1.4.1.4.1.1..4-.1.3-f HT normalired XCP at 90 degrees angle of attack Figure 4.1.3-21a Eqn.4.2 4.4.4. 4.4.3 4.1..SUBSONIC HORIZONTAL TAIL PITCHING MOMENT PARAIETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "C4T" LOCATION VARIASLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMEOL REFERENCE COMMENtS/DhlWTIONS OVLER .3 0 tan Ad0/o 4.4.1.1 4.2 4.3 A tan A* 4.4.4.3-21b 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 3 33 8/tan A0 .3 4.1-7 Cmo change due to unit NT twist Cmo Distance from HT apex to the a.4.1.4.4.!.3 4.3 Inboard panel Inboard panel Inboard panel Outboard panel Outboard panel Outboard panel Inboard panel Outboard panel Eqn.1.1.4.3 4..1.3 4.4.4.3 4.. . 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 !0 Cmo C °TIP (Cmo)m / (Cmo) M0 Acmo/e C% Xac/cr dC/mdCL Cma 0 tanAo/63 4. .c.

. .3 /tan a tan aCLma /tan rft cr/Cr (Xcp/Cr) Gref 4. +.4. . ..1. .. . -- . . * + .3 4. . *. . .. . :. . .4. .1. .4.4. Figure 4.. .•' "- .1.3 4.4. .1. .4.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "CHT" tOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 ncCmax si QCL 4..4.4.3 33 33 Aspect ratio index.1.4 33 33 tanaCLmax (Xcp/Cr) ref Eqn.3 4.4.4.1.. .3-c 33 33 33 33 33 sin m. .1.3 UNUSED tan mCLmaý 4....1. . .4.3 4.1... _.3.. .3 4.1.4. . /: :::-I-.+ .1. .4. Figure 4.1.-->+..3 4. .1.+ . .4. . ..3 •~a from 4.3-24a 33 38 39 40 4. ..4.. .4.1.. . . . .1. . .3-22b 41 42 43 44 A(Xcp/Cr) Act A(Xcp/Cr) /A r 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3r r 1 49 50 (Xcp/Cr 4*1*4. .3 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 45 46 47 48 TEMP2 (Xcp/Cr)j 4. A cos A* 0 35 36 37 Itan /o t QnCLmax aRef A(Xcp/Cr) A(Xp/Cr) i 4.4. .+ .1. cos i tan a. . .3 33 33 33 Stability index. = " " :" * p S.3 4. ..4. 4.3 4.3 4.4.1..4. .1.1. kq'' . / +_.1..4. ...4. • . .3 331 188 : • . _ . .1. .1.4.1.3 4.3 4. .1. .4..

51 (Xcp/C)• 4.4.89I~ .1.r VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "CHT" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/OEFIf"TIOtI 6VELA.3 33 Sref I 189 189 't '-.

5. Wing skin friction coefficient Inboard panel skin friction coefficient Outboard panel skin friction coefficient 4./cos ALE 29 30 R e 4. A(16)/ROUGFC Ratio of exposed wing to reference areas 4.2-I .1.2-53 Figure 4.2 4.2-53 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 A (201) (RLER) 3 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 (RLER)I Cf Cfi Cfo A(201)*(RLER).SUBSONIC WIIIG DRAG PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "D" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEfINITIONS OVERt AY I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R1 i/k S*/Sr R 0 R (Rv) (Rv)I (RLER).5.2 Figure 4.1 Figure 4.1.5.1.1-28b 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 RLS RL (Rt) 1 (Rt)o RN (RN)I (RN) 0 CDo (CDo) (CDo) 0 (R~s) I (RLs)O Inboard panel Reynolds number Outboard panel Reynolds number Wing zero lift drag coefficient Inboard panel CDo Outboard panel CDo Inboard pdnel RS Outboard panel RLS 25 I27 28 26 (6CDL)J RLER 3 3 3 Rv3 A.1.5.5.5.5.1.1.1.2-53 Figure 4.5.1.1.5.3 3 190 V --.2 4. Ai .2 Figure 4.1.5.

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "D" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY 31 32 33 34 35 36-55 BA BW aA BW V CDL CDJ (CDL)J Wing drag coefficient Wing induced drag coefficient 3 3 3 3 3 3 /1 191 .

2-53 Figure 4. 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 (RL)f RN (RN) (RN) 1 5 Inboard panel Reynolds number Outboard panel Reynolds number HT zero lift drag coefficient Inboard IOanel CUo Outboard panel Co 0 Inboard panel R Outboard panel RLS AHT(201)* E) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 CDO (CDo)I (CDO) (RL$)I (RL$)O (hCDL)J R LRLER RV A.2 ence areas Figure 4.5.2-53 5 5 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 (Rv)i (RLER)0 (RLER)i Cf Cfl Cf0 RLS RL (RL) 1 4.5.1-28b 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 16 17 18 ~f 19 20 21 22 2.5..1.2 192 Figure 4.1. Figure 4.SUBSONIC HORIZONTAL TAIL DRAG PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINIT.1.1.2-1 I _.5.5. .2-53 Figure 4.5..1./cos AL R e I 4.5.1.5.2 4..2 4.ION OF DATA BLOCK "DHT" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOtA REFERENCE COMMENTS/OEFINITIONS VERLAj R' 5 2 3 U/k P/S r AHT(16)/ROUGFC Ratio of exposed HT to refer- 5 5 4 5 6 R 0 (Rv) 4.1.1 AHT(201)*(RLER)g AHT(201)*(RLER)I liT skin friction coefficient inboard panel skin friction coeffidient Outboard panel skin friction coefficient.1. I/ .5.1.5. .1.

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DHT"t LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/OF'INITbONS VERLA 31 32 33 34 35 BA BW $A aW V CDL CDj (CDL)j HT drag coefficient HT induced drag coefficient 5 5 5 5 5 5 36-55 II t _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _... ........_ 193 ....-- / "..

'" ..1..5.2 194 4.2-53 Figure 4. .. -'.\ .1.1.. ""' :.2-53 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 a 8 8 8 8 8 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 a 6 7 8 9 10 It 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 • 26 (Rv).5. (R) (RLER) 0 (RLER)i Cf Cfl Cf' RLS R8L (R )i 1...5.2-i - . -• ' % • ..5." / I .5.1 • 4. . .2-53 Figure 4. + . ""2 o-..5. . (RI)¢ RN (RN) (RN) 0 CDo (CDo) I (CDO) 0 (RLs)I (RLs)O (ACDL)J RLER AX/cos ALE R 4. .5.1.2 AVF(16)/ROUGFC Ratio of exposed VF to reference areas Figure 4..A SUBSONIIC VENTRAL FIN DRAG PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DVF" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY 'K.1. .2 4.1.1 V.1..5.1./k S*/Sr Ro RI 4..1. • " j : •- ..1-28b- Inboard panel Reynolds nwnter Outboard panel Reynolds number VF zero lift drag coefficient Inboard panel C o 0 Outboard panel Coo Inboard panel RIs Outboard panel RLS 27 28 29 30 Figure 4.z -.5. \... v " ". .F. skin friction coefficient Inboard panel skin friction coefficient Outboard panel skin frIction coefficient Figure 4.1. '" •+ "-. S.. 8 8 8 1 2 3 4 5 RI 1. . .5. .

VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DVF" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE CommlsTS/ DEFINITIONS ORLAY 31 32 33 31' BA 35 36-55 sA ow V CDL8 CDJ (COL)J 8 8 8 VF dra~g coefficient VF Induced drag coefficient 8 8 Ik 195 / j .

2-53 Figure 4.5..5.1.5.5.1.5.5..1 V.SUBSONIC VERTICAL TAIL DRAG PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DVT" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 261 R' 1/k S*•/Sr r. Cf CfInboard CfI CfoOutboard 2Cf 0 RLS R L (R1).2 196 Figure 4.1.1. 28 29 30 Rv AX/cos AL R e 4.1-28b 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Inboard panel Reynolds number Outboard panel Reynolds number VT zero lift drag coefficient Inboard panel CDo Outboard panel CDo Inboard panel RLS Outboard panel RLS 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 27.2-53 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 4.1.1.5. Ro R1 (RV)O (Rv)I (RLER)0 (RLER).2 4.5.T.1. (RL)O RN (RN) 1 (RN) 0 CDO (CDO)I (CDO)o (RLS)I (RLS)o (ACDL)J RLER AVT(16)/ROUGFC Ratio of exposed VT to reference areas 4.5.2-53 Figure 4.1.1.1.5.2 Figure 4.2-i . skin friction coefficient panel skin friction coefficient panel skin friction coefficient Figure 4.2 4.

. . . VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DVT" SNAME LOCATION 31 VARIABLE SYMBOL ENGINEERING REFERENCE DATCOM COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS - VERLAY BA $A 8 32 33 34 35 36-55 8W sW V L ChL CDj (CDL)J 8 8 8 VT drag coefficient VT induced drag coefficient 8 8 r II -I /F 197 DO . .-..... .-.r . .-.

1 Mach number at horizontal tail 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 4.4.1 4.1-73 21 21 21 21 21 TE aTE 198 J !1 .1 4.4. 236 237 SDW CLANL M ZWAKEC ZC DELQ0 DLE DELTAZ XSLIR THETA DELTE THETE JDETCH (ac/a)1.4.1 X at survey plane Shock wave angle.1 4.4.1 4.4.4. (ZE/aci) AVG 4.4.SUPERSONIC DOWNWASH VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DWA" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DAT-COM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVER I MACH BETA X(l) X(2) Y(1) Y(2) Z(1) Z(2) ALPHA 2 2 M 0 XlI/Bbw X2/Ibw 4.4.1 Mach number Mach number parameter 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9-28 2Y /bw 2Y 2 /bw 2Z I/bw 2Z 2 /bw aJ + ai 29-68 69-70 71-108 109-128 ZE DHB UNUSED DEPAVG (2Z/bw)Ef ]4.1 4.4.4.1 [2h/a6b] 1.4. Figure 4.1 4.4.1 4.1 21 21 21 129-168 169-188 189-208 209 210-229 230 231 232 233 234 235. CLa J (M ) JH Zw/7 r Zj (Aq/q) 0 +a -6 -J LE AZj Xsurvey a 6 4.4.

4.1 7.1.1.1 1 2 C L Eqn.1-6 Figure 7.44.1.1.2 UNUSED 7.1.4.1-8 Eqn.1.c.1.4.4.4.1.1.2 7.2 7.2-8 Cmq referenced to body axes with the origin at the wing a..2 7.1.1.1.1. 7.1.1-10 (a-c) Eqn.1 7.1. Inviscid derivative of C due to 43 43 CLG F8N CM0G 7mCMADPP F6N EPPBC GBC CLQPWH F3•J F4N XACCRB CLQWPP CLAD2 F5N F7N FIN CMQPWH CL 9 F8 (N) Cm 0 Cl F6 (N) Eoc Goc Ciq F3 F4 (N) X /1 ac r BCz q (CLa) 2 7.2 7.2-8 Figure 7.1.1-7 m 44 44 44 44 44 44 M=O (CLa)i FI(N) F2 (N) F3 (N) (Cm*) (Cma) 7. .2-13a thru 13p 199 S.1-8(a-f) Figure 7.1.1-8 Figure 7.1.1.2 7. Figures 7. 7.2 7.1.2 7.1.1.1.1)1 7.DYNAMIC DERIVATIVE VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DYN" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOMI REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERI AY I 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CMQMFB CMQ2 (Cmq)Mfb (Cmq)M=.1.1.2-b Figure 7.4.1.4.1.1.1. 9- " - _ '•£ .2 Figure 7.4.1 7.1 7.2-8 Figure 7. .1. 54 43 44 43 43 43 43 43 • 16 17 18 19 20 21 F5 (N) F7 (N) F7 (N) Cmq (dC qI /dCL) m 22 23 24 25 26 27 CLADI FIN F2N F3X CMADI CMAD2 L 7.4.. .1.4.2 Figures 7.. 7.2 7.1 7.1 7.1.1.1.2 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 3.4.2 Eqn.4.1. 7.1-7 Figure 7.4.4.1-9 From section 4. L.1-6 Eqn.4.1.4.2-9 Figure 7.4.1-7 Figure 7.1.1.1 7.4.1.1.1.1 7.1-c.4.4.1.1 7.1.1.1.1.1.4.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1-d Figure 7. .4.4. Figures 7.1-c.1.1.4.1.1.1.4.4.4.1 7.1 7. 1.1. 7.1.2-b Low speed wing pitching darlvative (M=.1.2-9 Figure 7.1.4.. 1-8 (a-f) Figure 7.2) Figure 7.1.1.1 7.4.1-9 Figure 7.1.

2 Nose distance to moment ref axis Afterbody distance to moment ref axis Flare distance to moment ref axis Hypersonic nose Cmq Hypersonic afterbody Cm Hypersonic flare Cmq Body Volume Eqn. 7.2 7.2.1.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.2.1.1.2. ______________________ 200 ______..1.2-20 Figure 7.1.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DYN" lOCATION L VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERIAY 28 29 30 31 32 LAMN LAMA LAMF CNQPN CNQPA CNQPF NN NA NF CMQPN CMQPA CMQPF VB CMQj CMQA CMQF ALSD N A F (CN q N (CNq)A (CN )'F Nose taper ratio Afterbody taper ratio Flare section taper ratio 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 ) 7..1.2. eqn.2.2.2-20 45 45 P CL.1. St " ' / .1.2. afterbody flare 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 (Cq (Cmq)F V (Cmq)N (Cmq)A (Cmq)F (0) (CL=•c =0 q 46 46 46 46 46 46 45 S45 46 CNPCLM 7.1.1.1 7.1.2.1.2.2 Wing.1.3-b 45 45 (dCnp/bCL) CL-O 47-66 67 68 CLA ZEE CLPCLP CL.2. nose Eqn.2.1.2 7.1.2.2 7.2.2-c.2-c.2. 7. 7.2. Z (Co )r/ 7.2.1.3 Obtained from method of 4.2-b "(Ckp 69 CLPCL2 r=O 7.1 (Cm') N (Cm I)A 7.1.1. 7.1.G.1. wing-body lift curve slope 45 45 45 Vertical distance between C.2 7.2 7.. 7.2.2-c.1 q Hypersonic afterbody CNq Hypersonic flare CN Hypersonic nose CN 33 34 35 36 Nq)F q 7.2-24 45 2 (C p)CDL/ CL 70 71 BA0K BCLPCL BA/K (aCp /K) 7. Eqn.2.2 7.1.1.2 Figure 7.1.2 Figure 7. C no it1 _________.2 Eqn.1 7..2 7.2.1.2 7.2.1.2.1.2. ._____________ .2.1 7.1. and wing root chord Dihedral effect.1.3.2.2.1.

1-16 Cyp as f(a) Figure 7.3 1 7.2.2.2.1.2.1.3 7.2 7.1 Eqn.1.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DYN" "LOCATION 72-91 92 93 94 95 96-115 116-135 136-155 156-175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184-203 204 205 206 207 208 VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DAICOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VER[.1.1 7.2'.1.2. DRA (Cnp/CL) C =M=O L n-M2 cos 2 .3-c Modified Mach number parameter Zero lift drag coefficient Figure 7.1.1 [(Cy/C) CL0O Cnr/CL2 Cnr/CDO CO 0 7.1.1.2.1.2.1 7.3.3.2.2. DCLPD CNPCL0 BEE CDO CNPTHE DCLDA DCDDA DCADA KAY CLPG DCYPG TRANS CHANGE CYPCLM TRADE CNRCLZ CNRCDO CD00 TRENS CHENGE CYPA CNPTAS CNPAI (ACt.1 Figure 7.1-d 45 45 Dimensionless.3 7.2. 7.2.3.2.1.1.2.1-9 Zero lift (dCyp/dCL) at Mach 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 (Cp )r=C_ 7.3 45 t -201 - .1.1. tan a) 7.1.2.3.3 7.2.1.2.1.2.1 7. 7.1 a/ac(CDCDO) 2 a/a (CL ffA) K Terms of eqn.1 7.3 7.1.2.2-c Eqn.3-7 - 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 Cyp/a (Cnp/a)/ tan ALE (Cnp/a) p 2 CDo vs CL 3lntermediate table lookup values jfor Figure 7.3-14 Terms of eqn.1.2.3 7. CDo AC /6 a/ac(c.1 7.2.1.2.1.2.1 7.2.1.1.1.1 7.2.1.3 f 7.1.3-6 Figure 7.2.1 : L (LCyp)r 7.1.2.3.correction factor Roll damping without dihedral at zero lift Increment in Cyp due to " lIntermediate table lookup values /for Figure 7.1.1.1 7.3-12 45 45 45 45 45 115 7. 7.3 209 GNPA2 (Cn /a) 7.1.1... 7.1.1.

1.2.2.1.2.3-f Result of eqn.3 7. 7.3-g 45 202 .2.1. /a) 3 (cn /ct) p BODY AXES (CP/c) Total (Cn /6) p 7.1. 7.VARIATION DEFINITION or DATA BLOCK SbDYNH LOCATION VARIABLE NAME FNGINEERING DATCOm SYM BOL REFE RENCE CMET/EIITIN CMET/EIIIN VRA EIA 210 211 212 CNPA3 CtIPA CNPAE (C'.3 7.3 Term of eqn.2.2.2.3-f Eqn.2.3 Resul t of eqn. 7. 7.1.1.1.3-e 45 45 45 213 CNPBA 7.~A.1. Nk .

4.1.1.1.1.1.2-8 Figure 7.1.1.1.4.1 7.1. Figures 7.1.+ +.2-b Figure 7.- y/ -1 .1.4.2-8 Figure 7. 4 43 M=O (CL).4.1.4.4. 4 .1.2 7.4.4.1.1.1. pitching derlvative (M-.1. 7.1.4.1.1.4.1.1.2 7.1-6 Eqn.1-8 Figure 7. 1 7.2 7.1.2 Figure 7.1.1 7.1.4. Inviscid derivative of C due tG 7. .2 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.1-8 43 43 CMQ2 (Cm)=2 UNUSED CLg F8 (N) Cmo C"ma F6 (N) EB G 7.4.1.1.4.1-9 From section 4. 7.1.1.4.1 7.1 7. DATCOM EEREC COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY CMQMFB 2 3 4 5 CLG F8N CM0G CMADPP F6N EPPBC GBC 11 12 13 14 --15 (Cmq) )Eq.1.1.1.4.4. q Mfb 7.4.1.44.1.4.J - : -i .1.1.4.1. 7. 1-d Figure 7.1. 7. .2-8 Cm referenced to body axes with 4 43 43 43 3.2-b Low speed H. 1-8(a-f) Figure 7.i-c. F (N) F2 (N) F3 (N) (Cm.4.1.2) Figure 7.1-10 (a-c) Eqn.c.1.1 7.1. Figures 7.4.1.1-7 Figures 7.1.1.1.1.1-6 Figure 7.4.1.2 7.2-9 Figure 7.1-9 Figure 7.1.1 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 6 7 8 9 10 CLQPWH F3N F4N XACCRB CLQWPP CLq' F3 (N) F4 (N) X/ac/r OCq (C) 7.4.4.27 CLAD! FIN F2N F3X CMAD1 CMAD2 (dCm/dCL the origin at the wing a..1 Eqn.1.1.1.1. 1-8(a-f) Figure 7.1.1.2-13a thru 13p "203 '.1.2 CL Eqn.)l (Cma) 2 44 44 44 44 44 44 .1.1.2 v.2 7.1I.T.1.1 7.1-7 Figure 7.1 o7.2-9 Figure 7.1-7 Figure 7.2 7.1.1.1 7.HORIZONTAL TAIL DYNAIIC DERIVATIVE VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITIO'N OF DATA BLOCK "DYNH" "LOCATION LOAI VARIABLE NAE ENGINEERING SMBI.1.1-c.2 54 43 44 43 43 43 43 16 17 18 19 20 CLAD2 F5N F7N FIuN CMQPWH (CL3) 2 q F5 (N) F 7 (N) F1 1 (N) Cmq 21 22 23 24 25 26 .1.1.1.2 7.1.1.4.1.4.1.1.

2-b 45 "69 70 71 CLPCL2 (C )CDL/ CL 2 BA0K BCLPCL OA/K (3Cz p/K) CL'O 7.G.2 Figure 7. and wing root chord Dihedral effect.T.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "DYIIH" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLA 28 LAMN N Nose taper ratio 46 29 30 31 32 - LAMA LAMF CNQPN CNQPA CNQPF NN A F (CN4)N (CN4)A (CN') F 7. nose q 46 46 46 46 46 45 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 UNUSED (Cmq)N (Cmq)A (Cmq)F (a) (CLac0 (dCnp/ CL) 7.2-24 45 7. " "' " I IP :/ .1 (Cm')N 7.2..2.2 7.1.2.2 7.1.1.2-c.1 7.2 H.1.1 7.1.3.2.T. eqa..2-c. Eqn.1. ".2-c.2.1.1. 7.2 Afterbody taper ratio Flare section taper ratio Hypersonic nose CNq Hypersonic afterbody CNq Hypersonic flare CNq Nose distance to moment ref axis Afterbody distance to moment ref axis Flare distance to moment ref axis Hypersonic nose Cmq 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 33 "34 35 36 37 38 39 NA NF CMQPN CMQPA CMQPF CMQN CMQA CMQF ALSD CLACL0 CNPCLM (Cmq)A (Cm4)F 7.1.2.2.1.2.2.1. 7.2.2. 7.2.2.1 7.2 7.1.2.1.1.2.2 7.2.1.1.3 P Obtained from method of 4.1.2.2.2 7.1.2 Figure 7.1.1.1.2.1 7. Eqn. 7.2. 45 45 Vertical distance ecween C.2 7.2 7.2.1.1. 7.1.2.2.1.2 Hypersonic afterbody Cm Hypersonic flare Cmq Eqn.1.2-20 45 45 "204 X L.1 7.2-20 Figure 7.1.2.2.2.-body lift curve slope afterbody flare 45 45 CL-O 47-66 67 68 :C CLA ZEE CLPCLP CLa Z (Cp )T/ ' ) =O 7.2.3-b L H.1.2 Eqn.

2.3 l-M 2cos 1/7.3. 7.1.1.1.1.1 7.1.-ient (A 4 )] c/ CDo ACnp/ 8 7.2.1 7.1.2-c 7.EE CDO CNPTHE DCLDA DCODA DCADA (ACio)DRAG 7.1.2.3.1.1-10 Cyp as f(a) Figure 7.2.3.3.2. Eqn.1.2.2.1.2.3-c 45 45 45 45 45 45 7.1. 7.3.1.3-7 CDo vs CL lintermediate table lookup values •for Figure 7.1.3-6 Figure 7.1.1.1.2.1 7. Increment in Cyp due to 7 Intermediate table lookup values Jfor Figure 7.1 Cyp/a (Cnp/a)/ tan ALE (Cnp/a) 1 (Cnp/a) 2 Flgre 7.1.1.1.3 7.1 Modified mach number parameter Zero lift drag coeffi.1.2.2.2.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DAýA BLOCK "DYWIH" LOCATION VARIARLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY 72-91 92 93 94 95 96-115 116-135 136-155 DCLPD CNPCLO .1 LC (ACyp)7.1.1.2.1.2.2.1 7.1.2.1.1 Figure 7.1.1 Dimensionless correction factor Roll damping without dihedral at zero 1if.1 7.3-12 3/ac(C tan ca)L 3/3a(C DCD) CDO) 2 3/3a(C L/ TrA) Terms of eqn.2.1.1 7.3 7.1-9 Zero lift (dCyP/dL) at Mach 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 (CZp )V=C = 7.3 7.1.3 7. 2 .2.2.1.1.2.1-d 45 45 156-175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184-203 204 205 206 207 208 209 KAY CLPG DCYPG TRANS CHANGE CYPCLM TRADE CNRCLZ CNRCDO CD00 TRENS CHENGE CYPA CNPTAS CNPAI CNPA2 K 7.1 CL=0 Cnr/C L2 Cnr/CDo CDo 7.3-14 Terms of eqn.2.3 205 - - .2.2.1. =M=O Eqn. 7.2.1 [(CyP/CL)P 7.3 7 .2 (Cnp/CL) C..' 7.3-f 7.2.1.2.

2.1.2.3 7.VAR IABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOL.3-f 45 45 212 213 CNPAE CNPBA BODY AXES (Cnp/a.3 Eqn.) Total (Cnp)SA 7.1.3 Term Result of eqn.2.3-f 7.3-e 45 45 * I - 206 .i. 7.2.1. of eqn.2. 7.2.1.1. NAME LOCATION VARIABLE -0 - "DYNH" OVERLAY DATCOM ENGINEERING REFERENCE SYMBOL COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS 210 211 CNPA3 CNiPA (cnp/a) (Cnp/a) 7.

1 (6 Fa) (C2) (C ) a 115 116 117 119 120 121r (fo tc (b )t (b)t f______________________ 20] .SY". C.TE/2) C 6 e (8jet)~ Eff 74 75 -84L JETFLP EFFJET CAP INB CAPOUr DOBDEF DWBIN DOBCOT TTYPE CFOTC BITC BOTC 85-94 95-...iETRICAL1 AND HET FLAPS INPUT '/ARIA61ES VANdA21E DEFINITIG!N OF DATA BLOCK "F" LOC AT 10N VARIABLE NAME 7NG ENGINEER SY' 90OL ('.TC0m REFERENCE COMMENTS/ OEFINI TIONS V RLt 1-I DET I lpfinput a('E2I Cf I Cf0 via NAIIELIST SYPIFLP 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19-28 PHETE CHRDF1 CHRDF0 SPANF1 SPANNFbO NDELTA FYTPE UNUSED SCLD SCHO CPRME1 Aci c c.SI4 105-1114 CI . c C b t/c 29-38 39-48 49-58 59 61 62 63 64-73 CPRH1E0 CB 61 rC PHETEB NT-PE Chu OELJET tan(.

128 129 130 131 132 133 CFIT'r CFOTT BITT BOTT 81 82 83 B4 DI D2 D3 GCMTC (Cfi)tt (Cf )tt (bi)tt (b o)tt Input via NAMELIST SYMFLP (GCMAX )tC 134 135 136 137 138 GCMTT KS RL BGR (G CMAX)tt k RL a Ar DEOR 208 .OCATION NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE RLAY COMMENIS/DEFINITIONS COMMENT___________TIONSOVERLAY 122 123 124 125 126 127 .VARIABLE DEFIt4ITIOt' OF DATA BLOCK "F" VARIABLE .

C Cf 0 bI b0 UNUSED 6 6R 6 S/c Xs/c hscI I 2 209 x. .. Input via NAMELIST ASYFLP tan(€÷E/2).ASYMMETRICAL FLAPS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "F" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENG!WNERING SYMBOL OATGOM REFERENX E' COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY !-10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19-28 29-38 39-48 49-58 59 60-69 DELTAD PHETE CHRDFI CHRDF0 SPANFI SPANFO NDELTA STYPE DELTAL DELTAR DELTAS XS¢C XSPRME HSOC 6 d/c .

TRANSVERSE JET VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLnCK "F" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME DATCOM ENGINEEk'.NG SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMEfNTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY 1-10 TIME NT t Input via NAMELIST TRNJET 11 12-21 22-31 32 33 34 FC ALPHA ME IePSP SPAN FC M e b 35 36 37 38 39-48 PHE GP cc LFP LAMNRJ y c L 210 .

- / .. : •:. Cf 6f Input via NAMELIST HYPEFF 2 S~211 .. .HYPERSONIC FLAP VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "F" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS RLAY 1 2 3 4 5-14 15 16 ALITD XHL TWOTI CF HDELTA LAMNR HNDLTA h XHL Tw/T.

4.4. IVB(H% (7/27TaVr) H. 4. span Vortex interference factor for body vortex on horizontal panel Non-dimensional vortex strernth of H.4.1 Eqn.3 4.1 4.3. 2 ! 212 .T. 4.l-c.4.28 10.3.l-e 9 10. 4 7 10 9 IVw(H) a bv E e .4.3.1.d 82-101 102-121 122-141 142 143-162 163-182 4.T.T.- - - /-- I-.3 Canard effective jownwash angle Canard effective downwash gradient Exposed H.T.1 IVB(w) 1 /27TaVr Vortex interference factor for body vortex on wing panel Non-dimensional vortex strength Vortex interference factor for wing on horizontal tail Eqn.1.28 7 7 7 (de/dca)e (b/2-b*/2) /(b/2)H.1.1..T.3 4.- ~ - - - - ------ /1 - . ratio to total H.3.SUBSONIC WING AND HORIZONTAL TAIL PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FACT" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEE INITIONS fVERLAY L 7 7 (b/2-b*/2) /(b/2) 2-21 22-41 42-61 62-81 Exposed wing to total wing span ratio 4.3 4. .

1 6.1.5.5.1 6.1.1.1 - (W6)AVG CK (G/6) (G/6) K (xLE)K (Cf/c)K AXCP Act Inboard panel spanwise loading coefficient Outboard panel spanwise loading coefficient Flap effectiveness derivative average Actual chord at station K Increment in spanwise loading coefficient Figure 6.1.1.1 37 37 37 2113 I -.1 6.5.5.1.SUBSONIC HIGH LIFT AND CONTROL PITCHING MOMENT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FCM" LOCATtON VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING REFERENCE DATCOM SYMBOL COmMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLAY I 2-5 6 7-20 21-34 SWEEPB B0c CAVG ETAK A 8 (b/c) K CAVG 6.5. i .5.1.1 6.5.5.5.1.1.1.5.1 6.1-26A Flap chord to wing chord ratio at station K 6.1 Average wing chord 37 37 37 nK (CZA)K/ (•) 6 Spanwise station ratio CLOALD GDINBD GD0UTB ALPDEL CK DELTGD KK XLE CF0C DXCP DELCL 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 AVG 1 0 35-48 49-62 63-72 73-86 87-100 101-114 115-128 129-142 143-282 283-287 (G/6) (G/6) 6.1 6.

2 6.1. Eqn.1.3.1.1. 6.1 Ch/Chct Theory Chal Ch• (Lh)M 6.1.1.1.1.SUBSONIC HIGH LIFT AND CONTROL HINGE MOMENT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FHG" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGIrNEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY I 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 CLATHY CHATHY CHACHT CHAP CHAPP CHAMAC BRATIO CHBCHA (Cl) Theor y 6.1.1. 6. 6.3o2 6.6.3.1.3. 6.1-4 Figure 6. 6.3.1.1.3.1.6.6.3.1.3.1.3.1.1-11b Figure 6.2-7B Figure 6.1 (Chx)Theory 6.6.2 Figure 6.1 6.3.2-7A Eqn.1.2-e Figure 6.3.3.6.3.3.2 Theory 10 CHDCHT CHDTHY Ch6 /Ch6 Theor Ch 6 Cha Chi 12 13 14 15 .1-7b Eqn.2-8 Ch6 CHDPPB DCHA0K (Chý)BaIar ce ACha L[CaB 2 K= 6.3.1.3.3.1.1.2-a Eqn.1 6.1-5 Balance ratio.1.3.Ch6) 1/6 17 CHDP CHDPP CHDMAC CHBCHD 6.3.2-98 36 36 KDELTA K 214 _______-Ir.1 6. 6.1.3.6.1 (Cha)Balarce 6.1 From Figure 4.2 6.3.1.1 6.2-b 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 6.1.1.1.1.1 Figure 6.1-8 p.1-d Figure 6.1 6.1-b p.2 (Ch6lM r e6 I.1.1.w / ¶ I .1.1.1. 6.1.3.3.3.6.1-15B 36 36 36 Cosine of hinge line sweep 6.3.6.1 Cha Chi Balan 6.1.3.1-a Eqn.3.2-lb Figure 6.1.1 Figure 6. 6.3.3.1-16 Figure 6.2 (Ch6)Ba aIa e3 ( Eqn.1-15A 36 36 "Cos Ac/4] 18 19 CB0CF CF 0CAP C/Cf C a/Ci 36 36 y 20 21 22 23SHL 24 B2 KALPHA DELCHA B2 Ka ACha cos (AHL) 6..1.

2 Figure 6..2-gA 36 cosAc.1.6.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FHG' LOCAl ION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE CMET/EIIIN CMET/EIIIN VRA EL 25 DCD0 Ah6.1. cc 4 AHL) 26-35 DCHD ACh 6 36 215 .6.

2. 6. 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 BCL0KO BCLDOK CLDPRM CLDL CLDR KFACTR SBACKI THETAI DELETO DELETI ETAIEFF ETA0EFF BCLDI BCLD0 KYAW [(CL6/Kj1 0 $C16/K C (cO.•-I.1.1.1. Outboard Eqn.1.2.1-40 Spoiler sweep-back See sketch (g) Eqn. L (Cjd)R KI AS 0S (A 0 1)1 nlEff T0Eff IBC /K [(C8 6 /K].1-23(a-c) 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 5 " i 3 4 5 6-15 16-25 26-35 36 37.1.1..2.2. 6.2.2.1 6. [PCl 6 /I [SCLKI A8 6. UNUSED K 6.1-e. 6. Outboard 6.2. 6.1 6.2.1. Inboard Eqn.2.2.2.1 6.1.2.1-a Left wing lift effectiveness Right wing lift effectiveness Figure 6.1-e.1.1.1-Jd.1 6.SUBSONIC HIGH LIFT AND CONTROL ASvMMETRICAL DEFLECTIONI VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLUCK "FLA" SLOCATION VARIABLE L NAME ENGINEERING DATCCjM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS RLA ] I SWEEPB -.2.2.1 6.2.1 Figure 6.1 6.2.1.1.1 6.2.1 6.6.1.l.1-23(a-c) Eqn.2.1.1-d. Inboard Eqn.21 / i/ -"------ .1-9 52 'I _ ___ ___ __ .2.2.1 Figure 6.2.2.2.101 6.1 6.1.1 6.2.1.1.1.1. 1.1 Figure 6.

.FLIGHT CONDITION INPUT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FLC" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/0EFINIT:ONS OVERLA I NMACH NALPHA MACH ALSCHD RNNUB NGH GRDHT PINF h PC* Input via RAI5ELIST FLTCON 1" . * * f • 217 . pV/P 2 3-22 23-42 43-62 63 64-73 74-93 94 STMACH TSMACH "95 96 97-116 117-136 i17-156 : 157 158 159 * 160 TR ALT TINF VINF WT T.i. GAMMA NALT LOOP y 7 ' -.

3-7 36 102 DCLMAB (axCt max BASE 218 - -"-- -t .4.1.1.1. flap effectiveness derivative 36 36 36 36 36 24-27 28-32 33 34-38 39-43 44-53 1>' Swf CK' CLa/CE THEORY [C.1.1.1.6/C£.1 .1.1 6.1.1.1.1 Dimensionless span station Chord of wing at nK Flap chord at nK Figure 6.1.1.1-32A FlI' for translating devices 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 40 36 36 36 36 (Ce6 ) THEORYK (ACX)Cf/c.2-8A Figure 6.5.1.1.1.5.1.1-25B Figure 6.1 Wing avea affected by flap Extended wing chord at station k.1-8 LI 71-80 81-90 91-100 101 CFACT nSCLMX RK2 RK! (CI/C-I)x Swf/SR 36 Increment is section max lift 36 36 AC.1.1 6.1.1. 6.1.4.1.1.1 An/4 (C/C) (Cf/C)K (a6)C / 6.1-31A Figure S.1 4.5.1. THEORY]K 6.1.4.1.1-25A Figure 6.1. K 2 K1 36 6.1.1.1.2 6.1 6.1 6.3 Figure 6.5."SUBSONIC HIGH LIFT AND CONTROL LIFT COEFFICIENT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FLP" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY 1-5 6-10 11-15 16-19 20-23 ETA CHRD CF ALDAVG DKB SWF CP CLOCLT CLD0CT CLDTHY DELCL2 DALPDE TRANSL DELN4 CF0CA CF0C ADCADS nK CK CfK (%6AVG KB 6.C' Figure 4.1-8.1 Average flap chord to wing chord ratio Flap chord to wing chord ratio vs n Figure 6.1.1.2 (Aa/6)K 1 54-58 59 60 61 62-66 67-70 6.4.1.

1 DATCOm OOMNSDFNTOSVERLAY ________________ _ __ _ 103 104 10I5-109 110-149 150-189 RK3 KSWEEP ALPHAD DELCLA ALDAG K 3 K (a6)K (LC )AVG (a6)AVG 36 Figure 6.1.4.1.4.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "FLP" LOCATION IVARIABLE NAME ENG.3 6.1 Average of flap effectiveness derivative 36 36 36 36 219 __ __ _ - ' .4.1.INEERING SM BO L JREFERENCE 6.3-7 Insert of Figure 6.4.1-B Average flapped wing lift increment 6.5.1.1.

11 1) 11 11 11 11 BW 8 4.4.1 11 I HTMAC4 R SIGMA HW0CBR T HN r a h/i" R T 4.1 4.1-c Eqn..1 1.7.1-20 Eqn. Figure 4.7.7.7.7.1 4.1-19 Height of wing root chord quarter chord above ground il 11 i 11 11 II Height of wing quarter chord above ground Height of HT quarter chord MAC above ground Figure 4.7.1 11 (a Parameter accounting for effective wing thickness.7.1 4.7. Eqn. - - lI I _____.7..7.1 11 11 11 58 59 60 61-80 81-100 101-120 121-140 x BWOB BEFF DDWASH CLHT ALPHAT x bw'/b bEff (AcJ)G (CLHT)j (aj)G 4.7.1 4.1-a h 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4.1-21 220 S.1 4.___ .3 4 DX DX0B2 H75CR HW HW082 HWCR4 HWC0CR HWMACX HWMAC4 HTMACX AX I1 AX/(b/2) 4. .1-b (cL)wBT-(CL)WB] j( 37-56 57 ALPHWG K (cgj)GW8 K 4.7. 4.7.7. 4.1 16 17-36 GRDHT DALPHA H (Aaj)GwB 4.1 h(b/2) 4.7.1-19 Figure 4.7.1-22 Figure 4.1 11 1' 11 11 11 4.7.7.7. .7 R/ h(CR//4/CR) HCL H HHCL i See insert of Figure 4.7.1_18a Effective wing span.7.7.7. Figure 4.7.1 heR/4 4.1-14 Figure 4.GROUND EFFECT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "GR" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY I 2 .7. .7. .CR h 4.1 Figure 4.1-16 Prandtl Interference coefficient Figure 4.1 75.1-19 Parameter accounting for the reduction of longitudinal velocity..7.1-19 Figure 4.7.

1 Parameter accounting' for' effect of image bound vortex in lift. 4 11 11 11 11 .7.7.7.I 264-283 284-303 DCMHTG DCDLWG of HT due to A(C j)G in CD due to ground D i. to quarter chord MAC of HT 11 11 [(CLIIT) G .VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "GR" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINHERING SYMAI:'t) DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS /D[FI NJNS LERLAY 141-160 LO-LOMI L/Li-I 4.7.7.(CLIIT)i I')Gncrement in C ground effects Increment effects I1 .3-c [(Cmw)G -(Cm)WSf 242 2`3 244-263 LH LH0ECBR DCLHTG £H H! R /c A(CLHTj)G A(C MHTj IS 4.1-15 11i 161-18o 181-200 201 202-221 222-241 CLHTG DCLWBG DXCP DCMWBG CL0COS UCLHTj) G A(CLWB )G n-X ac/cR (Cf 57.g. 221 r .3 CLw 27Tcos2A/ 4.(CLWB)] see eqn.3 [(CLwE) G .3 Distance frum c. Figure 4.

25 7.25 7 7 14 15 16 17 18 19 -. COMMENTS/0EFINITIONS OVERLAY 2 3 UNUSED KH(B) KB(H) Interference factor of HT on body HTInterference factor of body on Lift curve slope of HT in presence of body Lift curve slope of body in presence of HT HT-body zeio-lift drag 7 7 4 5 6 (CL l)H(B) (CL.20--21 22 23 24-39 RWB RLB (CLmax)W8 )W (C' LmaxW HT-body maximum lift HT-body angle of attack of max lift HB(20)*B(44) HB(21)*B(43) UNUSED 7 7 7 7 7 7 222 .)B(H) (CDO)HB 7 7 7 8 kH(B) kB(H) 7 9 10 !1 12 (CLi)H(B) (CLI)B(H) (CLi)HB (Xci)HB 7 7 7 7 13 (X ac1c-) B(h• (Xa'c/Cre) 8(H) (Xac/cre) 4=O HT-body zero-lift pitching moment zero lift drag CmoHB (HT-body 17(cDo) Wcoefficient 7 7.SUBSONIC HORIZONTAL TAIL-BODY VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "4B" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME I ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOm REFERENCE.

)M 69 CAMOT (CLM0 - ~223- . ro ticl A~y (X/C)' CL 1 0 via NAIIELIST HTPLUF 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 *18 19 20 21-40 41-60 Input via NA1¶ELIST HTSCHR CL CLt 66 62 ~CM0 CMOT CLERAX (xc)m (CmL) 0 68 (RC.HORIZONTAL TAIL INPUT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "HTIN" LOAINVARIABLE LOAIN NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/OEFINITIONS OERLAY I 2 3 4 5 6 CHRDTP SSPNOP SSPNE ssptN CHRDBP CHRDR SAVS I SAVS0 CHSTAT TW ISTA SSPNDD DIIDADI DltDAD0 TYDE TOVC DELTAY X0VC CLI ALPHAI CLALF'A CLMAX ctInput */ b*/2 b/2 Cb Cr (A XC)I (A Xic) 0 X/C UNUSED 0 (b/2ý.

__. .VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "HTIN" LOCATIOJ JVARIABILE NAME DATCOM ENGINEERING SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY 70 71 72-91 92 TCEFF KSHARP XAC YCM CLD (t/c)Eff K Xac ARCL (Y/C)max (CL)Design (Transonic ) Input via NAMELIST HTSCHR 93 94 95-114 RLPH xp 115-134 135-154 SHB SEXT SH(B) Sext 224 _____•_._.

•IO VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITION$ C -..3. at 6.N .3. 6. OVERLAY 1-20 -0 21-40 41-60 61-80 PAOPI A TA0TI MALP RAORI I P/P. C A.3.1 [Local pressure ratio upstream of 'interaction 42 42 42 42 T /T M R /R Local temperature ratio upstream of interaction Local Mach nunmer upstream of Local Reynolds number ratio upstream of interaction I2 : i 225 *1 .IHYPERSONIC CONTROL EFFECTIVENESS PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "HYP" IO..•.1 6.3.1 S~interaction 6..1 63.

Cf0 VE/a (Fjo)max (P P)max d X K Free stream dynamic pressure 47 47 47 47 2 3 4 5 6 7-16 17-26 Nozzle throat diameter.TRANSVERSE JET CONTROL PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "JET" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME I ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM -REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY QINF CFO VE0A FJMAX PJHAX LT XCP K q. Amplification factor inches 47 47 47 47 S226 SL .

5.2.2.5.2 [C•It/CI•al 14 14 1NO4l Caal 31 32 33 34 35-54 55-74 ACNA20 Z CN20 CNAO ALPAPR CNP Z 5.2.2.1.2-8 20 8N20 N Figure 5.5.2 5.5.2.2-12 14 (Ki/c')20 N (KL 8 20 14 14 14 KYCN20 25 S~[AKyO/CA2 26 27 I KLBCN0 DKLCNB 5.2 20 Figure 5.5.8.1-8 K' t o 28 29 30 CNACO CNC20 ACNAO (CN CAL) •0 5.2.5.LOW ASPECT RATIO WING AND WING-BODY PARAMETER VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "LB" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS RLAJ I 1 2-21 22 23 ALPHAO L4 ALPHAP KCCA2O aN 0 a 4.2.2 Angle of attack for zero normal force (a-tNo) Eqn.1 Figure 5. 14 14 14 Radian Wing.5.2 5.2 (C 0 5.5.K/N Ca1 24 KCKCC2 5.2.1 5.5.5.2 (CN/CN a) Cal 0 14 14 14 14 (Ct) 20 (CNa) NO (a)j (C') N .2-13 r(KL/c )2 o 14 14 14 14 DKCKCC 1 L.2.2 5.2.2.5.2.2.5.1 5.1.2 5.5. 5.5.2-a (KI /CN CALo20 Figure 5.2.2. -8a (Kt Figure 5.5.5.5-1. wing-body CN referenced t zero normal force reference plane 2SB/trL(HB+BB) 75 76 SHAPEP 14 CPB0PS 227 CPBNO/[CPN/2 7TfSB] 14 171 .

1.5.1-a Figure 5..5. 3 4 9 (A+ )]*LB(90) 2 SB /(H CP&2 0 /CPe (CW)j CPBNo(CP2000•1) Wing. wing-body CA referenced to zero normal force reference plane 4 taneD C14O XCPeC BLUNTP X0CRD X0CRB X0CRT CMP Co XCP/CR (XCP/CR) A(Xcp/CR) A(XCP/CR) (Cml)j 14 14 14 1-[-] 14 14 14 "118 119 "120 121-140 228 /~~~~ 2Z2! S1-i~l~i .1 5.5. .1 Ky NO UNUSED 5.1-8a KNo/CNlA Eqn.3.5.5.1-6 XCG/CR-XCP/CR 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Cp_ NO (SB) C/ P (-'R) RfL 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 993 94 95-114 115 116 117 LOK CF CXOP SF0SR GEOPAR DCXCXC ACX SHAPEB CP2000 ACPBO CXP L/ROUGFC Cf kCo)NO SF/SR 5.1-6 (XCP)P/XCentroid SBS Figure 5.1.2 2(A) (SF) [R SR 14 14 14 14 14 14 1/3 LE~ Cald20 14 14 144 14 14 14 14 (ACX/AC• 2 [.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "LB" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/)EFI'JITINS OVE•LAY 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 DKLCN0 KNBN0 XCPXC KYBNO DX CPBO RN 5.3.1. 5.5.5.2.3.5.3.5.1 Figure 5.] KO 5..

2 5. wing-body yawing moment derivative vs ai KLB 5..5.5..2 Wing.. H.1.3. VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "LB" LOCA ION VARIABLE NAME -_ ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS __ _ OVERLAY 141-i60 r"derivative KYB KNB (KyO)' (Kn )Pj (K )j 5.5.S. wing-body side force vs a' _ 14 14 14 161-180 181-200 Wing..2.2 8"derivative Wing.. wing-body rolling moment vs a' 2 /"/ ..

230 -. i N'i COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS RLA 1 2 3 4 ZB SREF DELTEP SFR0NT Z8 Sf=SP ' 6 SF .Tm _ SLOW ASPECT RATIO WINJG-BODY INPUTS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "LBIN" LOCATION VARIABLE NM ENGINEERING SYMBOL k DATCOM fE r. - . / .nput via NAMELIST LARWB 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 AR R3LE0B DELTAL L SWET PERBAS A (R /3LE)/E 6 LB Swet P SBASE HB BB SB hB bB 12 13 14 BLF 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 XCG 'THETAD R0UNDN SBS SBSLB XCENSB XCENW XCG 6 S9s (SBs) "2ZB (Xcentroi (xe ) Centroi( W ".

.EFERENCk COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY I 2 3 4 SREF CBARR ROUGFC BLREF SRef Input via NAMELIST OPTINS c K bef * I 231 i I ____. ______________'• . .REFERENCE DIMENSIONAL DATA / VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA 6LOCK "OPTN" LOCATION 'I/ARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYM"OL DATCOM .

1 4.1-o SINAPX PRPRD2 13 13 1 13 13 13 13 186 187 CTI BST102 SSTRI aST012 CTIH SST0l SRATIV CT.6. 4. 21 : DCLT XBARP DEUDA DCLNP DCLQ DCLAW DCLHQ DCMNP (ACL)T Y 4.3 4. bA.6.6.1-p See eqn.6. 4. Eqn.6.P )cos aQT 13 13 13 13 13 "199 200 "232 _-_____ _____ __.6.6. 4.3 4.6. 4. 4.6.6. 4.1-s Eqn.1 4.3-j Eq.6..6.6. 6 .' Increment in lift due to thrust.6.63 4. 4.1-s Figure 4. 4.1-I Eqn.6.1-o Eqn.1 Eqn.1 4.1 4.6.1-t Eqn.1 4. 4. 4.3-e Eqn.3 4. 4.6.6.1-p 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 Eqn. b*/2 4.6.46j Eqn.6.4 Figure 4.5-H 4./2 CTI13 .3-b 13 13 22 23-42 43-62 63-82 83-102 103-122 ~u 3e /3a( (ACL)Np (ACL)q (ACL ) A (ACLH)q (ACr) P mN 4. 4.1 4.6.6.i-r Propeller inflow factor nEF(CNa) .6.1 13 13 188 189 190 S.3 4.POWER EFFECT VARIABLES: PROPELLER POWER VARIABLE DEFNNITION OF DATA BLOCK "PW" LOCATION VARIABLE ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY "NAME I-'.6.6.____]__/i .6..6.1 4. 4.1 4.i-m Eqn. 4.6.i 4.1 4.6.6.6.6.6.1 Eqn.6.1-26 4 "191 192 193 194 195 CNAP80 S.1 4. 4 . 4.1-c Eqn.3-1 Square of propeller radius Eqn. 4.3 13 13 13 13 13 13 123 124-143 144-163 164-183 184 185 DCMQ DCMK (AC m)q (AC M)L DCMHQ DCMHE )q (AC MIfj (ACmH) 4.i-j Eqn.6.1 4.1-26 Eqn.6..1-25a Eqn.6.6.3-e Eqn.1-e Figure 4.6. Siw/Srw [(CN)PK KN-80-7 (CN)p C1 CNAP CI 196 197 198 C2 DEPDAP SRTPCO F COMB01 !2 •c•/a3a Rp Sr \f 4.6.6.P (. 4.6.' 4.6j1 4.

4-4 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 ZS B102 COSAT SINAT SI TRI ".6.6.3-a 4.4 4. 4.': -./2 cos aT sin aT S.b.6. Eqn. c"' oi cos A.4 4.4-3 p.6. 4.6.6.3 See Eqn.6. 1.4 4.!" LOCATIONIVARIABLE NAME ENGiNEERING SYM 6OL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS 7 VE LAY 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 2111 212 213 214 215 216 217 COMBO•3 COSAIH SIOSRH SIH DCDOS CDOPOW RPNOB AAK EBROEP DCMT ASTARI TRPSTI XBRSRR ALPHAT ALPHAP EP SI'NAP cos a iH SiH/SrH (Si)H 13 13 1.4 Eqn. CBARLI SWEEPA TRPSI SCAPI TRSOi CBSR5I C0SSWA Z b.4-d 13 13 i3 (ACDO)s (CDO)Power 4.4-a.6.4-i 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 (AC m)T A.4 p.'-' X* I X* r aT ap EP sin a p 4.PO'. cl A* 25/i SI x. 4. Eqn.b 4.6. 4.6..ILR EFFECT VARIABLES: PROPELLER POER VARIABLE DEFIrlITION OF DATA BLOCK "PW.6.4 on k13 I'/p 4.6. t 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 233 __ __ _ __ __ ___________ .

. CNP CLP EBAR CLWW CDLRAT 13 13 13 Propeller normal force coefficient Propeller lift coefficient Effective.o 13 13 13 13 13 (CDL)Pt*e off 234 A .downwash over wing span Power on to power off CDL rati.imac ZHEff ZHEff/RP AqH/q.POWER EFFECT VARIABLES: PROPELLER POWER VARIABLE DEFINITION OF CATA BLOCK "PW" OCATON VARIABLE NAME DATCOM ENGINEERING SYMSOL REFERE14CE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS ONER(AY 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 :39 240 241 242 243 ATOVCA CM0IN CM02 CMOOVA CMOTEY CMOI asI BS2 BS3 AKI DELALP DXHMAC ZHEFF 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 K 1 AL AX. Nacelle or fuselage empirical factor 13 13 Vertical distance from HT mac quarter chord to the slipstream center line 13 13 244 245 ZH0RP DQHOQI 13 13 246 ZHT T H ZHT/RP atH C~p CLp e CLW (CDL)Powe* on Vertical distance from the propeller thrust axes to HT mac quarter chord 13 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 ZHTORP XCP DLU.

POWER EFFECT VARIABLES: DATCOMr•LA PROPELLER POWER VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "PW" SLOCAT ION 255 256 257 258 259-278 279-285 VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL COMMENTS/DEF NI TIONS DRA REFERENCE CDLPIW EPOWR YTEMP STEPI DCLHE ARGCS (CDL)P ( o 13 Power on downwash angle 13 13 13 CPower (AC 13 2 - -235 t • ' . .--__ _ _ _ • !.

1 4. JET POWER VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "P!4" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS CMET/EIIIN OVERLA "I 2-21 22 ATP aT 30 CDLT XBARIN (ACL)T XIN 4.1 Eqn.6. 4.6.POWER EFFECT VARIABLES. LT/AE Z•/AA S T'/(XI) Z•Ac/Xvl 4.6.1-30(a-c) Downwash increment 30 ?0 30 - 30 30 30 30 30 30 4.6.6.1-c (vs T) 30 30 23 24 XIN0CR DEUDA IN/Cr ac u /a 30 4.4.l-y e 48 ZJp Zo 49 50 51 52 53 54 Up XHP AIN VIN TIN0TJ VJPOVI X• a V TI/T Vj/Vw 4.1-32a 30 30 236 '-A.1 Fiqure 4. . 4.6.1 Figure 4.1-28 PTe/P= R Rj 4.1-a Eqn.1 Eqn.6.6.6. 4 6 30 30 30 . 4.6.1-29 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 ZJPORJ DE ZJP0BH YT0B2H DEBODE ZJPXHP SRTPCO ZJDEXH COMPI PTE0PI RJP0RJ Z1 /Rj AC Z /bH YT/(b/2) f.1 Longitudinal distance from HT mac quarter chord to jet exit Vertical distance from jet exhaust axei to HT rmac quarter chord Longitudinal distance from Jet wake origin to jet exit Longitudinal distance from HT mac quarter chord to jet wake origin 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 Free stream speed of sound Free stream speed Figure 4. .1 Eqn.1-m 30 25 26 27-46 47 EPSLON ATJ DCLNJ XEP 30 (cT)j (ACL)N Xf 4.6.6.6.1 Figure 4.6.

6.POWER EFFECT VAR'ABLES: JET POWER VARIABLE DEFINITION OF ')ArA BLOCK "P!" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME OATCOM ENGINEERING REFERENCE SYMBOL COMMENTS/DEINITIONS OVERLAY 66 67 68 69 70 RJP DXP0RJ DXP XEPC XHPC R.3 30 I e 237 .3 4.3-o 30 30 30 30 136-155 DCME H (ACm)e 4. Z•/R. X1 71 72 73-92 ZTP ZJPRJP DCLHE ZT.3 J. 4.6. Eqn.3-n Eqn. 4.6.• (ACLH)c 30 30 30 93 94-113 114 115-134 135 ZBART DCMT XL DCMNJ DLH ZT (AC m)T XL (ACm)N AtH 30 4.6. 4.6.1-32b 30 30 30 30 30 XE..6.6.1 Figure 4. AXI/Rj AX' X Radius of equivalent jet orifice 4.3-a Eqn.6.

Rp P) 9 HB (aP)0. R yPInput via NAMELIST PR0PP. T T PTe P. via ?JAMELIST JETPWR nE TO c XIN ze X AIN T.PROPELLER AdD JET POWER INPUTS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "PWIN" ELOCATiON L.JETOTP AMBSTP JtRAD YP Input.VARIABLE NAME ENGINEFRING symook' REFER~ENCE DATCOM COMNS/EIIINS vLA OMNSEFIT VRA I AI ETLP jTInput nE T' C via NAMELIST PR0PWR 2 IJEIGSP THSTCP 3 4 5 6 7 8 PHALOC PhVL0C PRPRAD ENGiCBWAPR3 P ZT R KN ko P)0 3 R 9 10 11 12 BWAPR6 BWAPR9 NOPBFE 6APR75 (b P)o.. 214 25 26 27 28 29 CROT 238 .75R a IT 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 AIETLJ NIENGSJ THSTCJ JIAL0C JEVL0C JEAL0C JINLTA JEANýL JEVELO AMBTMP JESTMP JELLOC . 6 R (b 0 .

C 19 19 )9.9 B . •.2 .2.1.1.1-24 4.2 19.2. 4.1 p.2.2 19 20 21-40 SB SP ALSCHR Sp aj Body planform area M sin a 4.1.2.2.TAF CNA0C CNA p.2-C Figure 4.26 26.1 19 -1 RLBT DN DI D2 BETA FA FB FN XCPLB CMA0C DELCMA THETAB DELCNA dn d1 d2 a fA fB fN XCP/z.2. (Cmdoc-c ACma eBoattail ACNc e (CN) CNa Sb 16 17 18 19 TI.1.2 )9 19 19 19.SUPERSONIC BODY VARIABLES LOCATION VARIABLE _NAME VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SBD" ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMv.1 Figure 4. 4..ENTS/DEFINITIONS 1 I RLBP RLB I 1 RL I2o 1. . I9:2 4.. eqn.1 4.2. per de Body base area OC. F 81-100 101 102 CFRW XCPBLB THETAF CMAP XC CdpSina 4.2.2. 4.1 4.2.2.2 19 19 19 19 4.2.1-24 Eqn.1-d 19.2.2.1..2.1-4 Body normal force slope.2 r XCp/1BT f19 C0 Cross flow lift term.3 29 RLBT 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 B £T S 19. i.1 103 104 105 106 VB UNUSED x VE 19 Centroid of planform area Body volume 19 239 .2.1-4 p.1.1-4 Mach number parameter Afterbody fineness ratio Body fineness ratio Nose fineness ratio 4.4*2 19 19 19 19 9 41-60 6i-80 MC CDC MCj Cd ~Sr S.2.1.2.2 19.1. 4 .2.2..

2.1 Figure 4.2.26 19..26 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 Body zero lift drag coefficient 19.26 19 19.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SBD" LOC LCAT NVARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING REFERENCE DATCOM SYMBOL COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY 107 108 109 CDN2P CDN2 CMA SS RNB RLC0FF CF CDF CDANF CDANC CDAB CDA DOAX COD CPB CDB CD0 (CDN2) (CDA) CDN2 UNUSED Cm S RLB RtC Cf Cdf CDA CDANC CDA d max Cpb' Cob C0o or 19 19 Body pitching moment slope Body wetted area 19.1-24 Nose normal force slope 26 26 26 26 26 eN (CNm)N (C Nose pitching moment slope 130 131 132 133 134 135 THETAA CNAAF CMAAF CNAA CHAA THETAT CNATF eA 26 26 26 (CN)A (Cnm)A eB Afterbody normal force slope 26 26 26 26 Afterbody pitching moment slope 136 240 - . .2. .26 Body skin friction coefficient Body skin friction drag coefficient 19 19.26 110 III 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 21A 125 126 127 128 129 CNANF XCPLN THETAN CNAN CMAN Xcp/LB 4.2.

1.• 241 . ! .2. 4.i VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SBD" VARIABLE LOCATION NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLA 137 CMATF 26 138 139 140 141-160 161-180 181-200 M01-220 221 222 223 224 225 226 228 229 227 CNAT CMAT K THETA LX INTGCN INTGCM RNN CFINC CFC0CF CDPN CDPA CDPT CDP (CNa)B (C K 6 (z Body normal force slope Body pitching moment slope 4..t d N 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 19. .2-j 1 0 eJ NNLB (K rN (.1...26 26 RN Cff Inc Cf /Cf (CDp)N (CDp)A (CD) (CN (CNaN)HB (c'N WB 2ý I24 •.26 19.2.2 Eqn.

1-c 242 -i • i .1.2.)5B12.1. 5.1.1 A-A fb H 35 35 35 (C5N.2.1+ Flag If methods complete Flag if methods applicable 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 (CDL/CL 2 )U 4.•M-.3.2 (CIL/CLIw 5.5.1 5.2.35 35 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 DONE DOL2 (CDO)WBT 11-1..2.1 6(Cj 7 8 fb /C.2 35 (11 (CDo)WBT 4.5.1 :35 12 '.1.2.)H m=-. I 4.3.2.2.1-c Eqn.2. 5.) H m-".1.1.1.6 5.4 4.2 (CLO/CL)H 5.5.2.1.1.7 -13 (CDO)WBT (CDo)WBT 11=1.4 . (Cz.5-3.2./cL)w (CtO/CL)w M=m.5.2..1 35 35 35 35 35 " 2 3 SH='M- 4 5 (C qICL)H 5.1 (CDL/CL 2 ) 4.1. 2 10 (CND)HB 4.4 (CLBa/C.3.1 :1./CL)H 5.1V .SECOND LEVEL METHOD DATA PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SECD" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOL 4EFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERL I (ce.5.1.2.5.4 (CIA/CL)wB 5.2.3.1 4.2.1.1 .1 Eqn.

1 EqnI 5.2.2.1 (C9te/CL)H 5.// . 5.1 (MD)BWHV 4.1-d Eqn.2.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SECO" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME DATCOM ENGINEERING SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OERLAY 21 22 23 (CeI/CLw) 5.3.2.5.2.1-d Drag divergence Mach number 35 35 35 2 .2.2.2.

3.2 (CL•) H(B) fN KH(B) X /c ac r kB(H) Lai 4.1.1-37 Figure 4.3.25 20 20 20 20.3.t KB(H) 'VB(H)i 4.3.2-11 HT-body zero lift drag coefficlent Mach number parameter 20 20 20 20.SUPERSONIC HORIZONTAL TAIL-BODY VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SHB" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE CC*MMENTS/DEFINITIONS VRLAY I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12-31 32 33 34 35 36 KKWB XACN CD0WB DD BETA CLABW XACBW FA CLI KBW IVBW RKBW CLAWB FN KWB XAC KKBW RLAP XACA GAMMA TRINe XCPLN UNUSED kHB a)N (X (CDo)HB dBody B (CL•) B (H) r (X/ac 1 ) f C.25 20 20 20.25 20 20.2.25 20 20 20.1.25 20 20.25 20 20 20. V/2ircv (r) cre/2 (Xcp/C)N Figure 4.25 20 37 38 39 40-59 60 61 SII 244 4!: .2.

1.2.3.11-8 Figure 7.1.1.3.1.2.1 Figure 5.1-25 (B-P) Figure 5.2.1-8 5.1-7 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 w 5.1.1.1-25 (00) 23 23 23 18 19 20 21 22 ' DIP CLBZW DCL3.1.1 Figure 5.1.3.1.3.1.1 Figure 5.1-25 (B-P) 23 23 23 23 23 31 CNAV (CNa)v 32 245 I .1. RKHBHL RK!B Zo23 w (ACký)z ACZa (KH(B))HL KH(B) 23 24 25 DCYHWB RKVWB RKVB (ACYf)H(WE) Kv(WB) Kv(B) 5. Rk KR k h h2 SBs KN 5.1-25A 23 23 23 26 27 28 20 30 RKPVWB DCYBV RKVHB ZP RLP K' vW(B) (ACYi)V(WE) vHB) K Z x 5.3.1.1.2 Equivalent dihedral Figure 5.SUPERSONiC PANEL SIDESLIP VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SLA" LOCATION VAPIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATC(OM REFERENCE COAMENTS/0FFIN1TIONS OVER[AY MACH M 2 BETA M Mach number Mach number parameter 23.3.1-6 Figure 7.1-9 5.1.3. 5.1.3.2.1 Figure 5.2.32 23.1 Projected side area of body Figure 5.1 Figure 5.2-25 angle 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 z K.1.3.3.1.3.1.3.2.32 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 x DIHEQ QBC EBC CLPT0A CLP CLBD zw RKI RNNI RKRL RHI RH2 SBS RKN (C X rEquiv.2.1 E!' (80 (Ck )Theo/ C A 7.1.1 7.1 5.2.

1.1.1.2.2.1.3.2.2.1 7.2.1 5.1 Figure 5.2.1.1 (C.2.1.1-9 13 14 / RKRL RHi RH2 SBS RKN ZWP CLBZW DCLB 15 16 17 18 19 Projected side area of body Figure 5.SUPERSONIC HORIZONTAL TAIL PANEL SIDESLIP VARIABLES VAMdABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SLAH" / "LOCATION I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VARIABLE NAME "L ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS 'ERLAY MACH M 8 Mach number 23. .32 BETA x DIHEQ QBC EBC CLPT0A CLP CLBD ZW RKI RNN Mach number parameter Equivalent dihedral angle Figure 5.1. ZW Ki Rt KRh1 h SBS KN Zi w (ACto)Z Act UNUSED 5.1 5.1.1-8 23 23 '23 23 23 "20 21-31 246 : 11- 4 . 1/Q(0c) E" (0C) 5.3.1.1-6 Figure 7.1-7 Figure 5.3.2-25 23.1-8 Figure 7.2.1.2 A C (CLt. )Theo/ 7.1.3.32 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 x Equiv.1.

. (Cj CM4/A C AY.1. I79 .3.1.1.3.27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 5 6 1.3.2 4.SUPERSONIC WING VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SLG" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE TVERLAY "I 2 3" Li4 BETA BOVERT CNIINT BCHA CNTHRY CNAA CIAI DELTYT DELTDT TLE192 E CC CNAAA (CM Mach number parameter ý/tanALE CN/(CIc) Theory aCNM 4.1_ 6.9 LE E C )' 14.27 18.2 4.2 Semi-wedge angle measured perpendicular to wing LE Wing normal force slope.2 27 27 27 r74 .3.1.7 73 CNAAAP 76 CN acLc (X / Cr) (CN c)a CacB 4.1.2 4.2 ot)'Theor 14. 83 84 P CFO CFI P Cf 0 C1 247 Outboard panel Inboard panel 18 18 18 I r .3. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13-32 27- 33-52 53-72 ALPHAJ CDL A2 S2 c (CDL)J A2 S2 2 14.1.3.3.3.2 14. per radian 4.1.3.2 4.3.3 Inboard panel 27 127 27 2 77 XACC.] Wing zero lift drag coefficient i81 DRAGC 'iC 82 L2 L+.2 4.1.3.1. tanA /1.1.1. 78 " 80 XACCR0 (X CDW CDRA CDw cr Outboard panel 27 18 18 18 C ý iAC DL _P.2 18.I CUTBW "7heory .

3.3.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SLI.3. 9. CDf Cf Ric Ri (CN )0 1 (CN ) I 1 (ti )=O UNUSED Outboard panci Inboard panel 18 18 18 18 18 18 Outboard panel Inboard panel 27 27 27 21 DETANG CNAAST DETALP CRBW SBW ARBW TAPBW CLEBW CRGLV SGLV ARGLV BE CNI CN2 C1NAE CNAGLV CNABW CLEGLV RKL XACCR a* C* Act (Cr) BW SBW ABW XBW (CLE)BW (Cr) Sg Ag bE (CN/A)li (CN/A) (CIjQ)E (Ctl a)9 (CN.2 93 9.1.3 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 Glove component 4.1.3.2 4.3.27 rg 248 .3.2 Glove component Extension component Glove component Glove component Glove component Extension component 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 20.3.2 4.2 4.1.1.2 4.)BW (CLE)g KL Xac/E 2 2? 4.2 4.2 4.1." LOCATI)N VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS 0WfRIA 85 86 87 88 89 90 91t.3.2 4.1.3.3.1.2 4.19 95-114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129130 131 132 133 134 RN0 RNI CDF CF RLC0FF RNN CNA0 CNAI RMACH DETACH RcO RC.1.1.1.

I" I iII -I !- .VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SLG" LOCATION VAKIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS pVERIAY S135 136 DCMCL dCm/dCN 27 CMA CNCNTI C [CNP/'/CN II 27 Inboard panel Outboard panel Inboard panel Outboard panel S~THE0O 138 137 27 27 CNCNT0 CC /C THEO0 (CgjC TH2O THu I ' S139 139 CNATI CNAT0 CNAT 139 • 14o 141 ~NuLTHEO KE 27 2 27 27 RKT.

1.2 4.1.4..3.4.1.2 6.1..53 41. p. p. 6.1-7 4 k2.2-12A Figure 4. deg 6.3.1-11 2 K (I+Rf+Rf2) 3 K (tan AHL) 3 6.SUPERSONIC HIGH LIFT AND CONTROL VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLACK "SPR" LOCATION I VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING OATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS!DEFINITIONS ORLA BETA C1 C2 LAMHL PHITE K3 SF CLRLF KHB KBH YHS BCLD1 BCLD2 TANHL Kl K2 BCMDl a C 1 C2 AHL ýTE K3 SF Ci6 kH(B) kB(H) yH CL.53 53 53 53 53 41.53 41.53 41.3.1 6.2-e TE flaps pitching moment effectiveness TE flapf lift coefficient effectiveness tan AHL KI K2 Cml 6 18 19 20 ECHCI CMDT CLD Chd Cm6 CL 6 UNUSED 41.1.53 41.4M -4a 2 )/(2B8).53 41 41 41.1 Figure 4.53 41.3.2 I-(C 2 /Cl)H(±P(5) Total flap area TE plain flap rolling effectiveness 4.3.53 41. 6.3. deg TE cross section angle perpendicular to hinge line.1 21-30 31 32 33 34 35 CHRD(1) TLEOB THLOB TTEOB TRTOFL Wing chord at innermost flap station 41 41.53 41 41 6. 6.3. 6.2-12A see p.1.1.1.1-7 40.53 41.1.5- Flap taper ratio 41 36 CO Wing chord at inboard location of flaps 41 250 .1.1. 41.2 Eq.1.3.5' 41.3.53 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Hinge line sweep.3. CZ 6 Mach number parameter 6.1 21'S.1.3.4.1.5.53 41.

.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SPR" LOCATION VARIABLE OAME DATCOM ENGINEERING REFERENCE SYMBOL COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLA 37-44 4PAM8 PA1miPAMIPAM8 CHAT CHAF AMA CHDELF CMDlCMD3 (Cha)t/c.__ _ _ _5_ . C (Ch)Flat Ma h6 ACm6 45-52 53 54 55 56 57-59 Pressure area moments calculated from wing tip Pressure area moments calculated from wing root Hinge moment effectiveness for flat sided controls Hinge moment derivative for flat sided controls Area moment about hinge line Hinge moment derivative for flat 'sided controls 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 I.

2.1 29 29 29 17 17 11 12 13 14 15 16-35 36-55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 YA311 x Z AC CZ~ K N (Cya)L.3.1.1 Figure 5.2.1 w 5.3. 17 a 17 17 17 17 17 Average height of fuselage above wing root chord Figure 5.3.1 5.2. . a Figure 5.1 5.1-31 29 29 29 29 29 17 Inboard panel.3.2.3.3. 1KV) 5.2.2.1 VerticMl distance from center linie to the root chord quarter chord 29 2 7.1.1-8 Low speed value for Cy• CyO/CL at mach vs.1.3.1.3.1 5.1 252 5.1 Method of 4.1-8 Figure 5. I 29 0= 3 4 29 29 z'w 5 6 7 8 (CL)v (A)TvT K Kf 5.3.2.3.2.1 5.SUB3SONIIC PANEL SIDESLIP VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "STB" LOCATION VARIABLE NAMF ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DFFItIlTIONS Y 1 w 5.1 5.1 5.2.3.2.2.1-22b Horizontal distance from the CG to quarter chord MAC of VT Vertical distance from center line to MAC of VT 5.3.3.1-26 Figure 5.3.2 ratio 17 17 17 17 29 Isolated panel geometric aspect Figure 5.1.2. K.1-25 Fuselage-length-effect correction factor Figure 5.2.2.3. (Cya/CL)M KR.3.2.1 5.3.1-9 VS.1.S.1.1-8 Projected side area of body Fuselage Iength Figure 5.2.1.1 9 10 X CV 5.1.i (C£)TOT h or w h2 h1 SBS tf (03C.2.2.2.2.

1.1 Low speed Co/C 2 17 17 S"96-115 kB./CL)A 5.1.1.1-122d 17 17 t 1q8 118 /q1 k 120 121 AV(BE)/A A (B)A AV(B) 5.1 5.2. 5..1.2.2. /KV) K C.1 5.2.-.1-a 116 117 A (AEff)V (1+a/i8) 1 Sidewash term Figure 5. •.1 5.2.C.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "STB" i ~~LOCATION ONAME VARIABLE ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE OMNSDFNTOS COMMENTS/OEFINITIONS )EL /EPLAf 65 66 67 68 65 YA310 YA30A YA29 YA27 (ý!C'.3.1.1.1 2.3.1.1 5.3.1 5.1.2.2.1 5.1-30a Figure 5.3.2. 116 L.2.1.1.1.1.1 Figure 5.2.3.1.2.1-29 Figure 5.7./T /C Ac/2 LC.1 Eqn." /I .1 Figure 5.1 5.S.3.1.-:.ýi(6 tan 5.2.Figure S5.1-22a Figure 5.1.1-27 Figure 5.1.1-22b Effective dihedral angle 17 17 29 122 S126 123-125 UNUSED 5..2.1.-.1.2.1-30b 17 17 1.4.1.1.0/CL Outoard panel.1.2.1-31 Figure 5.1. /1 _ _ .3.1.1 Outboard panelFigure 5.3.7 17 17 YA30A 70 YA28B (C.1-28b 17 71 72 YA28A K dB 5.1-28a Body diameter 17 23 73 74 75 C TV 17 17 17 (CY )TVTI /(C y )TVT S(WBH)17 f (AEf) /n/2 (A~Ef)/ A 76-95 (C /CL2) C1 • 5.1 51(C. 5.1-28b 17 253 - .3..1 Figure 5.

2.1.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "ST00" I LOC AT ION 127 128 VARIABLE NAM( ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOl.1. (Kml)g 5.1-27' 5.1.2.1.2. / / . Figure 5.2.1-2Ba Inboard.2.1.1-27 c/2 0 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 (Cz /CL)' 5.1 5.2.1 Outboard panel. Figure 5.2.2. Figure 17 17 17 Figure 17 17 17 (C.2.1.1 5.1-28a Outboard panel CLB/CL ratio Inboard panel.1.I.L 1. REFERENCE C" COMMENTS/OEFINI lIONS VERLA A(CbC L 5 1. 254 •~ .1. .2.2. 5.1 5.1 L5.1.2.1 li 5.1-28b Inboard panel.1 Inboard panel.2.1.1.panel CLB/CL ratio (Kmi)I (C /CL)I I.1..2. Figure 17 A. 1-28b Outboard panel. Figure Figure 17 17 (CB/C L)' At L 5.1 Inboard panel.1-28b Outboard panel. /CL )0 5.2.2. 5.1 (C-/CL) 1 "C/2 (C /CY)A 5.1.

5.1.3.2. a Figure 5.3.3.)TOT h or w h2 hi SBS Lf /KV)1 (aC. 1 255 'h.1 Average height of fuselage above wing root chord Figure 5.1 5.2.1.2.2.1.2 17 4 5 6 7 8 9 10' 11 zwa (CL)VF K Kf X C v L 5.S.1-9 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 5.2.2.29 29 29 29 5.1 5. . C 8 2.i.1.3. .1-8 Low speed value for Cy vs.3.1-31 29 29 29 29 29 17 36-5(yaCy/Lat 5.1 Figure 5. t.3.3.2.1-26 Figure 5.1-8 Projected side area of body Fuselage length Inboard panel.2.4 .1 KR K.1 5.1 5.1 P' 12 Z P 13 14 15 16-35 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 YA311 ACL.1 Figure 5. Figure 5.2.2. KN (CYs)L. (Ci.3.1 5.1 Vertical distance from center line to the root chord quarter chord 29 2 3 29 71T0=! 29 29 5.2.2.SUBSONIC HORIZONTAL TAIL PANEL SIDESLIP VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "STBH" VARIABLE LOCATION NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS RLA 1 Z w 71 5.2. a 8 mach vs.1.1.2.3.1 5.3. - .3.2.3.3.1.3.3.2.1-25 Fuselage-length-effect correction factcr Figure 5.1-8 Figure 5.J.2.2.1 UNUSED tMethod of 4.2.1-22b Horizontal distance from the CG to quarter chord MAC of VF Vertical distance from center line to MAC of VF 17 17 .2.3.

5.3.1-22d 5.1.1.1.1-28b 256 / .2.1.1 Outboard panel.2.1.1-29 Figure 5.1 5.1.3.1-27 Figure 5.1.1-28a Body diameter 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 29 75 76-95 96-115 116 117 118 119 120 121 UNUSED (Cn /CL ) L.1-30a Figure 5.1.2.4. (AEff)v 5.1 .+-22a 5.1 Low speed Cn8 /CL2 17 17 5.1-22c 5.1-30b Figure 5.1.1.2.1-28b Figure 5.1 AV(B)/AV 5.1 5*1.1.1. C1.1 Kmr C28 /r (CLB/CL) Ac/2 ACLO/(0 tan AC/4) (CIO/CL)A K dmA UNdS2D UNUSED UNUSED 5.3.1 AH/ AV(B) UNUSED A(Cto/C 5.1 Eqn.1.1 5.1.1 qv/q4* 5.Figure 5.3.2.1-a Sidewash term Figure Figure Figure Figure 5.1.1.3.Figure 5.2.1.2.3.3.3.2.3.1.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "STBH" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME OATCOM ENGINEERING REFERENCE SYMBOL COMMENTt/DEFINITIONS OVERL 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 72 73 74 / YA310I YA3OA YA29 YA27 YA30A YA28D YA28A (BCL/Kr)1 5.1 LL 122 123-125 126 V A /L Effective dihedral angle Outboard pane].2.2.1.1.1.1.1-31 Figure 5.2.S.2.2.1.1.1 KH 5.2.2.1 k 5.1 5.1.2.1 5.3.3.1-22b 17 17 17 17 17 17 29 17 (1+3a/30)) 5.

1./CL)' 5.1-28b Inboard panel.1-28b (Cz..1. Figure Figure .1 5. .VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "STBH" LOCATION VARIABL E ENGINEERING NAME SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLAY 127 128 A(Cia/CL)I. _ _-- .1-27 /CL) A 5.2.1.)O (C /CL) 5.2.1 Inboard panel.1 Outboard panel.2. .1..1-27 Inboard panel.1.2. .1-2 8 a Figure Figure 17 17 c/2 A 129 130 (c.2. 5. (KmA)o 131 132 (Cza/CL..2..2.l.1.1.1 5.1.1. 1-28a (c•/CL)I Inboard panel Cie/CL ratio £B 257 La _ _i _II__ II_ _ _..1 Outboard panel Cya/CL ratio Inboard panel. 5.2.1. 5.2.2.2.1.17 17 5.1..2.1.2. 5. Figure 17 17 AC/ 133 134 135 2 1 5.2. (Cz8/CL)A (Km)A Figure Figure 17 17 17 5.2.1 5.2. . 5. .1-28b Outboard panel.1 0L 5.1 5.1.1.1 Outboard panel.

2 Semi-wcJge angle measured perpendlcular to HT LE 22 22 22 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13-32 33-52 53-72 73 22 22 N•Theorý 4.2 4.2 a (CN CNAA CNA1 DELTYT DELTDT TLE192 E CC CNAAA ALPHAJ CDL A2 22 HT normal force slope.9 Mach number parameter 4.1.3 Inboard panel 22 22 22 76a "77 78 79 80 XACCRr COW CDc DRAGC (X 0c Outboard panel 22 CDw CD 0 HT zero lift drag coefficient 22 22 22 81 S~CL 82: 83: 84\ P CFO CFI 2L+I P Cf0 Cfl Outboard panel Inboard panel 22 22 22 258 /A" /~ .1.2 4. per radian 2 22 22 22 22 22 72 22 22 22 74 75 S2 CNAAAP XACCRI CNTBW S2 CN (Xra/C (CNa)BW Theory 4.3.2 4.3 .3.1.3.1.3.2 4.1.3.1.1._ 6-1 tanALE/ E C (CNc)J aj (CDL)J A2 4.1.3.2 4.3.3.SUPERSOUIC HORIZONTAL TAIL VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "STG" VARIABLE LOCATION NAME T e ENGINEERING SYMBOL i-llT DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERL I BETA dOVERT CNNNT BCNA CNTHRY a 6/tanALE CN/(CNu) Theory 1CN CN/A CNa Ay.1.1.3.1.3.2 4.2 4.1.3.3.2 4.

2 4.1.1.3.3 22 22 CRBW SBW APBW TAPBW CLEBW CRGLV SGLV ARGLV BE CNI CN2 (Cr) BW SBW ABw ýBW (CLE)BW (Cr) ry Sg A b (CN. 22 22 22 Glove comronent Glove component Extension component 129 130 131 132 133 134 CNAE CNAGLV CNABW CLEGLV RKL XACCR (CN)E (CNc 41.3.3./A)j (CNc/A) 2 22 22 22 22 22 Glove component 4J1.2 4o1.2 4o1i3.1-3.2 22 22 2.2 4.3.3.3.VARIABLE DEFINITION 0: DATA BLOCK "ST3" LOCATION VARIA3LFE NAME IENGIN:ERINGI SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VFRLAY 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95-114 115 !16 117 118 i19 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 -N.2 4.!nm 22 22 22 22 22 2? )g (CNa) Bt (CLE)g KL XdC- 259 .0 RNI CDF CF RLC0FF RNN CNAO CNAI RMACH DETACH RCO RCI CDf Cf Rc RZ (CN) 0 (CrN)I (M9_) = 0 Outboard panel Inboard panel 22 22 22 22 22 22 Outboard panel Inboard panel 22 22 22 22 UNUSED DETANG CNAAST DETALP X* CAct 22 4.2 4.2 4.3.1.1.1.3.2 Extension component Giove component Glove compon.

4 .VARIABLE DEFINITION OF r)ATA BLOCK "STG" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFEReNCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY 135 136 DCMCL CMA CNCNTI /-N dC mi [CN /CN THEO]I [CN /CNa THEO]0 Inboard panel Outboard panel Inboard panel Outboard panel 22 22 22 22 137 '38 139 CNCNTO CNATI 139 140 141 (CNaTHE (CN HE 22 22 22 RKT KL "260 . f.

SUPERSONIC WING-BODY-HORIZONTAL TAIL PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SIP'.J.1-. 67 68 KBW KWB CLAHB CLABHYT RCRE02 lVWH DELTAT 28 7 28 28 Figure 4.1 1 20 28 28 28D) 62 63 64 28 28 Figure 4. LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DAYCOMCOMNS/EI R'EEECOMNSEINTNSELA TOSOYRA I 2-21 22-41 42-61 CD 0 CMA4 CLTB CDAWBI DD TRINO RKBW (CD0)v (CMIA)T CLTBj b) 4.4.1.1..67 28 28 28 69 70 71-90 91-110 rH V()28 AT~ (V/2wacVr) k B (H) 8 'VS(H) (AX 111-130 131 132 GAMMA.3.2 KBH KH(B) (CLc)H (B) (CL)8() 4.2-11 28 65 66.3. KK8W B KKW8 IVSH DXACWB 28 28 28 28 28 a133-152 153 [154i ) CDOWBT CD0WBV (CD0)WBH (CD0)WBHV 2 2 f156 155 CDOVF (C D)VF 261 .

35 33 34 35 36 37 36 39 40-59 RLAP XACA GAMMA TRINe XCPLN (Xcp 1CrN V/21rcv (r) cre/2 20 4.2-11 20 20 20.1 Figure 4.SUPERSONIC WIfNG-BODY VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SWB" IVARIABLE I V A ARI NAME 1.25 20 6o 61 262 . FE N G IN EE RI N G SYMBOl D A TC O M REFERENCE A m C O G.1.25 20 20 20.2.2.1-37 20. f N S /Y fE I IO 1 4INN S -VR ) IAY yVR I UNUSED 2 3 4 KKWB XACN CDOWB kw(B) (xa)N (CO)wB Wing-body zero lift drag coefficient 20.2 (CL)W(B) fN KW(B) Xac/r k Figure 4.1.3.25 20 20.25 20 7 8 CLABW XACBW (CLO) 6 (W) (Xa!Z)B d) 20 20. K lVE j 4.3.3.25 9 10 It 12-31 32 FA CLI KBW IVBW RKBW CLAWS FN KWB XAC KKBW fa c.25 20 20.3i 20 5 6 DD BETA dBody Mach number parameter M 20.25 20 20.3.

. .SYNTHESIS PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "SYMA" VARIABLE jENGINEERING _I DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTSDIFINITIONS NAME I SYMBOL 2 3 XCG XW ZW XCG X Z Input via NAAELIST SYNTHS 4 5 6 7 ALIW ZCG XH ZHi (ai)w ZCG XH Z 8 9 10 11 12 13 I' 15 9 XV ALIH xv VERTUP HINAX XVF SCALE ZV ZVF (a iH . 263 * .. . ...xv 2 L • -.. .. l Z4 . .....

1.707 (G/6)7= .383 (G/6).1.1 6.1.5.7-24 Figure 6.5.0 K' UNUSED ACdf Figure 6.7 6. DATCOM REFEREr.1.5.7-22 38 38 264 .1 6.1.1.SUPERSONIC SPANWI1SE LOADING COEFFICIENT PARAMETERS AND IIIGH-LIFT AND CONTROL DRAG VAILABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TCD" LOCATION VARIABL ' NAME ENGINEERING SYM v.1.5.MENTS/DEFINIT"IONS OVERLAY 1-14 15-28 29-42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49-58 CDI CDo GDFULL GDIH GD2H GD3H GD4H KPRM DELCDF (G/6) 1 6.1.1 6.1 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.1.5.924 (G/6)71= .1 6..5.7 Inboard panel spanwise loading coefficient Outboard panel spanwise loading coefficient Panel spanwise loading coefficient Spanwise loading coefficient at 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 (G/6)0 (G/6) (G/6)q= .5.E:E M-. = 0.

1.1.3.3.3.T DJ Cl ARATI0 6 C 1 A(128) (I I )x +C cos A 4.3.3.1.4 w w 27 35 24 24 Mach number 4.3.1. (I+C 1 r)x 0 4.3.3.2 4. 4 -25a 24 265 II .1.1.3.3.3.2-53b Figure 4 .1. 4.2 4.1.2 F.4 Aspect ratio classification 35 24 24 29 BU.4 4.3.14 Mach interpolation In transonic Lift curve slope interi ilation table at M.1.1..2 4.3.1.2-53a 5 6 7 8 9 10 I1 MFBO MFB A0C CFBCT BETAFB CLAFBT AC CLAFB CLAA B0C CLAB MT CLAMT (Mfb)A=O Mfb a/c CLafb/ (CL fb)T BFB (CLa )T z/c fb w (CLa)fb (CLa)a b/c (CL)b MT (CLa)MT 24 24 24 24 24 24 35 24 24 24 24 24 24 Force break Mach No.2 4.Mfb+.1.2-54a Figure 4.1.3.4 24 cos A 30 CLMAX6 (CLmax) M=.aMfb+.2 Zero sweep force break Mach No.rce break mach parameter Total wing (CLf) Lift curve slope at Mfb Lift curve slope at Ma.3.3. DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLA I 2 3 4 CLAI4 zwc K MACH (CL)M= Z /k M 4. Figure 4. 12 13 14 15 16-20 21-25 26 27 28 07 Lift curve slope at Mb.2 Lift curve slope at M=I.4 Figure 4 .2 4.4 24 31 ACLBA5 (uCLrax) Base 4.6 4.1.1.3.1.3.1.2 4.TRANSONIC LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL-DIRECTIONAL STABILITY VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRAJI LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYM BO I.1.3.1.2 4.

3.4 39 40 41 42 43-57 58-66.4 Figure 4.1.• .3.6 *6 4.4-26b Figure 4. _24 75 CDOWBT CDBB CDWB CDOB CDFB CDPB CDBFIG DCNA (CD) W4 CDb DDw (CDO)Body (CDf)Body (CDP)Body 2 CDb/db (dC N/. 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 DACMA6 C3 DALCM DCLMAX ALCLM6 ALCLMT CLMAXT RLC0FF RNN RL CF CDW2 CDW COF DQ0Q CLAW6 CLAWB CLABW (ALCLm) m=.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRA" LOCATION VARIABIE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERIA.1'.3.4-22 24 24 24 24 24 aCL max CLmax R RN .1.3.4 4.1.6 C 3 Acn 1 ACmax ACLmax (CLmax) (4=m-. 67 68 69 70 71 72 Skin friction coefficient 73 74 7b CDOWB CMOW8 (C1o) (CDo)wS (CMO)Wo35 24 24 24 24 24 .1.4 4.4 4.1.4-21b Figure 4.4 4.3.1.3.4 413.3.3.1.3.4-21b Figure 4. 77 78 79 80 81 82 Body zero lift drag coefficient Friction drag coefficient Pressure drag coefficient - 266 -L.1.L Cf CDWM UNUSED CDw COf [(CLQ)W] CLw(B) CLaB(W) Wing angle of attack for max lift Wing max lift coefficient 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 35 24 25 25 4.3.1.

2 AXa/V: Figure 4.4.4. 96 97-104 105 106 107 108 XACW DELXAC XACP XAC XACSW 25 25 25 25 (XaC-ir) 25 B(w) XACWB (Xac iC) r 25 w(B) UNUSED 267 .}" lOCATION VARIABIE NAME VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRA" ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFER(NCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS )V(WIAY 83-88 89-94 -- XMV XACV 25 xa/C ~ac r Xac/ (7/4) 4.2-28 25 2 95 .

3.2 4.4 4.3.2 4..1.1.3.2 Lift curve slope at M2.4-25a 24 24 Base 268 ]/ / ~/ .4 Figure 4.2-53a Force break Mach No.3.1.3.0 4 Lift curve slope at MblMfb+.1.1.3.1.1.1.2 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 4.21 4.3.4 cos A0 (CLmax) m=.1.3. 4.STABILITY VARIABLES TRANSONIC LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL-DIRECTIONAL TAIL OF HORIZONTAL VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRAH" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME S CLA4 DATCOM ENGINEERING REFERENCE SYMBOL COMMENTS/DEFONITIONS ii RLAY (L)m.3.1.2 4.1.6 (cCLmax) 24 30 31 CLMAX6 ACLBA5 4.2 16-20 '1-25 26 1 UNUSED Lift curve slope interpolation table at MT 27 28 C) ARATI0 Ci A-(128) x (l+Ci) cos A 4. 4.1.3.1.3.24 Figure 4.2I 4.1.1.1.2 4.4 24 Mach number 24 24 24 .1.4 4.3.3.1. Figure 4.1.1 Mach interpolation in transonic 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CLAFB CLAA BOC CLAB MT CLAT UNUSED K MACH MFB0 MFB AOC k M (Mfb)A=O Mfb a/c 4.3.2-53b Figure CFBCT BETAFB CLAFBT CL~fb/ (CLafb)T BFB (CLQfb)T UUNUSED (CL)fb (CLc))a b/c (CL)b MT CL 4.3.3.4 Aspect ratio classification 24 24 29 BU4 (l+C )R*x 4.2 Zero sweep force break Mach No.2-54a Force break mach parameter Total wing (CLafb) Lift curve slope at Mfb 7 Lift curve slope at MaMfb+.3.3.3.

. • • .T. . ... .1. :.1.1.1.4-21b Figure 4.• .3.: .4-22 24 24 24 M=.3.6 37 38 ALCLMT CLMAXT RLC0FF RNN RL aCL max CLmax 4. ..) 214 71 72 i CLAWB CLABW 2 73 i 74 75 76 CDOWB CMOWB COBB CDWB CD0B CDFB CDPB CDBFIG DCNA (CDo )w (CMo)WB •UNUSED COb DoW 24 214 77 78 (CDO)Body (CDf)Body (COP)Body Cb/(db/db (dCN/dM) i Body zero lift drag coefficient Friction drag coefficient Pressure drag coefficient 214 24 24 24 24 79 V. . ¢ . angle of attack for max lift H... . 269 J _ __24.6 C3 A aCL Lmax 'CLmax M=.4 H.3.VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRAH" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL OATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS VERLAY 32 33 34 35 DACMA6) C3 DALCM DCLMAX (ACmax 4.3..3.1. .• :.•..1.• .4 4..3.3.___ .1.. .6 CLcw(B) CLB..p.T. .1.82 80 81 N__ __.• -• . .3.4 4.. ..3.4 4...1..1.4 Figure 4. .4-26b Figure 4.4-2]b Figure 4.4 4. max lift coefficient 24 24 k4 39 R RN L "AD0 41 24 24 42 43-57 58-66 CF CDW2 Cf CDWMi UNUSED Skin friction coefficient 24 24 67 68 CoW CDF COw CDf 24 24 69 70 DQZQ CLAW6 qlqo35 [(CL )IW W• M=..3. .F •.

2 Figure 4.VARI#3LE DEFINITIOIN OF DATA BLOCK "TRAH' LOCATION VARIABLE NAME DATCOm ENGINEERING REERENCE SYMBOL COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY 83-88 89-94 XMV XACV Xa/C* /Cr acr 25 25 95 96 XACW DELXAC ac/(//4) X AX 4.2-28 25 25 97-104 105 106 XACP XAC XACBW 25 25 (Xac/r) B(W) (Xac ) W(B) 25 107 i08 XACWB CD0H 25 35 CDOH(W) *2-0 I 270 .4.4.

for lack of control moment =2.SUBSONIC TRIM VARIABLES FOR CONTROL DEVICE ON WING OR TAIL VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRM" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS OVERLAY 1-20 ALPHA ad- E 38 38 =1. for 2>7c 38 21 22 NTRIM TSTOP 271 .

- . . . .. for lack of control moment =2$ for a>GCLmax 38 27 272 • .-- .SUBSONIC TRIM VARJABLES FOR AN ALL MOVABLE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRM. ..-: • -..2" LOCATION - VARIABLE NAME - ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE _ COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS _ _ _ _ __i OVERL 1-20 21 22 CLT NTRIM TSTOP (CLTB)T 38 38 -1. / [ • " . . .

C9. 6 40 Tail effectiveness for body mounted horizontal tails Rolling effectiveness of horizontal tail M < I Rolling effectiveness of horizontal tail.TRANSONIC HIGH LIFT AND CONTROL VARIABLES "VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "TRN" LOCATION VARIABLE NA:AE ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS . M > I 40 40 40 7 KHB t t [ 273 . VKLAY I 2 3 4 5 6 ENCEPE 'ICP 40 YH ETAQRS CLDELC CLDALC KBH yH '1(qH/q) C.

. . / • " i..TWIN VERTICAL TAIL INPUTS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS LA ] 2 3 4 BVP BV BDV BH b• bV 2rI bH Input via NAMELIST TVTPAN 5 6 7 8 SV VPHITE VI.P ZP OTE I zp 274 .-- ---.

i LOCATION VARIABLE NAME VENTRAL FIN INPUT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK 'VFI'Wo ENGINEERING' DATCOM CMET/EN SYMBOL REFERENCECMMN/(ENTIN OSO~~A RA I CHRDTP II 3. 65 66 67 68 69 XC (C ) ma 0 (Cptmax)M CO m 275 - ýA .14 XIC UNUJSED 0 (b/2)r 1 0 15 16 J17 i18 20 721-40 41-60 61 62 63 TYPL0* t/c Input via NAIIELIST VFSCHR Ay (x/c) max Co. 1 C. 1 max Cm 0 (RL) (R LE)0 (t/c) 0 64. 1 al x0VC 19 CLI ALPHAI CLALPA CLMAX cmgr LERI LERO CAMBER T0VC0 X0VC0 CHOT CLMAXL CLAW C. 5 6 SSPNE CHRDBP CHRDR SAVSI SAVS0 CHSTAT TI4ISTA SSPNDD DIIDAD DHDAD0 .OVC' DELTAY b*/2 Cb Cr (A X/ic (A X/d0 Input viaHAMELIST VFPLUFI 7 8 9 10 11 12 113 .

VARIABLE DU'FImJrION OF DATA BLOCK "VFIN" LOCATION VARIABL F JENGINEEPING NAM." SYMBOL DATCOM COMM iNTS/DEFINI TIONS VER.AY PEFERENCE 70 71 72-91 92 93-94 TZEFF KSHARP (t/c)Eff K Xac Input via NAMELIST VFSCHR I XAC ARCL UNUSED (15-1111 115-134 135-154 SVW B SVB SVIIB SV (WB) SV(B) SV(HB) 276 IIL L .

VERTICAL TAkIL INPUT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "VTIN" LOCATION VARIABLE AN NAME ENGiNEERINGJ DATCOm REFERENCE SYMBOL CMET/EIIIN CMET/EIIIN EL VRA I 2 3 4 5 6 CHRDTP Whop SSPNE SSPH CHRDBP CHRDR ctInput bo*/ b*/2 b/2 CL Cr (Ax/C I via NAMELIST VTPLHF 7 SAVSI SAV50 CHSTAT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 lb 17 (A X/C 0 X/C UNUSED TWISTA SSPNDD DHADI DHOAD0 TYPE TJVC DELTAY e (b/2)r0 ' 0 tic AY Input via IIAMELIST VTSCHR f18 X0VC (X/C) Ct. az Ii 19 20 21-40 41-60 61 CLI ALPHAI CLALPA CLMAX CM91 Ct Cima Cm0 (RL) (RL) 62 63 64 65 LERI LER0 CAMBER T0VC0 (t/c)0 (X/C)m (Cm) 0 0 66 67 X0VC0 CMOT 68 69 CLMAXL CLAMO ema)M= (Cy~)M~oj 277 .

VARIABLE DEFINJITION OF DATA BLOCK "VTiN" t OCATION VARI•BL E NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DAYCOM REFERENCE CCAAMENTS/DIFINI C IONS OVERLAY 70 71 72-91 92 93-94 TCEFF KSHARP XAC ARCL (t/c)Eff K X ac UNUSED Input via NAHELIST VTSCHR 95-114 115-134 135-154 svw3 SVB SVHB Sv(WB) SV(B) SV(HB) 278 .

.2.25 7.SUBSOrNIC WIflG-BODY VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK .'!B" LOCAMION VARIABLE NAME LNGINERING SY'BOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENT S/OEFINI TIONS OVER: AY UNUSED 2 KW)Interference factor of wing on 7 7 7 7 body 3WInterference 4 (CL)W(B) (CLU)B(W) wing factor of body on Lift curve slope of wing in presence of body Lift curve slope of body in presence of wing 6 7 (CDO)WB kW(B) Wing-body zero-lift drag 7 7 8 10 1) 12 13 14 ka(w) (CLi)w(B) (CLi)B() (CLi)WB 7 7 7 7 7 7.1 7 7 7 7 21 7 7 7 22 23 24-39 UNUSED W8 (20):: (4 4) WB(21)*B(43) 279 Lo .25 Wing-body zero-lift pitching moment Wing-body zero lift coefficient drag 4.3.25 (Xa/Z)W (Xa /c) B( (Xa'/cre) 8 (W) 15 16 17 18 19 (xc/Cre)-0 CIWB (COO)WB RtwB RLB Wing-body angle of attack of max lift 7.

T.T.T. '4. &. 10 in presence of body Interference factor for body in presence of H.5. (CL2)H(B) (CLQ)B(H) UNUSED (CLH)J 10 10 10 H.1.2-b. 10 26-45 46-65 66 67 68-87 88-ltoa 108 (ACLT)J (r/2wavr) (CDo)VTA (CDo)WBHV IVB(H) (Cre)T r.SUBSONIC WIIIG-BODY-TAIL PARAMETERS VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "WBT" LOCATION VARIABLE NAME ENGINEERING DATCOM SYMBOL REFERENCE COMMENTS/OEFINITIONS OY"LAV 1KjjB• 2KB(H) 3 4 5 6-25 interference factor for H. 10 to 10 10 10 tO 10 109 110-129 130-149 (xN )Z/ (CLTB)J (CLvB(H)] AKHBI AKBHI UNUSED Lift of tail in presence of bod Effect of body vortices on tatl to 10 10 lift 150 151 152-155 1O to -2• ! 280 . 4 . lift curve slope in presence of body Body lift curve slope in presence of H. Eqn.T.T. third term Non-dimensional vortex strength of tall VERTICAL & VENTRAL CDo Interference factor for body on H.

(Cy). - 281 . CiL Ckmax Input via NAMELIST WGSCHR 20 21-40 -*1-60 CLI ALPHAI CLALPA CW'AX CM0 61 Cm 0 (R LE)I 62 63 64 65 66 LERI LER0 ~'LE~0 CAMBER T3VC0 X0Vc0 CLI'AXL CLAM0 (tOc) (x/c)max o0 68 6.[2 LOCATIO)N VARIABLE NAME I ~WING INIPUT VARIABLES VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK uWGIN" ENGINEERING SYMBOL OATCOm REFERENCE COMMENTS/D)EFINiTIONS OVERLAY H P Ct Input via NAMELIST WGPLNF 2 SSPN0P b *:/2 0 5 6 CHRDBP CHRDR SAVSI Cb C (A x/ic (A 7 8 9 10 11 12 SAVS0 CHSTAT TWISTA SSPNDD DHDADI DHDAD0 TYPE0 TOVC DELTAY X0Vc )/ X/C UNUSED a (b/2)70 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 tic AY (X/c0ma CL.9 (cy~m) H=0 .-.

• ••- • .Z .. .VARIABLE DEFINITION OF DATA BLOCK "WGIN" LOCATION VARIABME NAME ENGINEERING SYMBOL DATCOM REFERENCE COMMENTS/DEFINITIONS ALERtAY 70 TCEFF (t/C)Eff Input via NAHELIST WGSCHR 71 72-91 92 93 94 95-100 101 KSHARP XAC ARCL Ycm CLD SLOPE DWASH K X ac (Y/c)max (C )Design (Transon i c 6h / 282 *1 .

rules given Appendix A are observed. printed coding sheets of all inputs for Digital be used as a quick check of inputs. conversely. 8 i. It is the responsibility of tlhe user to assure that his data deck follows the description and limitations described in this user's manual. or These sheets can either copied and used directly by users. inputs tion 3) (discussed should in the limitations and requirements of namelist Appendix A) and of each namelist/control card (SecThrough each variable is assigned a separate they are not required to appear on separate as shown in be observed. line on these punched in cards. as lcng as the namelist coding the example problems. • 283 . They may be written as multiple varaibles per card. the method implementation manual (Volume II) and the Datcom. coding sheets. No attempt has been made to sJ gle out those variables which must be defined (or. not input) because of the enormous number of variable input combinations available. In using these sheets.I " APPENDIX D USER KIT This section contains Datcom.

. INF (1 ). N... . . .NF(1)= .. .$ t TC. . _. ..4[5T6'?7. ... .... . T. (2) VARY M. ...1. ..).. CSA R L.. MALT MUST EQUAL NMACH) OF EQUIVALENT SAND RCOUGHN. ... . - _ _:-_ _ _ . ... . .... ....TmS.A'.. _ .. S... NMACH. F NUMBER OF MACH NUMBERS OR VELOCITIES TO BE RUN FREESTREAM MACH NUMBERS (MMACH VALUES) FREESTREAN VELOCITIES (QOACH VALUES) p NUMBER OF ANGLES OF ATTACK TO BE RUN ANGLES OF ATTACK (NALPHA VALUES) REYNOLDS NUMBER PER UNIT LENGTH (NMACH VALUES) NUMBER OF ALTITUDES TO BE RUN GEOMETRIC ALTITUDES (MALT VALUES) FREESTREAN STATIC PRESSURE (MALT VALUES) FREESTREAN STATIC TEMPERATURE (HALT VALUES) . I-10I-0 21-30 9 0• 2!3.= tYPERS...AACH.... . RUG f C. .)T. .R.... . . __. NA .. NOTES: Leave Unused Columns Blank All Inputs require decimal point..8-9T0 3-1-40 T i•345i6i7ý8i9aI0J!' .... . ....TMACKH:. . 285 / ... FOR HYPERSONIC ANALYSIS FOR M _>1.. $SEND $_ýjmNS.R= ... ... LCOP.....4 UPPER MACH LIMIT FOR SUBSONIC ANALYSIS LOWER MACH LIMIT FOR SUPERSONIC ANALYSIS MRAG DUE TO LIFT TRANSITION FLAG VEHICLF WEIGHT FLIGHT PATH NNGLE LOOP CONTROL: (1) VARY h & M. I I..ESSURFACE REFERENCE AREA LONGITUDINAL REFERENCE LENGTH LATERAL REFERENCE LENGTH ... 1..=.... ... ....XX Refer to users variables. coding rules. ._e ...L. ... .... GAMM..... .. .1.. ... _ _.-::::::(1). either -X.. (3) VARY h (FOR LOOP ..I P I -N F (....GROUP I INPUTS ~~~~11213*~56789012345[6'77:8 ... .CHCDj. -.. E F7.. ...____ . . ... R...... manual (Volume I) for complete See Appendix 8 of Volt Column 1 must be blank. F ... A L. .--.TRUE. . .. WT .=.-. .. .S... MACH( 1 ). .= ... A.. ..

E 19 .. . _. 7. . . .. .. . .. .. .8 9 bt . . .-.. . .. . . . . . . . 11 ..XXX or -X. . . L. .. . . . . 13. . ... . _.2_75860 .. . .41-50 - 51-60 61-70 1.. . . . . 71-80 . .. . 23 -4-5 67. . . .XXE-YY. .. . .. . . .. lete description of all Volu-ne I for namelist __.

T. P .. ...F..FOR V. See Appen require decimal point. . APEX N.. . . Os.... .T.. . LENGTH OF PERIPHERY AT EACH STATION (NX VALUES) 4 PLANFORM HALF-WIDTH AT EACH STATION (NX VALUES) *( Z ZL . Zw•. AtL..V. .H•0O.Y. (fl ) P . APEX SCALE FACTOR .TRUE. . LOCATION LONGITUD14AL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL WING APEX VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEOREfICAL WING APEX WING ROOT INCIDENCE LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL H....L . . . . ROOT INCIDENCE LONGITJDIiiAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL V.. .T...G..T. .TU. . A.G.N T-H..CG .ZCG. OUP II INPUTS 0 t-o' " 1 i -20' t -s 21-30 ~~~~~~~~1 LONGITUDINAL CG...P V I ti4AX NIUMER OF LONGITUDINAL STATIONS LONGITUDINAL DISTANCE OF EACH STATION (NX VALUES) CRGSS-SFCTIONAL AREA AT EACH STATION (NX VALUES) ..X..... NOTES: .S ..Y.T... _X. coding rules.PE-.V. PLANE LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF H.Xw. HINGE AXIS •$S. . .T. _______.XVF. S... ABOVE REF.. ... Leave Unused Columns Blank All ImUt variables.....IN. XH ZH.LOGITIALC. APEX VERTICAL LOXATION OF THEORETICAL V.T.. APEX LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL V. AL II ...T...I.... TAIL TYPE: ( CONICAL (2)OGIVE BODY NOSE LENGTH BODY CYCLINDRICAL SECTION LENGTH NOSE BLUNTNESS DIAMETER MD CALCULATION TYPE (2) JOUeENSON METHOD TYPE: (1) EXISTING ._.L-.... APEX VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL H. LOCATION (NRC) VERTICAL C. NX X(I ._ _Z.. UPPER BODY SURFACE Z COORDINATES (NX VALUES) LOWER BODY SURFACE Z COORDINATES (NX VALUES) NOSE TYPE:II(1 CONICAL (2)OGIVE "74 SE7ST.. .. .. manual (Volume I) Reftr to users 287 / // / ....... . SCAL V1I._ ZVF.T..... . APEX VERTICAL LOCATION OF THEORETICAL V. Colemn 1 must be blank.F...I. ME..

. . . . . .. . . either -X.[t jj) 1S 14 1* 6A$7 11Q I 4 I . . . i _i i • . . . . 1e frocomplete description of all ) *Appendix B of Volume I for nmelist . . . . . . . . . - . . . . .______ 41-50 IW9. . . .5 6 ? 8 9O-0 11 . .XXE-TY. . . . . .. . i I - - I I . . . . . . . .01 121314. . . . . 51-60-0 . .. . I3LI4 5 7 .. . . . . isint. . . . . .. | . . . . . . . . i i i - I __. . . . ______ _____ . . . .. . . . . ./ V. . . !? •1. . . . .XXX or -X. . . .1 UI . . . . . . . . . ..

. I must be blank.G. S---- TWI.A= OA I 6 hD TP= _______________ EXTENDED FUSELPAE AREA BETWiEEN MACH LINES LONGITUDINAL DISTANCE FROM C. coding rules.. j Leave Unused Colum~ns Blank ~All inputs requir. decimal point.SPN= C"108 ihZStDX a IKBDARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE OUTBOARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE REFERENCE CHORD STATION FOR SWEEP ANGLES INPUT TWIST' ANGLE OUTBOARD PANEL SENT-SPAN WITH DIHEDRAL INBOARD PANEL DIHEDRAL ANGLE O'JTBOARD PANEL DIHEDRAL ANGLE 'PLANFORN TUPE: (1) STRAIGK( (2) DOUBLE DELTA (3)CRANKED FUSELAGE AREA BETWEEN MACH LINES____ SY SAV~S C STAýT JWI..40 A0 TF f * * TIP CHORD OUTBOARD PANEL SENT-SPAN EXPOSED PANEL SEMI-SPANSP THEORETICAL PA!IEL SEMI-SPAN CHORD AT BREAK-POINT ROOT CHORD CiO s JP S. 9( tNOTES*. (1) STRAIGNT (2) DOUBLE DELTA CAVS. See Appendix 8 *289 maw ...GtUP It INPUTS (crntinued) 11 -SWG PL N F 12 13 14 TIP CHORD OUTBOAR.. TO CENTROID OF FUSELAGE AREA BETWEEN HACH LINES C X-E I T. RTA I D (3 CRNE .D PANEL SENT-SPANSSNP EXPOSED PANEL SEMI-SPANE THEORETICAL PANEL SEMI-SPANSNE CHOR AT BREAK-POINT ROOT CHDROR INBOARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE OUTBOARD PANEL SWEEP AN4GLE!kV50= REFERENCE CHORD STATION FOR SWEEP ANLES INPU TWIST ANGLE OUBADPANEL S04I-SPAN WITH DIHEDRL INBOARD PANEL DIHEDRAL ANGLE OUTSBOARD0DIHEDRAL ANGLE PANEL PLANFORM TYPE. althes fColumn t Re~fecto users manual (Volme I) forc variables.STA = TWIP D4A .

41-5 51S-to.XXU-YY.XXX or -X. for complete description of all dii B of Volume I for namelist .V4 . 71-600 8 8.A A-&tSfGVI0 0 I iiL 45 19 11 4 !Q ' 7 Tb either -X.?.

. . NOTES: Leave Unused Columns Blank All Inputs require decimal point Refer to users variables... . .=.SS_ P..T..F H. . ..Si . coding rules.. .... .. ...... . ... . SAVS I.PE= _ .._CHS"A -= ________ . . 41:5•:6M89ý0! I 22314 11-zo 6 •ý6 • O!4 2130 21-30 6 7 T.. . ..SPE!... . EXPOSED PANEL AREA NOT INFLUENCED BY WING OR H.. O'I'•CARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE (1) STRAIGHT (2) DOUBLE DELTA REFERENCE CHORD STATION FOR SWEEP ANGLES INPUT P1J'LFCM)4 TYPE: . : _ _14= . CHRO8 P=CH O.. .. . EXPOSED PANEL AREA BETEEN P'ACH LINES ... . ...... . ... SV_( I_).T... _HRD.. SSPN_ P=. manual (Vou..... ... . .) STRAIGHT (2) DOUBLE DELTA EXPOSED PANEL AREA BETWEEN MACH LINES OF WING ._ ...T.. .... . . C.T... . .. EXPOSED PANEL AREA NOT INFLUENCED BY WING OR H... . = . . _.. . . __?_--. . _ 5A_ _ _ CH S... A. _ ____ . a P _-_. .. .... CHRR= __S__V.. _. EXPOSED PANEL AREA BETWEFN MACH LINES OF WING vw8(1 ) ' IV )= " ...... . . .. SEMI-SPAN __ _HTP_ _ -. . ... .... /" (ACJPII INPUTS (conti r0 -Ia '.... ... . ... ..... .S (3) CRANKED TY. .=_.NE... -.... . . .e See Api I Column I must be blank. TIP CHCRO OUTBOARD PANEL SEMI-SPAN EXPOSED PANEL SEMI-SPAN THEORETICAL PANEl. . .. .. . _ (3) CRANKED Ty P E 1N WS C .... EXPOSED PANEL AREA BETWEEN MACH LiNES OF H... N. . . . . .. . . ..T. __ _ __ __. . ..URD AT BREAK-POINT ROOT CHORD I-ECARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE E CUT 20ARD P ANE L SW EP ANGLE REFERENCE CHORD STATION FOR SWEEP ANGLE INPUT PLA•iFCRP4 TYPE: (... S V S•( LI) = . 291] . ..a"-u ]• $Vr' P TIP CHORD CUTOOAPD PANEL SEMI-SPAN EXPOSED PANEL SE-I-SPAN THECRETICAL PANEL SENI-SPAN FLNF c10o AT BREAK-POINT ROT C•CRD IIX:ARD PANEL SWEEP ANGLE CH9 U P= SS Pr P= . . ... ..SSPN= .

XXX or -X.. (Volumd 1) for complete description oif all Seo Appendix 8 of Voluse I for nhmelist .Y.S 31-40 . 41- -60-- ~ - lank foal point.XXE-. either -X.

N PT S= -. and 100% CHORD ASPECT RATIO CLASSIFICATION FACTOR SEC. .WG e.00% AND 0. 20%..30 31-40 . 21. :U:PPER( 1 =0 LONER SURFACE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) NEA.. IF CAMBERED AIRFOIL MAXIMUM THICKNESS (OUTBOARD PANEL) CHORD LOCATIOA AT MAXIMUM THICKNESS (OUTBOARD PANEL) SECTION ZERO LIFT PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIEINT (OUTBOARD PANEL) MAXIMUN LEFT COEFFICIENT AT MACH EQUALS ZERO SECTION LIFT CURVE-SLOPE AT MACH EQUALS ZERO P. DWASH= t cm= -.GROUP II INPUTS (continued) 1-10 MAXINMUM THICKNESS (INBOARD PANEL) DIFFERENCE IN ORDINATES AT 6. . 80%. .. NOTES: Leave Unused Columns Blank All Inputs require decimal point..) EAN.TAY -XV•c= C LI= AL PHA I = C ýLALPAL(1')=.TRUE. .H .RD. $WG SHR. . .. 24ý56 7690 1 2 34_5 .. . . Column rules.TAVC = DEL.. either -X. . . .0. 40%..ANF. S.M EFFECTIVE THICKNESS RATIO_ SHARP-NOSED AIRFOILS WAVE-DRAG FACTOR SURFACE SLOPE Ar 0%.%= CAMBER= TOVCO= X VC0= M T= I-20 . CLD = . XC.(I )-O.. . be blank. .15%CHORD CHORD LOCATION AT MAXIMUM THICKNESS (INBOARD PANEL) DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT ANGLE OF ATTACK AT DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT SECTION LIFT-CURVE-SLOPE (NMACH VALUES) SECTION MAXIMUN COEFFICIENT (tU4ACH VALUES) LIFT SECTION ZERO LIFT PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT (INBOARD PANEL) LEA)ING EDGE RADIUS (INBOARD PANEL) LEADING EDGE RADIUS (OUTBOARD PANEL) . 2 OR 3 MAIIWJM AIRFOIL CAMBER CONICAL CAMBER DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT IPE OF AIRFOIL COORDINATES: (1) COORDINATES (2) MEAN THICK DIBER OF SECTION INPUT POINTS (50 MAX) ABSCISSAS OF INPUT POINTS (NPTS VALUES) UPI SURFACE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) .M t 5 HE P= AR L0PE (1) ARL RCA_= XAC ( I . coding I must See Appendix B of Vo 293 i ii I - .. . . ) "S " . T H :::C: 1. . 7 8-9 0 12T3Th 4 .TY P EI N-. . . . SC. CLMAX L= CjL .0Weft(1.'. .X Refer to users manual (Volume I) for complet variables. . 60%. LIKE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) THICKNESS DISTRIBUTION ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) " " L. .ION AERODYNAMiC CENTER MATCON METHOD FOR DOWNWASH: 1. . CLMAX ( 1) 'CM 1=' L ER I:= L ER. . .

fther -X. or complete descriptfon of all Ix I of Volume I for namelfst .XXE-VV.ZXX or -X.

-I C • END S -NOTES: Leave Unused Columns Blank All lnputs require decimal point.. 4 .. . .. . IF CAMBERED AIRFOIL : MOMENT COEFFICIENT (INBOARD) L-6 I-. . 21-30 4. ... ..XATCiCU YCM CONICAL CANBER DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT TYPE OF AIRFOIL COORDINATES: (I)COORDINATES (2)NEAN I THICK 5M ER OF SECTION INPUT POINTS (50 MAX) ABSCISSAS OF INPUT POINTS (NPTS VALUES) UPPER SURFACE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) . .• .YU P Ei 1 0. See Appendix I of V. Column I must be blank.--. • .. LOWER SURFACE ORDAINTES (NPTS VALUES) MEAN LINE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) THICKNESS DISTRIBUTION ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) a 1. _ ___l _El LEADING EDGE RADIUS (INBOARD PANEL) LEADING EDGE RADIUS (OUTBOARD PANEL) MAXIMUM THICKNESS (OUTBOARD PANEL) CHORD LOCATION AT MAXIMUM THICKNESS (OUTBOARD PANEL) CAMER: T____ _X__vc--_= SECTION ZERO LIFT PITCHING MOMENT COEFFICIENT (OUTBOARD) CM0T= SECTION LIFT-CURVE-SLOPE AT MACH EQUALS ZERO PLANFORN EFFECTIVE THICKNESS RATIO SHARP-NOSED AIRFOILS WAVE-DRAG FACTOR CL AMW TC I k F F= I PA SECTION AERODYNAMIC CENTER NAXIMUM AIRFOIL CAMBER . .- .. -. coding rules.- -.= PA I A I 4ot-to . s .--..TRUE.... SECTION MAXIMUM LIFT COEFFICIENT (NMACH VALUES) SECTION ZERO LIFT PITCHING ..LOT YPE IN= NPTSi ýX D 17 . MEA ( ) 0. . Z. -C.. 112 I .X Refer to users manual (Volume 1) for complet variables."J SC "a NAXIMUM THICKNESS (INBOARD PANEL) DIFFERENCE IN ORDINATES AT 6. .--- .00% AND 0. . THTIJV. either -X.- amUP it INPUTS (continued) "" e._$.xvC=-L I= ALPHA I CL A.15% CHORD CHORD LOCATION AT MAXIMUM THICKNESS (INBOARD PANEL) DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT ANGLE OF ATTACK AT DESIGN LIFT COEFFICIENT SECTION LIFT-CURVE-SLOPE (NMACH VALUES) DELTAY. . . 295 ...

041-50 51-6O 61-70 -S sr -X.XXE-YY. complete description of all a Of Volume I for namelist .XXU or -X.

. 1) for C4 C1 1 t Me hbld efirlos.1 Posi.dwi. qit~w IWo to vwas mamta1 (veha. S" APPveii I3a 297 ' . (INBOARD PAWEL) ______________ CPOW LOCATION AT MXM Th!CKWESS (INBARD PAWLt) Y L!____________________L____I_ SECTION LIPT-CLJW4-SIOPE (MetACH VALUES) LEADING F1W4 RADIUS (INBOA~RD PANEL) LEAD!NG5 EON~ RADIUS MU~TEMARD I PANEL)_______________________ OP114W THICKNSS (04fl'BOARD PANEL) CeOMO LOCATION AT ~WPOXJMI THI4CKNESS (OUTBOARD PANEL) 0 PLANPOR EFFECTIVE T~4TCIKWSS RATIOJ ______________________ fPA-VOSM0 AIRFOILS WAVE-OPA AW"C? 04TTO FACT~OR & KAR ____________________ CLASS~IFC4TION WTPC~f rMOf AIRFOIL CO'TA~:(1 )tOMRTMtT9S (2)M~AR 9 TRICK WPW* (W Sf 11OR IIW9T POIN4TS (540 MAY) AWSISS4S VP IRPlf POINTS (fERTS VALUES) UPM lt1WAiff LOWER Si*PACI opov710TS (wTrS VALUES) ORDRATIS (WqTS VALUES) - fYP1 1-4 1 1 -0.GOPIt INPUTS (coootlnuo6) WIR~W T)4TCKNESS..ASM . VL EP()0 MNEA OWORATES (0P75 VALUES) LIN MCWfS~ES 0ISTPIMTIOR 6ORTYTES Oj9TS MAUMS p~el)0 ()0 I' All low $ ?"pipe~.

.1-04 -3 . .. r . .. . • . . for comiplete description of all Mdix B of Volume I for namelist . .. .. ..XXX or -X. J_7 T - either -X. . . . . .51 0 6-70.XXE-YY. . . . . .

Column 1 must be blank... . .. .. . TTHIC.K (|I)=O NOTES: Leave Unused Columns Blnk All inputs require decimal point... MEAN LINE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) THICKNESS DISTRIBUTION ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) MEmANt(1 )j=ýO. _ER_1-=. See Appendix 8 299 C -v~- / ___-____________ .....N= N P T S= X C RQ(I}O=....... C=_ XjVC-= ....... Y::P. TYPE OF AIRFOIL COORDINATES:(I)COORDINATES(2)MEAN & THICK NU'-BER OF SECTION INPUT POINTS (50 MAX) ABSCISSAS OF INPUT POINTS (NPTS VALUES) UPPER SURFACE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) LOWER SURFACE ORDINATES (NPTS VALUES) TypE.... . ...... • -...GROUP II INPUTS (continued) l-•O 1-20 F ... ....ESS (UUTBOARD PANEL) _. L _E_ R..=_.. either Refer to users manual (Volume I) for co variables.. ..EL) MAXIFMU4 THICKNESS (OUTBOARD PANEL) C14CRD LOCATION AT MAXIMIUM THICKN.. . coding rules... _ _ "_.. .. .HAR..P E R... XM..• C_ = ... PLANFORM4 EFFECTIVE THICKNESS RA-IO SHARP-NOSED AIRFOILS WAVE-DRAG FACTOR ASPECT RATIQ CLASSIFICATION FACTOR TC E F F= K... .. .... .._-__"__... ............... .... P= ___C.. 21-30 ' 31-40 MAXIMUM THICKNESS (INBOARD PANEL) CHORD LOCATION AT MAXIMUM THICKNESS (INBOARD SECTION LEFT-CURVE-SLOPE (NMACH VALJES) PANEL) __ sv F SCHR _ _V_ .. YI .S. ..... . -. .......yWýER( )O .... .. LEADING EDGE RADIUS (INBOARD PA/NEL) LEADING EDGE RADIUS (OUTBOARD PAN. .......

1-70 -S her -X. Complete description of all S of Yolme I for namoelist .XX1 or -lIRXE-YT.O6I7--05.

). . a 11 --------- N. . a eAwlv r IMG-mOO? CD VS. . .. . . .)-. . WING CL. . .. .TC. ) M:S.. either -X. W. CL VS... VS.. . ) VN. vs. CNAH. . . 1.. a INRG-BOOY VS. N.. s MN. .1V .. .. a COLS(. w is vs. . . . VING400DY C~VS. . . . . vs?. .. . ..T. N.. .(.. WIN6Co v.SOW It INPUTS (continued) 1-10 11-20 I 21-30 97AND8 01.OVVim-D C. .T. . MNv c 6 0 31-40 6175679I [ CLAS (-. .)o~r--L CLA . vs. . . .. . . . .T. ..(I. . a 1 Mci (. .. . . ..- . •cMAW(•. - -. C.CLVS... .Y. . coding rules. . c.. CVS. .2 3r45 6:7WT0 11231415'6-7 f CKS W4CNCE IN COLM BODIY C VS. .) . . . .... . . .l)-• . See Appendix B of Vol 30 /1 - "-. . . . ..)•-. . aLW N. os 1 " 1 N..Y. . . . . . vs.T. " C (-c I . . S.. . VlITICAL TAIL CO..* . . . -C-W 1(. . I .OTES: Leave Unused Columns Blank All Inputs require decmal point.• . .( 6 fb L vsS. .- WIN GCV VcS.Xj Refer to users manual (Volume I) for completO variables. . . . CO . . .. N. VS.. . . WIN c.i. . - .~.(. Column I must be blank. . .

4-051-60 01-?0 ?1-so scriptfon of all I for hwelist .

See Appendix of .2. contimued) 1-1 I 4'0 4 56-6 se-20 -50I z 5to 3 o I. *VS. . . . . * . . . . . .OA(lI)-.41SWllf VIUSUmy C VS.. .. i ..IJ OWIt IWU• (XPI. eiter -Z S.-.T.w se/a VS.T. VNG . bef vs. Wafr to user" manual (Volume I) far awpl variables. . . . . qqVS.. . INI. . i i i .. . -.. 4 LwA N.OI*. j03303 .. . . .. N. I owding rules. C. . . . . 1 must be blank. 1 AL AI LW-. . . . LVAXALPH- c_ C LMW_ _ _ _ __ _ L Me NT - -- -CMN NOTE: Lea"e Unused Columns Blank All impots re ire decimal point.

Xxx or -N.XUE-TY.F41-50 51-O To-7 71-SO or -1. mmplate descriptioni of all j of volume I for "Welist .

.•C.jEANGL.R ENGINE THRUST AXIS INCIONECE NUMBER OF EAGINES THRUST COEFFICIENT AXIAL LOCATION OF PROPELLOR HUB VERTICAL LOCATION OF PROPELLOR NUBD-..GaUP III INPUTS -oC 0-2o0 I219 514 6S90 21-30 31-40o 31. .T.'- :! " . See Appendix I of Volume coding rules. Column 1 must be blank. INL. 106 1'2'3•415 6 7 0 9 Q• I•2i3A124j61!89 0t12 - A I .. NENGS.-..TRUE.TGT" - rESTMP- J ERAD- NOTES: Leave Unused Columns Blank All inputs require decimal point.L C. HA• - P RAý_. CR-.9 PROPELLOR RADIUS MNMBER OF PROPELLOR BLADES (PER ENGINE) LADE ANGLE AT 0. FOR COUNTER-ROTATING PROPELLOR (COUNTER-CLOCKWISE) PWA . PROPELLOR RADIUS EMPIRICAL NORMAL FORCE FACTOR BLADE WIDTH AT 0. ".6 PROPELLOR RADIUS BLADE WIDTH AT 0. variables.ý ENG FC T SWAPA3SWA P RA6-. . J EL " JE. S $P.3 PROPELLOR RADIUS BLADE WIDTH AT 0.. T L P. T HKS TC-P-. • SEND JE T PWE J ENGINE THRUST LINE INCIDENCE NUMBER OF ENGINES THRUST COEFFICIENT AXIAL tOCATIO4 OF INLET VERTICAL LOCATION OF EXIT AXIAL LOCATION OF EXIT INLET AREA - NEN THSTCJ.75 PROPELLOR RADIUS LATERAL LOCATION OF ENGINE .XXX ot Refer to users manual (Volume I) for complete des.J EVELOANS TMP- __C- . BWAPR9NPBPEI AR 75y p.A J. either -X. __ _ _ __ EXIT ANGLE EXIT VELOCITY AMBIENT TEMFERATURE LATERAL LOCATION OF ENGINE EXIT TOTAL PRESSURE AMBIENT STATIC PRESSURE EXIT RADIUS EXIT STATIC TEMPERArURE J A LJE OLC--J. 305 .-..

description of all F Volime I for flamlist Ina .XXE-TY.41-50 51-60 61-?0 71-S0 -.11 fatet o -X. 1.

MING SEMI-APEX ANGLE .- VERTICAL PANEL SPAN ABOVE LIFTING SURFACE VERTICAL PANEL SPAN FUSELAGE DEPTH AT VERTICAL PANEL 0. FOR PORTIONS OF BASE AFT OF NON-LIFTING SURFACE LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF C.G. PzF VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM BASE CENTROID TO REFERENCE PLANE EFFECTIVE WEDGE ANGLE (SW. . _____ NOTES: Leave Unused Columns Blank All inputs require decim al PL I St.SWET_- L PERSBAS P -SIA-S. *Ith Refer to users manual lurGw for ) variables. 'Set A tendix . *LFXC.25 MAC DISTANCE BETWEEN VERTICAL PANELS PI. TO 0.XC-E NW- .ANFORM AREA OF ONE VERTICAL PANEL TRILING EDGE ANGLE OF VERTICAL PANEL SECTION LONGITUDIN4AL DISTANCE FROM C.E-..GROU III INPUTS (continued) 1g4-7io -0 11Z346700 12-37 Ar -0082 NMBSER OF GROUND HEIGHTS TO RUN GROUND HEIGHTS (NGH VALUES) O A OROHT 1.-ý NVL.$.GTETD ItUNo N Se-_______ SOSS t.G.TRUE.TRUJE. TO 0.2 BODY LENGTH LONGITUDINAL DISTANCE FROM NOSE TO CENTROID OF S85 LONGITUDINAL DISTANCE FROM NOSE TO CENTROID OF PLANFORM AREA IT L-_ .RO LEADING EDGE) PROJECTED FRONTAL AREA___________ SURFACE ASPECT AREA PLANFOSI AREA (USED AS REFERENCE AREA) -Z. XC INS IX.25 MAC VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM C.G.. S = -_______5___________E______F______ D __________ _________________________ ________________________ ROUND LEADING EDGE PARAMETER ROUND LEADING EDGE PARAMETER BOOY LENGTH (USED AS LONGITUDINAL REFERENCE LENGTH) WETTED AREA EXCLUDING BASE AREA BASE PERIMETER BASE AREA BASE MAXIMM HEIGHT EASE SPAN (USED AS LATERAL REFERENCE LENGTH) . S1Oy-_ S vv HI Tf. ceding rules. FOR ROUNDED NOSE CONFIGURATION PROJECTED SIDE AREA PROJECTED SIDE AREA FORWARD OF 0. Column I must be blank.25 MAC BVP jkV.

. .S[€[011 71-SO / .a4 I 61-70 I 34. .i $S•967. . Ittr . . . .. . . . . .5i78 90. .XXE-IY. .2:3•. .4-SO " A-40 |61|I718A9 0PI 2314 6 ijL 51-60 j. or complete description of all ix I of Vou. . .XXX or -X. . I for n. .elist .

( _. I C-KE1 D FO-. CPME_0.CAPFIN 1 )- --- INCREMENTAL SECTION LIFT DUE TO FLAP DEFLECTION INCREMENTAL SECTION PITCHING MOMENT DUE TO FLAP DEFLECTION AVERAGE CHORD OF BALANCE AVERAGE THICKNESS OF CONTROL AT HINGE LINE FLAP NOSE SHADE: (1) ROUND (2) ELLIPTICAL (3) SHARP TYPE OF JET FLAP: (1)PURE JET (2)IBF (3) EBF (4)COH9 TWO DINENSIONAL JET EFFLUX COEFFICIENT - OOCQLM T=. .6 . CMU-= ___________ JET DEFLECTION ANGLES (NDELTA VALUES) 0E-L-J-E--(-T1=.NQEL TA-. SCMýD 5 -TCý= l-= 1 .TA (1 Jt.PE.G. AT 95% AND 99% CHORD FLAP CHORD (INBOARD END) FLAP CHORD (OUTBOARD END) SVAN LOCATION OF INBOARD FLAP END SPAN LOCATION OF OUTBOARD FLAP END WINSa CHORD AT INBOARD FLAP END (NOELTA VALUES) WING CHORD AT OUTBOARD FLAP END (NDELTA VALUES) . coding rules.E.GROUP III INPUTS (continued) 9.MOWSE OF DEFLECTION ANGLES. 9 MAX DEFLECTION ANGLES (NDELTA VALUES) T)MVI Or AIRFOIL T. P. CONTROL SUFC TYPT..11 Refer to users manual (Volume I) for completi Column I must be blank.SAP-- F .5PAN b-ý PIM E I 11.E. FFJIT1= EBF EFFECTIVE JET DEFLECTI ON ANGLES (NDELTA VALUES) NOTES: Leave Unused Columns Blank All Inputs require decimal point. AT 901 AND 99% CHORDPH TANGEN OF AIRFOIL T.E-L. See Appendix I of Vel 309 ..NTýYýPE-=-- JE-TF-L-P=.HýE T-E PCýH *-OF. either -1.2 D' 4 5.

Volume I for namelist .XXX or -X..0. A. . .XXE-YY. .•* rIr .-60 41-5o 61-70 ' 1-8o X.. . lete description of all . . . . *.

See Appendix 8 of. Volume I fot codtnq rules.t--T GROUP III INPUTS (continued) CO?~TROL SURFACE TYPE KNI ____- 101203z _________________________E_______=__ xZ1796 OF SPAt LOCATION OF INBOARD END CONlTROL SURFACE SPAI4 LOCATION OF OURBOARD 00D OF CONTOL SURFACE TAN.ENT OF AIRFOIL T.E. ELA(1) AILERON CNOR6e AT INBOARD FLAP STATION__________________________________ ___________M____________________D____ AILERON CHORD AT OUTBOARD FLAP STATION OttL TAUS-1_______________ RPOJECTED HEIGHT OF DEFLECTOR (NDELTA VALUES) PROJECTED HEIGHT OF SPOILER (NOELTA VALUES) 1________________ DISTAN~CE FROM WIING L.E. either -X. .XXX Of -. Column I must be blank. 9 MAX ~ _________________L______________________ fNI S' S PAN r12 M__________ PHEE ----- ETL 'i . Refer to users manual (Volume I) for comaplete descripi variables. TO SPOILER LIP (NOELTA VALUES) DISTANCE FROM WJING L. AT 90% AND 99! C14ORD LEFT HAND CON'TROL DEFLECTION ANGLES (NOELTA VALUES) RIGHT HAND CONTROL DEFLECTION ANGLES (NDELTA VALUES) ER OF CONTROL DEFLECTIONS. TO SPOILER HINGE LINE PROJECTED SPOILER HEIGHT____________________________________ X5CC1) XPM NOTES: Leave Unused Colums Blank X-1 All inputs require decimal point.E.

.. . S ..in of all Wellst ".... .yy. . .. . .... . .a1 .. ...0 6 7- 9 C .

CI _________ C.GROUP III INPUTS (continued) ~12 a119-d T 25 v-5 ?'a e: I i 13 66 0 6 CONTROL TAB TYPE: (I)TAB (2) TRIM (3)BOTH CONTROL TAB INBOARD CHORD CONTROL TAB OUTBOARD CHORD SPAN SPAN TRIM TRIM SPAN LOCATION OF INBOARD) CONTROL TAB END LOCATION OF O'ITROARD CONTROL TAB END TAB INBOARD CHORE) TAB OUTBOARO CHORD LOCATION OF INBOARD TRIM TAP END SPAN LOCATION OF OUTBOARD TRIM TAB END Ch CONTROL SURFACE C eCONTROL S$C.B TT.0N TA.F.GCMAX= . See Appendix B a 313/ . either Ree ousers manual (Volume I) for com Coun1must be blank. MXIMUlM STICK GEARING TAB SPRING EFFECTIVENESS AERODYNAMIC BOOST LINK RATIO CONTROL TAB GEAR RATIO t(-1d /4ca Ký S-----RL.YP-E. (F-I-TC= ýC F0(T C ~0C= ft. 52= 83= ______________________ SURFACE C aTRIM TAB C TRIM TAB Q2. *G D EL R NOTES: LevCUuemClms ln All input: require decimal Point. 1T T-= _5FATjT= ________ __j T T= BrDT0 8 1. .=.= 0ý3 = .

.f Volume I for n. . .1i oither -1. .ZRE-YY. . . .- . . . . // /. . . . . . . . . . . . .111 or -X. . *. . . . . . .. . -. . • . . . . . . . . for comp~lete descriptionl of all d I o . I.ý .*. .el.• .st I. . . . . . .1 71-00. .. . . .o . . .31I-40 'I 41-5I0 piI--s0 -7 l -Go r . . .. . S . . . . . . . . . . .m . .

NOTES. .-. DIN N) a.. .__. NAA.T.T. COT•lrF TRIM CHARACTERISTICS COMPUTE DYNAMIC DERIVATIVES DEFINE DEFINE DEFINE DEFINE WING DFSIGNATION H.S -.. . _. . .... ..-... . DERIV RAO) PRINT PARTIAL OUTPUT C-MPJTE CONFIGURATION BUILD-UP STORE SELECTED PARAMETERS FOR PLOTT1ILG PA I___T__. NACA--V.____... . .....ANIKS NAY NOT APPEAR IN CONTROL CARO NAMES EA WIERE SPECIFIED SEE SECTION 3... mU.. SYSTE OF UNITS (EX... . . . .. . . 4&T .F... CASEID CASE 1) DERIVATIVE ANGULAR UNITS (EX. DESIGNATION DUMP A. . OE ASE I V .F. ...L. . .I . . ._.. _3 _90I - -3 2_ 0 1- -- S - . . . . 4.. I T _-. . DUMP COMPUTATIONAL DATA ARRAYS (EX. CASE TITLE (EX.. - -. . . B) . DESIGNATION V. OW OF CASE INPUTS CASEý ___________ ------ .. . _...._.. NACA-W. ....L..ACA. • .. .__...--H-.... DIAMFP... _...... . DESIGNATION V..IST -AV ... I... n.T . . ..._ _ 7 / * A " .' . . . Leve Unused Columns Blank ALL CONTROL CARDS START IN COLUMN CIE . r . . . U.5 OF VOLUME I FOR DESCRIPTION CONTROL CARDS j ~315 ( I. . -J PT GR U IV I N U S OP PRINT NAMELIST INPUTS SAVE CASE DATA FOR NEXT CASE o AME. . .

. -- / .. .. _1-6 61-70 ' . . I. .. . . . . . m . . . . . .. .. . .. .. ... . i . . . . .. OF . . ALL . .0 T 41T-50 1 . .. . . . ?i-o 3 . . "TION •. . WEt~IS EXCEPT // . . .

NPL Aero Report 1238. 1969.: 1953. L.S. 4. and Stivers. Jr. Oct.REFERENCES 1. i JI i Ii S~317 Pl 6 -.. Weber. The Calculation of the Pressure Distribution on a Thick Cambered Aerofoil at Subsonic Speeds Including the Effects of the Boundary Layer. 3. The Calculation of the Pressure Distribution Over the Surface Swept Wings with Symmetrical Aerofoil Sections. (Revised Air Force. The Calculation of the Pressure Distribution on the Surface of Thick Cambered Wings and the Design of Wings with Given Pressure Distribution. G. D. H. 5. NACA TR-824.: Air Force. Flight Dyn. B. and Coordinates and Section Characteristics November . 1960.. Transonic Wing Design No. '. Weber. Summary McDonnell Douglas Characteristics Aircraft Company.1971. J. L. J. Niedling. A Computer Program for the Prediction of Airfoil Subsonic and Transonic Flow.. I.. April 1976). McDonnell Douglas Corp.. U. 1945. A. Bowers. 8.. Kinsey. E. 2. D. von Doenhoff.. of Two-Dimensional and ARC R&M 2918. .: 1967. 'j . USAF Stability and Control Datcom. 1955. Abbott. Powell. 7.: ARC R&M 3026. /.: in AFFDL-TR-71-87.: of Airfoil Data.. S. 6. L. J. W.: Lab. A Computerized Procedure to Obtain of NACA Designated Airfoils.